Home

Mark Levinson N 332 Stereo Amplifier User Manual

1. PEKU OR PESU CIRCUIT 6 VOICE PAIR PORT A CENTRAL OFFICE SIDE NOT USED SEE NOTE 2 117VAC 2 2 n z lt lt z l m lt lt WwW N CIRCUIT 8 TO EKT 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 USED FIGURE 8 27 DK16 WIRING AMPLIFIED TWO CO LINE CONFERENCE 8 31 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 PDKU CONNECTOR STATION CABLING JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS T1 VOICE DATA 4AWG GND R1 VOICE DATA _RT2 T _ R2 DC OUTPUT PT2 CKT 2 eS ees eee PR2 T3 7 EXTERNAL R3 POWER SOURCE INPUT W BL 26 BL W 1 W O 27 O W 2 W GN 28 GN W 3 W BR 29 BR W 4 W S 30 S W 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 NOT USED
2. 120 COMMERCIAL POWER OUTLET 2 PAIR MOD CORD REQUIRED RI EE c d us GND Y R 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 cc H 2 Q gt lt H lt H m lt lt u tO N DIGITAL 1000 OR 2000 SERIES TELEPHONE WITH OR WITHOUT PDIU DI PDIU DI2 OR DDSS DDCB PDIU DS AC DC EXTERNAL POWER SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS EXTERNAL POWER STRAPS ACIN 120 VDC 10 If the external power is installed cut the DC OUT spa EO CURRENT external power straps located inside the 200 MV P P MAX AC RIPPLE ON DC OUTPUT 2 telephone DPSS DOGE af PDIU See Table 8 D at the front of this section for external power requirements AC DC power supplies that meet the above P 3 requirements are available from most telephone equipment supply houses FIGURE 8 28 DK16 EXTERNAL POWER FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONE CONNECTION 8 32 TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES FAULT FINDING DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS SECTION 100 816
3. FIGURE 8 17 DK16 WIRING STANDARD TELEPHONE VOICE MAIL PSTU 8 21 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 MDF BLOCK NO COLOR PORT INTERCOM STANDARD TELEPHONE cope DESIGNATION NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER DEVICE LOCATION NOT USED T R NOT USED NOT USED T R NOT USED NOT USED T R NOT USED NOT USED T R NOT USED NOT USED T R NOT USED NOT USED T R NOT USED NOT USED T R NOT USED NOTES NOT USED DKSU SLOT NO Pf of 1 Indicate if standard telephone voice mail port etc 2 Circuit 3 or 8 can support a Background Music BGM source FIGURE 8 18 DK16 PSTU STATION MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD 8 22 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 TO PESU W FEMALE STATION CABLING JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS 24 AWG BRIDGING CLIPS Ma K W BL 26 FTI K BL W Po USED N i A TIP 2 RING 2 NOT USED E TIP RING LI CIRCUIT 3 STANDARD TELEPHONE 1 NOT USED VOICE MAIL PORT OR SIMILAR DEVICE lu lt i i Ala N
4. 7 25 CABLE W MAIL gt e A N N lt a a ES ES w See 3 amp 4 MDFB DOOR PHONE STATION NUMBERS PORT DK16 PORT A B C 02 4 551 552 553 03 12 554 555 556 AB o ES gt ES ES AR N AB AB AB a AB a NOTES 1 This figure shows DDCB connected to CKT5 of Base Unit 2 DDCB B output options SW1 Always in DOOR position SW2 DOOR position connects to door phone 50 50 LOCK position connects to door lock 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK DDCB may be connected to circuit 3 Port 02 and or circuit 4 Port 03 DDCB may be connected to circuit 5 Port 4 of DK16 Base Unit or circuit 1 Port 12 of KCDU or PDKU of DK16 Expansion Unit 5 See Table 8 D for cable lengths ES o AB o
5. Co 654321 47 FIGURE 8 3 DK8 MDF WIRING TO CO LINES KSU AND QCDU 8 8 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 TO KCDU OR PDKU IN DK16 EXPANSION UNIT OR AMPHENOL CONNCECTOR OF OR DK16 KSU W FEMALE TERMINALS BRIDGINGCLIPS T1 _ CONNECT Ri DDCB TO PT1 CIRCUIT 1 OF KCDU OR PDKU K W BL 26 1 Kk W O 27 K OW 2 K W GN 28 K GN W 8 K W BR 29 K BR W 4 K W S 30 K SW 5 K R BL 31 K BL R 6 KL 32 Kk O R 7 K R GN 33 _GN R 8 34 BR R 9 5 35 10 BK BL 36 BL BK 11 BK O 37 O BK 12 BK GN 38 GN BKJ 13 BK BR 39 14 BK S 40 S BK 15 Y BL 41 K BL Y 16 K Y O 42 K O
6. STD TEL CIRCUIT 3 MODULAR NOT USED CORD STD TEL CIRCUIT 4 OR OPTIONAL BGM 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK SOURCE DDSS BLF CONSOLE 2 CIRCUIT 8 ONLY NOTES 1 Voltage levels us 26 3 27 8 VDC PR 0 0 VDC GND dem TELEPHONE 8 Reference to FG ground ui 2 T R wires are always required PT PR are additional power wires required only for PDID DS long station runs per Table 8 D PT PR may be used with normal station runs also 3 Standard Telephone circuits 1 4 require a KSTU in the base unit FIGURE 8 8 DK16 MDF WIRING BASE UNIT P5 AMPHEN0L STATION AND RELAY CONNECTIONS 8 12 NETWORK TI RI T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
7. 53 PROGRAM 51 LCR AREA CODES 53 PROGRAM 52 LCR OFFICE CODE EXCEPTIONS FOR SPECIFIED AREA CODE 54 PROGRAM 53 SCHEDULE ASSIGNMENT eene een 55 PROGRAM 54 LCR ROUTE DEFINITION eene 56 PROGRAM 55 0 LCR MODIFIED DIGITS DELETE een 57 PROGRAM 55 1 LCR MODIFIED DIGITS ADD seen 58 PROGRAM 55 2 LCR MODIFIED DIGITS END eem 59 PROGRAM 56 LCR STATION GROUP ASSIGNMENT 60 PROGRAM DATA D NP u trien a a a a iE a uud no 60 SPEED DIALING DATA DUMBP icit ire eae cette Re rettet douce 61 LCD MESSAGING DATA acciri tacit el B tn tt bari pede 61 MODE 95 REMOTE CALLING STATION MESSAGING ADD REVIEW CHANGE 62 MODE 97 REMOTE CALLING STATION MESSAGING ADD CHANGE 63 MODE 94 REMOTE CALLED STATION MESSAGING ADD REVIEW CHANGE 64 MODE 96 REMOTE CALLED STATION MESSAGING ADD CHANGE 65 STATION CO LINE STATUS 66 GENERAL STATION ACCESS AND BUTTON ACTIVATION 66 COLINE TEST naa Su a a e eae 67 SYSTEM DATE DAV TIME SETTING 68 SPEED DIAL MODE 69 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION amp MAINTENA
8. All wiring connections must be 24 AWG twisted pairs RELAY OPTIONS Ki D INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SECTION 100 816 207 MARCH 1993 DOOR LOCK CONTROL FACILITY ALARM UNIT E DOOR LOCK OR AMP MUTE CONTROL PROGRAM 77 1 LED 07 K2 NH NIGHT RELAY OR MUSIC ON HOLD CONTROL PROGRAM 77 1 LED 05 K1 amp K2 24 1 AMP MAXIMUM FIGURE 7 7 DK16 PIOUS RELAY CONTROL FUNCTIONAL WIRING DIAGRAM 3 25 Door Lock Assignments Guide Door Lock No Prog 39 Assignments Code 71 Host DK16 PIOU PIOUS 0 Unlock Door 0 Ckt 5 DK16 1 Base Unit DDCB Unlock Ckt 3 DK8 KSU DDCB 1 Ckt 1 Expansion Unit 2 PDKU or KCDU Unlock Ckt 4 DK8 KSU DDCB Door 2 Note CKT1 must be used in installing DDCB KCDU or PDKU Must be in Port 12 Code 72 Code 73 3 30 DK16 Expansion Unit Night Transfer Music on Hold Relay Options with PIOU or PIOUS 3 31 The NHT NHR relay may be programmed for either the night relay or the MOH relay function refer to Figures 7 6 and 7 7 These functions can be provided in addition to the relay service provided by the Base Unit 3 32 When configured for the night transfer func tion with Program 77 1 the relay activates if the system is in the NIGHT mode The relay may be INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 DOOR LOCK 0 BUTTON NOTE Unlock Door 0 assigned to digital and electronic telephone
9. CIRCUIT 2 TO DKT2 OR PDIU DS CIRCUIT 3 TO OR PDIU DS OR DDCB CIRCUIT 4 TO DKT4 OR PDIU DS OR DDCB CIRCUIT 5 TO DKT5 MODULAR OR PDIU DS CORD CIRCUIT 6 TO 6 DIGITAL OR PDIU DS TELEPHONE DKT 1 WITH OR WITHOUT ADM PDIU DI PDIU DI2 CIRCUIT 7 TO DKT7 OR PDIU DS 2 z oa gt lt a lt gt 4 m lt c lt a CIRCUIT 8 OR PDIU DS RELAV CONTACTS NOTES 1 Voltage levels NOT USED T PT 26 3 27 8 VDC 3 R PR 0 0 VDC GND MALE 1 Reference to FG Ground T R wires are always required PT PR are additional power NOT USED wires required only for long station runs per Table 8 D STD TEL PT PR may be used with normal station runs also CIRCUIT 2 Standard Telephone circuits 1 2 require a QSTU to be OR BGM installed circuits 1 4 are standard on the DK8 main circuits 5 6 req
10. STANDARD INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 PDKU W FEMALE CONNECTOR BRIDGING w BL 26 LIPS T1 VOICE DATA 1 1 VOICE DATA W O 27 1 ADD POWER 2 PR1 ADD POWER K W GN 28 K GN W 3 K W BR 29 K BR W 4 K w S 30 K Sw 5 K R BL 31 6 K R O 32 K O R 7 K 33 8 K R BR 34 BR R 9 K R S 35 K S R 10 K BK BL 36 11 K BK O 37 K O BK 12 K BK GNJI 38 K GN BK 13 K BK BR 39 K BR BK 14 BK S 40 K S BK 15 K Y BL 41 16 K Y O 42 17 K Y GN 43 K GN Y 18 K Y BR 44 BR Y 19 K Ys 45 K S V 20 20 K V BL 46 41 BL V 21 42 K V O 47 43 22 44 _V GN 48 K GN V 23 49 MODULAR 24 CORD K vs 50 S V 25 STATION CABLING JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS 24AWG 1 OR 2 PAIR SEE NOTE 2 CIRCUIT 2 TO DKT2 OR PDIU DS 4 o fOr CIRCUIT 3 TO DKT3 OR PDIU DS EN Az CIRCUIT 4 TO DKT4 OR PDIU DS CIRCUIT 5 TO DKT5 MODULAR
11. 41 PROGRAM 80 DIGITAL AND ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE RINGING TONES 42 PROGRAM 93 CO LINE IDENTIFICATION eere enne 43 PROGRAM 44 A OR B TOLL RESTRICTION TRAVELING CLASS OVERRIDE CODE ENTRY ua u ua e Ib a 44 PROGRAM 45 1 TOLL RESTRICTION DIAL 44 PROGRAM 45 2 TOLL RESTRICTION DISABLE eee 45 PROGRAM 45 3 6 EQUAL ACCESS SPECIAL COMMON CARRIER NUMBERS AND AUTHORIZATION CODE DIGIT ens 45 PROGRAM 45 8 9 TOLL RESTRICTION OVERRIDE CODE 46 PROGRAM 46 2 4 TOLL RESTRICTION ALLOWED DENIED AREA CODES ASSIGNED BY 5 46 PROGRAM 46 6 8 TOLL RESTRICTION ALLOWED DENIED OFFICE CODES ASSIGNED BY CLASS 24 a a 47 PROGRAM 46 10 40 TOLL RESTRICTION CLASS PARAMETERS 48 PROGRAM 47 TOLL RESTRICTION EXCEPTION OFFICE CODES ASSIGNED BY AREA GCODE ceteri ned io ee tels d 49 PROGRAM 48 STATION TOLL RESTRICTION 50 PROGRAM 50 1 LGR PARAMETERS ir te danach de 50 PROGRAM 50 2 LCR HOME AREA esee 51 PROGRAM 50 31 35 SPECIAL eee eee 51 PROGRAM 50 4 LCR LDI PLAN NUMBER eene emnes 52 PROGRAM 50 5 LCR LOCAL CALL 2 52 PROGRAM 50 6 LCR DIAL ZERO
12. ttt ar 12 20 PIOU and PIOUS Installation Procedure 12 30 PIOU and PIOUS MeL 12 40 PIOU and PIOUS Programming Overview 13 LINE DIGITAL TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT KCDU 13 00 Gene CD 13 10 KEDU Gonfigurall fl er 13 20 KCDU Installatbrn Pra6Sdlf Bac u uu uu unu 13 30 KODU WILNO T reati i 13 40 KCDU Programming ten adt dn ent a Ta 14 RECEIVER ABR DETECTOR UNIT K4RCU 14 00 14 10 K4RCU Configuration i mde 14 20 KARGU Installation Procedure rero 14 30 K4RGU WINING MEI HI S 14 40 KARCU Programming OVeTPVIBIW uuu u 15 BUILT IN CO LINE AND DIGITAL TELEPHONE CIRCUITS 15 00 EEA T 15 10 Built i GO Linie CIEGUIIS ei d 15 20 Digital Telephone OI SIG tai ir 15 30 Base Unit CO Line Digital Station Circuit 16 KCOU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
13. 3 PIOU option settings PIOU MODULAR PIN OUT SEE SWI Sets the SMDR baud rate PIOU MDF to be 300 or 1200 BPS DRAWING SW2 Sets the PIOU programming speed to be IN THIS 300 or 1200 BPS for IMDU or TTY jack SECTION LED 4 On 300 BPS SW2 set In LED 1200 BPS SW2 set Out SWS Sets the PIOU to operate with the IMDU or an external device connected to the TTY modular jack MODEM For IMDU operation 7 even 1 TTY For ASCII terminal 8 none 1 or external modem 8 none 1 PPTC PIN OUT P13 Sets the IMDU and TTY jack for bell or CCITT specification EIE 0825 PINS 4 PDIU DS jumpers should set to MODULAR PINS the B C position when connected t WIRE COLOR o the PIOU SMDR port FIGURE 8 26 DK16 PIOU SMDR TTV OPTIONS AND WIRING 8 30 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 TO PEKU W FEMALE K W BL 26 BL W 1 K W O 27 2 K W GN 28 K GN W 3 K W BR 29 BR W 4 K W S 30 K S W 5 KOR BL 31 KBL R 6 K R O 32 K O R 7 K R GN 33 K 8 K 34 K 9 R S 35 MK S R 10 BK BL 36 K BL BK 11 K BK O O BK BK GN GN BK BK BR K BR BK K 5 S BK KOV BL K BL Y K 42 O Y 17 44 K Y GN 43 45 K GN Y 18
14. 19 RM I PROGRAM 92 CONTINUED DIGITAL TELEPHONE VOLUME LEVEL INITIAPIZA TION DER 20 RM J PROGRAM 92 CONTINUED CALL FORWARD BACKUP RAM INITIALIZATION 21 RM K PROGRAM 03 SLOT ASSIGNMENTS rettet eret ti nz ne de 22 RM L PROGRAM 00 SOFTWARE CHECK REMOTE MAINTENANCE SECURITY CODE i teer 23 RM M PROGRAM 01 LOGICAL PORT DISPLAY seen 24 RM N PROGRAM 02 PHYSICAL PORT 24 RM O PROGRAM 04 PORT STATION NUMBER ASSIGNMENT 25 RM P PROGRAM 05 FLEXIBLE ACCESS CODE NUMBERING 25 RM Q TYPE 1 PROGRAM PROCEDURE EXAMPLE PROGRAMS 10 1 10 2 10 3 15 106 42 0 7751 C052 editae qc vas se sec asia 26 RM R TYPE 2 PROGRAM PROCEDURE EXAMPLE PROGRAMS 20 30 31 35 40 41 43 79 81 lt BY iii e aj 27 RM S PROGRAM 12 SYSTEM ASSIGNMENTS BASIC TIMING 28 RM T PROGRAM 13 DEFINING THE MESSAGE CENTER eee 28 RM U PROGRAM 19 BACKGROUND MUSIC SLOT IDENTIFICATION 29 RM V PROGRAM 21 MODEM 7 29 RM W PROGRAM 22 DATA STATION HUNTING DATA CALL ONLY 30 RM X PROGRAM 28 DSS CONSOLE ATTENDANT TELEPHONE ASSIGNMENTS
15. Wire Night Hold Relav MAKE or BREAK W2 jumper Alarm Sensor Wire jumper Alarm sensor normally open or normally W3 closed jumper CCITT BELL Jumper Wire i IMDU or external modem operating spec SMDR Baud Rate Selects baud rate 300 or 1200 bps for Switch SW1 Twesposnon SMDR printer or call accounting device T _ Selects baud rate 300 1200 bps for Remote Maintenance Modem piggv back module IMDU or external TTY jack Modem TTV Switch Enables PIOUS for operation with IMDU SW3 Two position slide switch modem or TTY jack Most modems USA require BELL specification W4 not factory installed 13 CO LINE DIGITAL TELEPHONE and a DDCB The KCDU does not support a DDSS INTERFACE UNIT KCDU console One or two KCDU PCBs may be installed in the Expansion Unit No other station or CO line 13 00 General PCB can be installed if the KCDU is installed 13 01 The KCDU which can only be installed in the Expansion Unit of DK16 it will not function in DK24 56 96 has two loop start CO line circuits and four digital telephone circuits The KCDU digital tele phone circuits can support all but one of the de 13 10 KCDU Configuration vices supported by either the PDKU or Base Unit integrated digital telephone circuits digital tele 13 11 The KCDU may have to be configured to phones PDIU DIs PDIU D12s PDIU DSs ADMs control excessive loudness
16. 3 AB AB AB s Gs Gw Gw siti isi Gw s Gw Gw w 26 NENNEN 26 mazi ws Ei Gw Gw i I IM ERN masi Gw Gw Gw i FIGURE 8 4 DK8 DK16 MDF WIRING AND DOOR LOCK CONTROL 8 9 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 MDF BLOCK NO gt KSTU QSTU COLOR PORT INTERCOM STANDARD TELEPHONE CODE DESIGNATION NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER DEVICE LOCATION NOT USED T R NOT USED NOT USED T R NOT USED NOT USED T R NOT USED NOT USED NOTE 1 Circuit 3 and 4 are available on DK16 KSTU only 2 Circuit 4 can support a Background Music BGM source KSTU or PSTU DK16 only 3 Circuit 2 can support a Background Music BGM source QSTU Port 19 only FIGURE 8 5 DK8 QSTU DK16 KSTU STATION MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD CO LINE CROSS CONNECT RECORD MDF PAIR NUMBERS RJ11C RJ14C BASE UNIT KCDU PCOU DK8 KSU DK16 BASE UNIT FIXED SLOT 02 KCDU PCOU SLOT 04 05 DK16 ONLY FIGURE 8 6 DK8 AND DK16 CO LINE RECORD 8 10 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 command to exter
17. SCREW FOR THIRD WIRE GROUND POWER ON OFF SWITCH HPFB GROUND WIRE AC AND DC e ENT AE COBB gt INDICATOR LEDs CONNECTOR F201 FUSE POWER SUPPLV MOUNTING SCREW YELLOW WIRES 2 D 50 ROM 26 3V 27 8V GREEN WIRES FG OV FIGURE 2 5 8 DC VOLTAGE TEST DK16 KSU KPSU 16A POWER SUPPLY le 07 RESERVE 10000000000 0000 00000000000 BATTERY CONNECTOR FOR CABLE Ac 24 VOLT CIRCUIT BREAKER FG SCREW TIT S DK16 BASE UNIT MOTHERBOARD DC OUT P9 GREEN YELLOW 0V CONNECTOR BLACK VOLTAGE Dl 02 TEST POINTS YELLOW 26 3V 27 RED 4 5 5 5 BLUE 4 5 5 5 GREEN 0V FIGURE 3 KPSU16 DC VOLTAGE TEST FAULT FINDING SEGTION 100 816 500 MARGH 1993 Important Note Do not attempt to replace Fuse 201 7 DK16 HARDWARE FAULT ISOLATION 7 01 If a DK16 hardware fault is suspected check the hardware using the following procedure 1 Make sure the BATT jumper plug SW1 on the base unit motherboard is in the ON position to save the system s customer data base 2 Unplug the PBTC battery cable from BATT connector on KPSU16 Power Supply see Figure 2 3 Lightly press the 24V circuit breaker to
18. EXAMPLE 1 DIGITAL TELEPHONE TOSHIBA LAPTOP OR IBM AT TVPE PERSONAL COMPUTER PC PDIU DI BASE TVPE 1 MODULAR ADAPTER MODULAR CORD CROSSED 50 ft max 24 TVPE 2 MODULAR ADAPTER IMPORTANTI Will not function with applications that require the RI signal to PC EXAMPLE 2 DIGITAL TELEPHONE IBM PC OR XT TVPE PERSONAL COMPUTER PC PDIU DI BASE TVPE 3 MODULAR ADAPTER MODULAR CORD STRAIGHT 50 ft max 24AWG TVPE 2 MODULAR ADAPTER IMPORTANTI Will not function with applications that require the RI signal to PC CONNECTION EXAMPLE 3 TOSHIBA P321SL OR SIMILAR STAND ALONE DIU STANDARD TVPE SERIAL PRINTER PDIU DS TYPE 2 MODULAR ADAPTER TYPE A MODULAR 50 ft max 24AWG TYPE 2 MODULAR ADAPTER NOTES 1 See Figure 7 30 for detailed pin out information of modular cords and adapters 2 Never use modular cords and adapters when connecting a PDIU DI PDIU DS to a modem 3 Connection examples 1 and 2 work when using the PDIU DI to make calls with personal computer applications auto dialers printer sharing outgoing modem calls etc If the PC PDIU DI must receive calls the RI lead is normally required therefore a standard RS 232 cable must be used see Figures 7 25 and 7 26 4 In Connection Example 8 PDIU DS must be in the connect to DTE mode P1 strapped A B 5 All modular cords and adapters are customer supplied
19. 30 RM Y PROGRAM 29 DSS CONSOLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS 31 RM Z PROGRAM 32 AUTOMATIC PREFERENCE a 32 RM AA PROGRAM 33 STATION HUNTING iii aetas 32 RM AB PROGRAM 34 HOLD RECALL 2 33 RM AC PROGRAM 36 FIXED CALL FORWARD 33 RM AD PROGRAM 37 RING TRANSFER CAMP ON RECALL TIME 34 RM AE PROGRAM 38 DIGITAL AND ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE BUTTONSTRIP TYPE 35 RM AF PROGRAM 39 FLEXIBLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENT een 36 RM AG PROGRAM 42 1 8 PBX ACCESS CODE 37 RM AH PROGRAM 60 SMDR OUTPUT ACCOUNT CODE DIGIT 38 RM AI PROGRAM 69 VERIFIABLE ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY 39 RM AJ PROGRAM 70 VERIFY ACCOUNT CODE TOLL RESTRICTION ASSIGNMENT 40 TABLE RM AK RM AL RM AM RM AN RM AO RM AP RM AQ RM AR RM AS RM AT RM AU RM AV RM AW RM AX RM AV RM AZ RM BA RM BB RM BC RM BD RM BE RM BF RM BG RM BH RM BI RM BJ RM BK RM BL RM BM RM BN RM BO RM BP RM BQ RM BR RM BS RM BT RM BU RM BV RM BW REMOTE ADMINISTRATION amp MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE LIST Continued SUBJECT PAGE PROGRAM 78 CO LINE SPECIAL RINGING ASSIGNMENTS DISA IMDU NIGHT RINGING OVER EXTERNAL PAGE
20. and PESU which the BGM source will be connected to Connect the BGM source to the tip and ring of the appropriate circuit of the BGM PCB KSTU or PSTU circuit 4 PEKU circuit 3 and PESU circuit 8 In Program 10 2 use LED 09 or 10 to specify the circuit number PEKU or PESU KSTU or PSTU does not require Pro gram 10 2 assignment 2A For DK8 enter the programming mode and set LED 10 to on in Program 10 2 This assigns QSTU circuit 2 Port 19 as the BGM source for the system You must cycle system power for Program 10 2 to take effect If BGM is connected to PEKU or PESU cut W5 on the PEKU or W7 on the PESU PCB that BGM is connected to 7 4 4 Using the BGM source s volume control adjust the BGM volume to the desired level while listening to BGM via an digital or electronic telephone speaker and or the ex ternal page speakers When BGM is sent to external speakers via the 600 ohm RCA jack use the external amplifier volume con trol to balance the BGM and page volume levels 2 24 External Background Music Installation The external background music options are closelv associated with the external paging op tions Refer to Paragraph 5 for external paging amplifier installation 3 RELAV CONTROL OPTIONS 3 00 General 3 01 The KSU and 16 Base Unit provides one relav and the PIOU and PIOUS each provides two relavs that control peripheral options INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100
21. 4 15 QCNU Installation Pro edura 4 15 4 15 l i INSTALLATION DK8 KSU 8 PCB SEGTION 100 816 204 MARGH 1993 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTINUED PARAGRAPH SUBJECT PAGE 10 40 Programming Overview 4 15 11 OP TION INTERFACE UNIT QSMD uu u uuu 4 16 11 00 Generals nu TA 4 16 11 10 QSMU Hardware d 4 16 11 20 OSMU 4 16 11 30 OSMU installation Procedure etes 4 16 11 40 QSMU WINN a a 4 17 11 50 QSMU Programming Overview 4 17 11 60 Device Communication Parameters 4 17 12 BUILT IN CO LINE DIGITAL TELEPHONE AND OTHER CIRCUITS 4 17 12 00 MT 4 17 12 10 Built in CO Ese qe a 4 17 12 20 Built In Digital Telephone Circuits 4 17 12 30 KSU Motherboard CO Line Digital Station Circuit Wiring 4 17 12 40 Power Failure Telephone Installation er en e nt nre cannes 4 17 12 50 Music On Hold MOH Background Music BGM Source Connection 4 17 12 60 External Page Output
22. 1 40 ZONE 35 PGOUT 2 17 42 PGOUT 3 19 PGIN 3 44 4 21 PGIN 4 46 ALL ZONES 39 UNIT J7 600 OHM BGM MUSIC RCA JACK SOURCE amp AMPLIFIER PIOU PIN NUMBERS 25 PAIR CABLES FIGURE 7 17 DK16 PAGING WITH MULTIPLE AMPLIFIERS 7 22 2 Connect the music source to the music ampli fier input 3 Connect the paging amplifier outputs to PIOU PGIN relays K1 and zone A zone D speakers C Connect the music amplifier output to terminal 23 PG COMMON of the PIOU and the output to the C terminal of zone A zone D speakers Connect zone A zone D speakers A termi naltothe PGOUT contact of the PIOU relays K1 K4 respectively 5 16 DK16 Night Ringing over External Page Zones PIOU only To allow the night ringing signal to be sent over zone paging install the paging amplifier in accordance with the following steps refer to Figure 7 18 Steps 2 6 are performed at the MDF IMPORTANT NOTE To night ring over selected PAGE zone see Paragraph 9 of this section 1 Connectthe amplifier input via an RJ11 jack to the J7 600 ohm Page RCA jack on the Base unit Or direct connect J7 to Amp using a standard audio cable with RCA plugs 2 Cross connect the amplifier output A to the PGIN1 PGIN4 connector from the PIOU 3 Cross connect the amplifier output B to the zone zone D speaker common line 4 Cross connectt
23. REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM BK PROGRAM 56 LCR STATION GROUP ASSIGNM ENT ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter O G CR gt MODE PROG Enter Program Number 56 Press CR P 56 P56 Enter Port Number Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required port number or 01 1 56 01 Press f Kev if single port LILI entry in step 3 The system will display any previously entered group number 1 4 Refer to the System Record Sheet and change as required Example Change to 4 enter 4 P56 01 1 4 To Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR B Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered for this program C To exit this program press CR TABLE RM BL PROGRAM DATA DUMP ACTION P56 01 1 4 56 DISPLAV PRINTOUT Enter the Data Dump Mode At the MODE prompt enter D U M P CR gt MODE DUMP D To Output Program Data Enter CR Program number or A L L for all programs D PROG To Stop Printout at Any Time Enter DELETE CR at the same time To Exit the Dump Mode Enter Q U I T CR REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 19
24. A Refer to the System Record Sheets and enter the required P69 001 NNNNNN 987654 account code number Example number 987654 Enter 9 8 7 6 5 4 B To clear and erase all data enter all caps NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN To Exit Program Store Data P69 001 NNNNNN 987654 A To store data press CR P69 B Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 69 data P is entered C To exit this program press CR REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM AJ PROGRAM 70 VERIFY ACCOUNT CODE TOLL RESTRICTION ASSIGNM ENT ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the MODE prompt enter P R O G CR Enter Program Number 70 70 Press CR 70 Refer to the Svstem Record Sheet and enter the required code 70 002 YZ number 000 299 Example code number 002 Enter 0 2 The svstem will displav the present digit Restrict and Toll Restriction Status Z for entered code number Refer to the Svstem Record Sheet and enter the required 70 002 YZ 13 digit Restrict and Toll Restriction data Example digit Restrict 1 and Toll Restriction 3 Enter 1 3 To Exit Program Store Data P70 002 xz 13 A store data press CR 70 B Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 70 data is entered C Toexit this program press f f CR NOTE Programs 77 1 and 77 2 use Tvpe 1 procedure REMOTE ADMINIS
25. EN TABLE D TABLE E DIGITAL TELEPHONE CABLES DIGITAL TELEPHONE CABLES STATION CABLE CONTINUITY STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING VOLTMETER CHECK USING OHMMETER 5 4 4 lt e A 58 lt Red Red Wire B e X B NOTES 1 This maximum allowable reading for all Digital and Electronic telephone cable runs exceptif connectingan HDSS console to Circuits 7 and 8 of a PEKU then the maximum cable restriction is 20 ohms not 40 ohms 2 The green red black yellow and white blue measurements should be within 10 of each other 3 Nominal voltage within the limits of 426 3 27 8 VDC while under AC power polarity depending on voltmeter lead placements FAULT FINDING SEGTION 100 816 500 MARGH 1993 0 1 FAULT CLASSIFICATION START Please read Chapters 1 5 of this section before proceeding Is ita remote maintenance fault System completely non operational Go to appropriate Chart 1 12 Is the fault classified on this Is it a station pag no dial tone fault Call your technical support Is ita CO group line no dial tone fault Isa 055 console non operational Is ita voice mail auto attd fault FAULT FINDING SEGTION 100 816 500 MARGH 1993 GHART NO 2 CATASTROPHIC FAULTS START Is the system completely no
26. Set the P11 jumper plug on the PIOU to the MAKE or BREAK position as required e MAKE Shorts the normally open con tacts pins 9 and 34 when the night relay is activated BREAK Opens the normally closed contacts pins 9 and 34 when the night relay is activated 7 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SECTION 100 816 207 MARCH 1993 5 TO CUSTOMER SUPPLIED DEVICE 1 3 o DOOR PHONE B 4 NE DOOR LOCK CONTROL DDCB TO DK16 BASE UNIT WIRING CHART BASE UNIT AMPHENOL DT 34 9 35 PR 10 DDCB KSU JACK PIN3 4 PIN 5 6 DDCB TO DK16 EXPANSION UNIT WIRING CHART KCDU ORPDKU DDCB KSU JACK DT 26 DR 1 TO PIN3 4 PT 27 PR 2 PIN 5 6 See Figure 8 4 for DK16 Base Unit PDKU and KODU pin out information B Solder the jumper W2 on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK position as required MAKE Shorts the normally open tacts NHT and NHR when the night relav is activated e BREAK Opens the normally closed contacts NHT and NHR when night relav is activated 8 Refer to Figures 7 6 and 7 7 for wiring inter connecting details Connect the PIOU or Pl OUS to the MDF as required for the night relav function NOTE Door phones programmed to ring over exter nal page in night mode Program 77 1 do not activate the NT relav INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 3 35 DK16 Expansion Unit Relay Control Configure t
27. and they can be connected to any PEKU circuit 8 03 PEKU controls and interface connectors are shown in Figure 5 13 and described in Table 5 B 8 10 PEKU Hardware Options 8 11 The PEKU supports the following hardware options Internal Options e Off hook Call Announce Unit EOCU External Options 9 17 INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 1993 50 PIN AMPHENOL CONNECTOR FEMALE Qe W5 cut for BGM option BACKPLANE CONNECTOR I FIGURE 5 13 CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS e HDSS console e BGM source connection e External Amplifier 8 12 Off hook Call Announce EOCU Instal lation Install the Off hook Call Announce Unit EOCU in accordance with the following steps 1 Remove the PCB from its protective packag ing NOTE PEKU connectors P10 P20 P40 P50 and P60 are positioned to allow installation of the EOCU only in the proper position Figure 5 13 2 Mate EOCU connectors J10 J20 J40 J50 and J60 with PEKU connectors P10 P20 40 P50 and P60 Figure 5 14 3 Apply firm even pressure to EOCU to ensure proper mating of connectors 9 18 o W5 10 4 Use 3 pair cable for making connections between the PEKU and the Off hook Call Announce OCA electronic telephone Refer to Wiring Diagrams Section 100 816 208 for wiring
28. PORTS COUNT IN SOFTWARE TIP RING CIRCUIT 4 STANDARD TELEPHONE 2 NOT USED VOICE MAIL PORT OR SIMILAR DEVICE VOICE T1 VT 5 VOICE R1 VR 5 NOTE DATA T1 DT 5 Two ringers max may be connected high or low DATA R1 DR 5 to Tip Ping N i ji ES CIRCUIT 6 ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE 2 CIRCUIT 7 ELECTRONIC ONLYIF _27 TELEPHONE 3 ELECTRONIC 28 TELEPHONE 29 CIRCUIT 8 TO RECEIVES 30 ELECTRONIC OFF HOOK CALL TELEPHONE 4 EE ANNOUNCE CALLS L 31 1 OR BGM 32 NOTE 5 33 ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE 34 i NOTE 5 35 36 NOT USED 25 PAIR CABLE W MALE CONNECTOR STRAP OPTION 38 P90 RING VOLTAGE OPTION CIRCUIT 1 amp 2 39 L LOW LEVEL 130V P P 40 H HIGH LEVEL 190V P P E OCA T1 OT 5 T OCA R1 OR 5 Nores Electronic telephone Circuits 5 8 71 CIRCUIT 6 To receive OCA the 6500 series electronic telephone must 25 502 or the combined HVSI HVSU installed 46 CIRCUIT 7 Program 31 button LED 03 must be on for electronic OT telephone to receive OCA 47 CIRCUIT 8 An HHEU must be installed inside 6500 series electronic 48 teleph
29. _ 44 19 K YS 45 K S V 20 KOV BL 46 K BL V 21 47 22 K V GN 48 K 23 49 K 24 K VS 50 V S V 25 NOTES CIRCUIT 1 TO EKT 1 Amplifier or Repeater must have Automatic Gain Control and be Registered from Part 68 Refer to Manufacturer s Installation CIRCUIT 2 TO EKT Documentation for Amplifier or Line Repeater Pin numbering Connect to PEKU or PESU 9 10 CIRCUIT 3 TO EKT 11 I 12 13 14 15 CIRCUIT 4 16 CUSTOMER SUPPLIED 7 TWO WAY AMPLIFIER 18 OR 191 4019 CIRCUITS LINE REPEATERS SEE NOTE 1 20 21 22 23 NOT USED 24 PEKU OR PESU CIRCUIT 7 25 26 VOICE PAIR PORT B SUBSCRIBER SIDE 27 28 29 30 31 2 OCA T1 OT 38 OT 3i OCA R1 OR 35 SYSTEM PROGRAMS 36 CIRCUIT 2 dat 37 Program 10 3 circuit assignments 38 CIRCUIT 3 PROGRAM 10 3 SLOT PESU PORT PESU CIRCUIT 4 LED POSITION NUMBER CIRCUIT 21 17 43 Program 10 1 LED 19 20 44 Program 15 5 enable appropriate 45 CIRCUIT 7 lines for tandem connection 46 Program 78 2 enable appropriate 47 CIRCUIT 8 lines if amplified DISA is required Program 10 2 LED 18 and 19 ON 50 50 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK
30. lt u lt vs N NOTES NOT USED FIGURE 8 13 DK16 MDF WIRING ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE TO PEKU 8 17 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 TO PEKU W FEMALE CONNECTOR T 4 K W BL 26 KBL W 1 K W O 2 2 K W GN 28 K GN W 3 K W BR 29 K 4 K W S 3 K S W 5 KOR BL 31 KBL R 6 K R O 32 O R T K R GN 33 15 GN R 8 KOR BR 34 9 K R S 35 MK S R 10 BK BL 36 21 K BL BK 11 K BKO 37 _ 12 K BK GN 38 K GN BK 13 BK BR 39 14 40 S BK 15 K Y BL 41 16 42 K O Y 17 K Y GN 43 K GN Y 18 K Y BR 44 BR Y 19 K 5 45 K S V 20 KOV BL 46 KL BL v_ 21 47 22 48 23 K 49 K BR V 24 K V S 50 V S V 25 VOICE 1 VOICE R1 DATA 1 DATA R1 CIRCUIT 2 CIRCUIT 3 JACKETED STATION CABLE
31. 6 9 Microphone Speaker Sensitivity Adjustment Speakerphones Only 6 10 Busy Override and Camp on Ring Tone Over Handset Headset Option 6 10 Exlernal Power SII Bs ur E 6 10 DKT2000 Add On Module Installation 6 11 ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE UPGRADE OPTIONS DK16 Onlv 6 11 Off hook Call Announce Upgrade HVSU2 or HVSU HVSI 6 11 Loud Ringing Bell Headset Upgrade 6 12 Carbon Headset Handset 6 13 m AL 6 14 Microphone Speaker Threshold Speakerphones Only 6 14 Handset Receiver Volume Up Strap Version 2 6500 Series Telephones Only 6 14 DIRECT STATION SELECTION CONSOLE SYSTEM CONNECTION Apre IPC 6 14 DDSS Console Connections 6 14 ADSS Console Connections e m 6 15 DOOR PHONE LOCK CONTROL UNIT AND DOOR PHONE INSTALLATION 6 15 DDCB ana MDFB E 6 16 DDOB Wall MO u u u 2 eee eerie eae uds 6 16 Door Phone Wall Mounting anon tnn e rnnt eee 6 16 Door Phone Lock Programming Considerations s rere 6 17 ADD ON MODULE INSTALLATION tent 6 17 INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SEGTION 100 816 206 MARGH 1993 FIGURE LIST FIGURE TI
32. LAPTOP INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 TOSHIBA LAPTOP OR IBM AT TVPE PDIU DI PERSONAL COMPUTER DTE FUNCTIONS LIKE A DCE PIN DESIGNATIONS PIN DESIGNATIONS COM PORT PDIU DI PIN 7 PIN 7 Lm primi men E jmur Ed Rear view of asynchronous serial Rear view of PDIU DI DB25 communication interface connector DB9 of RS 232 female connector Toshiba laptop or IBM AT personal computer 87654321 22 20 0825 FEMALE CONNECTOR DB25 cee CONNECTOR IBM PC AT modem stvle serial DB25 to DB9 RS 232 cable Pin to pin connections are confiqured as a straight cable not as a null modem cable 50 ft max 24AWG customer supplied NOTES 1 Some RS 232 EIA leads may be called by other names by some manufacturers 2 The computer receives data on Pin 2 RD and sends data on Pin 3 TD FIGURE 7 25 DK8 AND DK16 PDIU DI TO AT TYPE COMPUTER 5 232 CONNECTOR CABLE CONNECTIONS 1 42 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 IBM XT PERSONAL COMPUTER PDIU DI OR ASCII TERMINAL FUNCTIONS LIKE DCE FUNCTIONS LIKE A DTE DB25 PIN DESIGNATIONS DB25 PIN DESIGNATIONS PDIU DI PDIU DI PIN 1 7 PIN 7 Mr rs r rers is rs P Rear view of personal computer
33. 3 Remove the PCB inside the PDIU DS by lifting the back panel from its side grooves 4 Turn the PCB over and set the jumper plugs P1 P9 as follows e f the PDIU DS is connected to a DTE set the plugs to the A B position e Ifthe PDIU DS is connected to a DCE de vice set the plugs to the B C position NOTE Do not cut PDIU DS PERCEPTION jumper wire for STRATA DK8 or DK16 installations 10 73 Assembling the PDIU DS 1 Position the back panel to the PCB see Fig ure 7 33 2 Slidethe backpanel downinto its side grooves 3 Attach the bottom panel and secure with the four non captive screws LAPTOP 1 a STRATA 16 KSU MDF2 DKT PDIU DI 4 10 DIGITAL PORT 00 LAPTOP PC2 2 DKT PDIU DI 11 DIGITAL PORT 01 SERIAL mm PRINTER DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL PORT 05 FIGURE 7 24 OR DK16 DATA INSTALLATION EXAMPLE BLOCK DIAGRAM 1 41 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 NOTES 1 RS 232 cable and connector information is provided in Figures 7 25 to 7 32 2 PDIU DI PDIU DS MDF station wiring to Digital Ports is in Section 100 816 208 3 Modem MDF station wiring to QSTU KSTU PSTU or PESU is in Section 100 816 205 DIAL UP COMPUTER SERVICE TELEPHONE ILRS 232 LINE X N LINEZ MDF TELEPHONE NETWORK STANDARD TELEPHONE JTELEPHONE LINE V 5 232 MODEM IBAN
34. Connect the appropriate RS 232 cable be tween the modem and the PDIU DS Figure 7 28 shows an example PDIU DS to smart modem RS 232 connection 1 39 e LED 02 Should be ON for PDIU DS ports connected to modems enabling the use of AT commands and result codes when incoming calls are made from outside the system to modems con nected to PDIU DSs LED 03 Should be set ON for PDIU DS ports connected to modems LED 04 Should always be ON for PDIU DS ports LED 05 Should be ON if the system is installed behind a PBX Centrex that uses INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 access codes to place outgoing trunk calls e LED 06 Should be ON for DIUs con nected to modems With this feature turned on the DIU will send a one sec release signalon the to drop the modem when the data user presses the Data Release button on the telephone e LEDs 17 20 Data security groups can be used to allow or deny digital tele phones equipped with PDIU DIs access to the PDIU DS ports connected to a modem DIU stations can only make data calls to DIUs in the same data security group Program 21 e For each PDIU DS modem pair assign the digital QSTU KSTU and PSTU or PESU ports that will be connected to the PDIU DS and modem respectively Program 22 33 e f morethan one modem PDIU DS pair is configured as a system modem pool the PDIU DSs should be set to hunt each otherin Program 22 The
35. Rear view of PDIU DI DB25 or ASCII terminal DB25 DB25 MALE RS 232 female connector DB25 FEMALE RS 232 connector CONNECTOR CONNECTOR 12345 678 8 76 5 4 2 20 22 22 20 20 22 22 20 4 5 3 7 321 678 RS 232 CABLE IBM modem stvle serial DB25 to DB25 M F RS 232 cable 50 ft max 24 AWG customer supplied NOTE The PC ASCII terminal receives data on Pin 3 RD and transmits data on Pin 2 TD FIGURE 7 26 DK8 AND DK16 PDIU DI TO XT TYPE COMPUTER RS 232 CONNECTOR CABLE CONNECTIONS 1 43 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 TOSHIBA PS321SL PRINTER PDIU DS FUNCTIONS LIKE A DTE CONFIGURED IN THE TO DTE MODE P1 P9 A B SO PDIU FUNCTIONS LIKE DCE DB25 PIN DESIGNATIONS DB25 PIN DESIGNATIONS Rear view of printer or ASCII terminal DB25 Rear view of PDIU DI DB25 RS 232 connector RS 232 female connector 8 76 4321 87654321 22 20 22 20 22 20 876543 8 5 RS 232 CABLE 50 ft max 24 AWG customer s
36. 1 s keyboard type A T D D 14 and press AT commands must be capi tal letters The Data Call LED on DKT 14 will be lit The CONNECT LED on PDIU DS 14 will be lit The screen on PC 1 displays CON NECT XXXX where XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communi cations software At this time PC 1 and PDIU DS 14 are connected as shown by the thick lines above PDIU DS 14isinthe communica tion mode PC 1 is now linked directly to the RS 232 side of the internal modem PC 1 can issue AT commands to the internal modem which is now in the command mode If Digital PDIU DS port 04 is the only DIU port connected to the modem Program 20 LED 03 ON the Modem LEDs on all DKTs will be lit STRATA DK8 OR DK16 583 3700 QSTU OR KSTU INTERNAL PORT 08 MODEM 18 DIGITAL PORT 04 PDIU DS 14 LAPTOP PC 1 MDF RS 232 DKT PDIU DI me Lu DIGITAL dee PORT 00 FIGURE 7 36 MDF PUBLIC TELEPHONE NETWORK TELEPHONE LINE 674 4700 EXTERNAL MODEM AUTO ANSWER LAPTOP PC2 DK8 AND DK16 INTERNAL PC TO EXTERNAL PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS 1 53 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 1993 4 From 15 keyboard type ATDT701 5 terminate the call Press the telephone 6744700 and press ENTER Data Release button and e Theinternal modem 18 goes off hook from PC2 kevboard dials 701 to seize
37. 2 CIRCUITS PER PESU 4 CIRCUITS PER KSTU 2 CIRCUITS PER QSTU FIGURE 7 22 DK8 AND DK16 VOICE MAIL AUTO ATTENDANT BLOCK DIAGRAM e BTone Signals Stations send a recall B tone to VP whenever Toshiba VP answers a transfer camp on recall from a station that did not an swer a Toshiba VP blind transfer The B tone notifies Toshiba VP thatthe callisarecall and not a new call allowing Toshiba VP to respond with the appropriate greeting For this feature to operate the QSTU PSTU KSTU or PESU voice mail ports must have LEDs 19 and 20 turned ON in Program 31 7 14 Toshiba VP Installation Use the preceding information in concert with Paragraphs 7 23 and 7 24 to install Toshiba VP 7 20 Customer supplied Voice Mail Messaging Systems 7 21 STRATA and DK16 systems are de signed to support a wide range of customer sup plied voice mail messaging systems Depending onthe voice mail system used some of the features available with Toshiba VP refer to Paragraph 7 10 may be available with the customer supplied sys tem 7 22 DK8 and DK16 Voice Mail QSTU PSTU KSTU or PESU Port Programming Consider ations 7 23 Voice mail all types QSTU KSTU PSTU or PESU port programming is accomplished using Programs 31 and 10 2 refer to Programming Procedures Section 100 816 300 for details Voice mail VM programming features are e VM Groups tThis feature groups VM QSTU KSTU PSTU or PESU ports together so
38. 3 When installing the station cable do not run parallel to and within 3 feet of an AC power line AC power lines should be crossed at right 90 angles only In particular avoid running station wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures 4 Check Table 8 D in Section 100 816 208 Verify that your telephone is wired correctly 2 pair or External power for the options it supports ADM PDIU DI HHEU DVSU etc 9 FAULT ISOLATION FLOW CHARTS 9 01 The following troubleshooting flow charts are available to aid in fault isolation Itis recommended to read paragraph 1 5 of this section and then proceed to CHART 1 page 7 to begin fault isola tion FAULT FINDING SEGTION 100 816 500 MARCH 1993 TABLE B TABLE G ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE CABLES ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE CABLES STATION CABLE CONTINUITY STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING VOLTMETER CHECK USING OHMMETER Resistance Color lack Yellow Yellow lt 5 O O Q D D 2 2 2 00 D Q 9 d c gt d c d Q o O D 5 2 2 gt o z d c d c zh d c Red 40ohms 2 2 44 4 4 4 5 i R Yellow T White R White R wlz cia 3
39. 41 42 43 44 L 45 46 47 a 49 L50 FIGURE 8 9 DK16 MDF WIRING CO LINES TO BASE UNIT BRIDGING CLIPS Was 21 RJ11 MODULAR JACKS IMMA 4 5 Gas 6 _ ee O O sc 9 V 2 44 5 7 15 o 21 IMMA 22 IMMA 2 EWIICIGCGGR gt GI e 25 27 25 IMMA 25 55 55 IMMA IMMA s 20 2 es 8 IMMA 4 S IMMA 4 E 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK NETWORK JACK RJ11 FIC 02LS2 8 13 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MODULAR CORDS 2 POWER FAILURE MARGH 1993 DK16 BASE UNIT MAIN CIRCUIT BOARD MODULAR JACKS TOP CO4 Ir 1 6 1 6
40. CO1 LED MODULAR CORD 5R2 4 R1 3 T1 2 T2 o o a n U 4 FE KCDU 1 2 NETWORK JACK RJ14C FIC 02 52 PIN OUT a STATION CABLING TO KCDU JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS 1 VOICE DATA 24AWG 1 OR 2 PAIR SEE NOTE 2 1 VOICE DATA PT1 ADD POWER 1 ADD POWER 2 TO 2 PDIU DS N O Jou Jou k T 3 TO DKT3 U DS N o colo O U T 4 TO DKT4 U DS tc E O 2 lt o a lt a lt z mI m lt lt fe N Djaj e 2 OR 4 WIRE MODULAR CORD TO RJ11 JACK ON BOTTOM OF PDIU DI NOT USED 48 49 50 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK DIGITAL TELEPHONE WITH OR WITHOUT PDIU DI PDIU DI2 OR PDIU DS or DDCB iii 00 0000 000 5080000000 21010011000 NOTES 1 Voltage levels T PT 26 3 27 8 VDC R 0 0 VDC GND Reference to SG ground T R wires are alwavs required PT PR are additional power wires required for long station runs o
41. EXAMPLE 2 DISA Internal Station Call Call Sequence B e Outside caller rings CO line 03 CO line 03 is programmed as a DISA line 1 25 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SECTION 100 816 207 MARCH 1993 Line 03 returns intercom dial tone to caller after two ring cycles 5 6 seconds Caller dials 13 After 48 seconds from start of call station 13 answers Printout B prints after station 13 answers the call at 4 32 NOTE If Program 60 2 is set for 10 seconds MSS will not print if the call is answered within 10 seconds from when the caller receives dial tone PRINTOUT B 03 MSS 04 32 00 00 48 00 05 13 EXAMPLE 3 DISA Outgoing CO Line Call NOTE DISA CO line calls print out as DISA Call Sequence C e Outside caller rings CO line 01 line 01 is pro grammed as DISA Line 01 returns intercom dial tone after two ring cycles 5 6 seconds Caller dials 703 to access CO line 03 outgoing Caller dials the DISA security code and receives CO dial tone Caller dials the telephone number and con verses when the call is answered Caller hangs up The call releases and Printout C prints after the call disconnects at 12 22 NOTES 1 If the CO provides the auto release signal see Program 15 the call discon nects when either party hangs up A will print out following the CO line number if the call is disconnected by the AR signal If the auto release signal is not returned the CO lines will re
42. See Table 3 D 3 STATION CONSIDERATIONS 3 00 For configuration purposes a station can be considered as any device which is connected to a dedicated telephone circuit Although the words telephone and station are often used synony mousiv and interchangeably STRATA DK8 DK16 documentation devices other than tele phones such as Stand alone Data Interface units PDIU DSs should also be considered as sta tions when configuring a system because they require a dedicated telephone circuit A station apparatus overview is shown in Table 3 G for STRATA DK8 and Table 3 H for STRATA DK16 Central Office loop start lines Central Office loop start lines DKT circuits same as PDKU except no DDSS See Table 3 D 25 pair amphenol RJ14C modular RJ14C Modular CO Line circuits 25 pair amphenol digital telephone circuits 25 pair amphenol PIOU Spring clip terminal PIOUS 3 10 Telephone Circuit Port Types 3 11 There are three types of telephone circuits to which stations can be connected digital telephone circuits electronic telephone circuits and stan dard telephone circuits All three types of circuits are available withthe STRATA DK16 The STRATA DK8 does not support electronic telephone cir cuits 3 20 Digital Telephone Circuit Connections 3 21 The STRATA DK8 Key Service Unit provides four digital telephone circuits The QCDU PCB provides two INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTI
43. CHAPTER TWO SITE REQUIREMENTS PARAGRAPH 1 2 3 3 00 3 10 4 10 4 20 TABLE FIGURE 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 INSTALLATION SITE REQUIREMENTS SEGTION 100 816 202 1993 TABLE OF 5 SUBJECT PAGE GENERAL v 2 1 INPUT POWER REQUIREMENTS upset arti mua 2 1 CONSIDERATIONS aac Stent 2 1 Clearance and Location Requirements 2 1 Electrical Environmental Requirements and Characteristics 2 2 GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS 2 2 Third Wire Ground MET UNTERE TT 2 2 Alternate Additional Ground stacks c eseuncseiocaaseccaedaaketnlensines 2 4 TABLE LIST TITLE PAGE SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS 2 3 FIGURE LIST TITLE PAGE DK8 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT AND HPFB MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIREMENT S mcs 2 1 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS 2 1 DK16 COMBINED BASE AND EXPANSION KEY SERVICE UNIT MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS 2 1 000000000 00000000404 2 2 KSUGROUNDING DIAGRAM u u isti ab ti 2 3 2 1 GENERAL 1 00 This chapter defines the installation site re quirements necessary to ensure a proper operat ing environment for the STRATA
44. CO LINE MODEM NETWORK CO line connects to IMDU port 619 via DISA Ring transfer or ringing assignments in Program 78 FIGURE 4 REMOTE MAINTENANCE USING IMDU MODEM DK16 ONLY REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 QSMU OR PPTC ADAPTER SEE WIRING GUIDE BELOW TABLE B TTY MODULAR JACK 7 BITS EVEN PARITY 1 STOP 3 PAIR MODULAR CORD DK8 OR DK16 FIGURE 5 LOCAL MAINTENANCE USING ASCII TERMINAL OR PERSONAL COMPUTER TABLE RM B PPTC WIRING FOR LOCAL TERMINAL OR PERSONAL COMPUTER TO TTY CONNECTION PPTC MODULAR TO DB25 ADAPTOR WIRING FOR CONNECTING TTY JACK TO A LOCAL TERMINAL OR PERSONAL COMPUTER SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT QSMU OR PIOU PIOUS PPTC1A 5M ADAPTOR DTE TTY JACK RS 232 MODULAR PIN NO MODULAR PIN NO DB25 PIN NO LEAD NAME 4 Jumper to 5 RTS to CTS 4 TERMINAL MODEM INSTALLATION PIOU PIOUS DK16 so that maintenance and programming can be administered internally or 4 01 DK8 and DK16 provide customers with a externally from desktop personal computers or number of Remote Administration and Mainte terminals connected to Integrated Data Inter nance configuration options face Units PDIU DIs e Acustomer supplied maintenance terminal can be connected to the system TTY port DK8 NOTES QSMU or DK16 PIOU or PIOUS via an exter 1 Anexternal modem is required for Remote nal modem either locally Figure 5 or remotely Maintenance if a QSMU is
45. Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt prompt enter G CR Enter Program Number 50 Press CR Enter the number 2 The svstem will displav the last area code programmed Refer to the Svstem Record Sheet and change if required To Exit Program Store Data To store data press CR B Toexit this program press f f CR TABLE RM AZ PROGRAM 50 31 35 LCR SPECIAL CODES ACTION DISPLAV PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt prompt enter G CR Enter Program Number 50 P 50 Press CR 50 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter 31 35 as required 50 31 Example 31 enter 3 1 System will display previously programmed number Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required To Exit Program Store Data To store data press CR B Continue returning to step 3 until all data for this program has been entered C To exit this program press CR 51 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM BA PROGRAM 50 4 LCR LDI PLAN NUM BER ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt prompt enter G Enter Program Number 50 P 50 Press CR P50 Enter the number 4 P5041 The system will display the present LDI route number Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required Exit Program
46. INTERFACE CONNECTORS 10 40 QCNU Programming Overview 10 41 The QCNU does not require any program ming 11 OPTION INTERFACE UNIT QSMU 11 00 General 11 01 The QSMU provides a circuit interface with peripheral options 11 02 The QSMU is shown in Figure 4 13 11 10 QSMU Hardware Options 11 11 The QSMU supports the following STRATA DK8 external hardware options e SMDR output or TTY maintenance port two way interface NOTE Refer to Peripheral Equipment Installation Section 100 816 207 forinstallation of SMDR and the Remote Maintenance Section 100 816 600 for TTY 11 20 QSMU Configuration 11 21 The QSMU must be configured for operation with the appropriate external hardware either an SMDR printer or call accounting device Remote Maintenance Terminal TTY or modem and in System Prograrm 10 3 e LED 04 ON TTY LED 04 OFF SMDR 11 30 QSMU Installation Procedure 11 31 Install the QSMU in accordance with the following steps See Figure 4 7 1 Remove the PCB from its protective packag ing 2 Ensure the QSMU has been configured for the appropriate program options refer to Para graphs 11 10 and 11 20 3 Slide the QSMU under the System Frame Ground Bar align and insert QSMU connec tor J2 into motherboard connector J20 ensur ing the side of the QSMU with the modular connector goes on the right side The QSMU is not silkscreened RIGHT Apply firm even pressure to ensure
47. set and stored Enter p p page command and m95 XXX p 2 digit message memory location 10 19 personal messages and 60 99 system message NOTES 1 To store system messages permanently DKT or EKT XXX must be the station at port 00 2 After p is entered the previously stored message is displayed If there is no stored message nothing is displayed To Change Previous Message m95 XXX p Set the terminal keyboard to upper case and change message alphanumeric 32 characters max To Set the Message on DKT or EKT XXX s LCD m95 XXX p Set the terminal keyboard to lower case and enter p m O m 0 Zero To Exit the Message Mode m 0 At any time enter m O q lower case q gt MODE NOTES 1 To cancel a message set via Mode 95 use Mode 97 procedure 2 M represents the message entered 3 digital telephone electronic telephone REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM BP MODE 97 REMOTE CALLING STATION MESSAGING ADD CHANGE ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Message Mode gt MODE MESG At the gt prompt enter M S G CR To Add Message or change a previously stored message m 97 Set the terminal keyboard to lower case caps lock off and enter m 9 7 NOTE Enter at anytime it is desired
48. 3 11 DES KEY SERVICE UNIT AND POBS isir ibierek 3 12 DKS PERIPHERALS AND UPGRADES crant rnt trt rta sen nori 3 13 DK16 STATION AND CO LINE TOTALS 3 15 DK16 KEY SERVICE UNIT AND POBS nn 3 16 DK16 PERIPHERALS AND UPGRADES r 3 17 3 19 1 INTRODUCTION 1 00 This chapter offers guidelines and consider ations on how to configure a STRATA DK8 DK16 system which can support a wide variety of sta tions and peripherals 2 SYSTEM CAPACITY 2 00 Total System Capacity 2 01 The STRATA DK8 DK16 systems have modular design which allows them to support a number of station and CO line configurations The main component of each system is the Key Ser vice Unit The DK8 KSU can have upto 10 stations and four CO lines The DK16 Base Key Service Unit can have up to 12 stations and four CO lines An Expansion Key Service Unit can be added to the DK16to increase the station capacity to 20 and the CO line capacity to eight Station and CO line configurations are shown in Table 3 A for DK8 and Table 3 B for DK16 2 10 The DK8 Key Service Unit 2 11 Station and CO Lines The DK8 Key Service Unit comes standard with four digital telephone circuits ports and two CO line circuits Table 3 C An optional printed circuit board called the QCDU
49. 4 43 For DK16 only if Remote Administration and Maintenance calls are to connect to the IMDU automatically assign the designated CO lines to ring the IMDU intercom number 619 in Program 78 as required use standard STRATA DK16 pro gramming procedures 4 44 For all cases of Remote Local Maintenance with a PC or ASCII terminal for either STRATA DK8 or STRATA DK16 program the security codes for Levels 1 and 2 as in the Programming Procedures Section 200 816 300 Reference Program 00 NOTE The security codes are initialized as 0000 These codes may also be changed via a local or remote terminal 4 50 DK16 IMDU Oncsite Testing 4 51 Fromany working station test the functioning of the IMDU for DK16 1 Press the Intercom button e Receive intercom dial tone 2 Dial 6 1 9 e Receive modem tone from the IMDU after a two second delay 3 Press the Speaker button to release 4 Make an incoming call over each CO line that is programmed to ring the IMDU station 619 e Receive modem tone from the IMDU after a two second delay with each call NOTE This test checks basic programming and IMDU operation and should be completed before REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 continuing with Remote Administration and Maintenance installation 5 If a terminal is to be utilized on site refer to Paragraph 5 For off site programming refer to Paragraph 6 5 LOCAL TERMIN
50. 8 3 9 2 10 5 NOTE The 600 ohm duplex page output is compatible with most commercially available talkback amplifiers FIGURE 7 13 TWISTED PAIR 24 AWG VOLUME CONTROL 612965896550 12 3 456 7 8 940 MODULAR USED 6543211654321 VOICE DOOR PHONE 12V 0V JUMPERS HESB REAR VIEW POWER CONVERTER 117 12 DK8 AND DK16 HESB TALKBACK AMPLIFIED SPEAKER WIRING 1 18 2 Screw a 1 25 inch panhead wood screw into the mounting surface use wall anchors if mounting to drvwall surface 3 Hang the HESB from the screw 5 EXTERNAL PAGE OPTIONS 5 00 Svstem Hardware Requirements 5 01 The STRATA DK svstems offer a varietv of external page options Additionally BGM option is available with each external page option DK svstems support and DK16 Paging with BGM same ampli fier DK16 Zone paging with BGM separate amplifi ers DK16 Zone paging with BGM multiple amplifi ers See Paragraph 2 of this section for more Page BGM options 5 10 External Page Option Installation 5 11 All voice paging connections are made the 600 ohm Page RCA jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit The PIOU and PIOUS voice and BGM 600 ohm and 3 watt outputs are inoperable on the DK16 Expansion Unit 5 12 DK8 and DK
51. 8 3 47 Speed Dial Change Review 69 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 MESSAGE RECORD SHEET Use several sheets if necessary CDL CDD CDL lt E JE CDL Fr
52. Circuit 4 require interface transformer see Section 100 816 207 INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 MARCH 1993 NOTE A maximum of two QCDU PCBs may be installed in the STRATA 3 22 The STRATA DK16 Base Key Service Unit and the PDKU PCB each provide eight digital telephone circuits The KCDU PCB provides four NOTE A maximum of two KCDU PCBs may be installed in the STRATA DK16 If a KCDU is installed no other type of station PCB can be installed in the STRATA DK16 3 23 The following devices can be connected to digital telephone circuits e Digital Telephones 2000 and 1000 series Each digital telephone requires one circuit and each digital telephone circuit can support a digital telephone e Stand alone Data Interface Units PDIU DS Each PDIU DS requires one circuit Any digital telephone circuit exceptfor Circuit 8 on a PDKU1 STRATA DK16 can support a PDIU DS see Note 1 NOTES 1 There are two versions of the PDKU PDKU1 and PDKU2 The versions identical except that Circuits 1 8 on the PDKU2 can each support PDIU DSs PDIU DI while only Circuits 1 7 on a PDKUT can support PDIU DSs or PDIU Dis Also PDIU1 does not support 2000 series digital telephone continuous DTMF tones 2 The Integrated Data Interface Unit PDIU DI PDIU DI2 and the Add on Module ADM not require a dedicated circuit They share a circuit with the telephone 3 Only one
53. FIGURE 7 29 DK8 AND DK16 PDIU DI PDIU DS MODULAR CABLE RJ 45 ADAPTER CONNECTIONS 1 46 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 TVPE1 RJ45 TO DB9 FEMALE ADAPTER TVPE2 RJ45 TO DB25 MALE ADAPTER 87654 eee AD RJ45 STRAIGHT THROUGH TYPE A 45 FLAT MODULAR CORD STRAIGHT ONOUBRWN RJ45 CROSS PINNING TYPE B RJ45 FLAT MODULAR CORD CROSSED N G gt NO 1 S Modular Cords 50 ft max 24AWG customer supplied FIGURE 7 30 DK8 AND DK16 PDIU DI PDIU DS MODULAR CORDS AND RJ 45 RS 232 ADAPTER PIN CONNECTIONS 7 47 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 PDIU DS FRONT VIEW DIU POWER READY CONNECT READV LED POWER LED PDIU DS REAR VIEW MODULAR JACK FOR CONNECTING 1 OR 2 PAIR TO DIGITAL CIRCUIT 12345 DNTA E SEE FIGURE 8 36 FOR SWITCH 1 4 OPTIONS INFORMATION 200000000 PERCEPTION SEE PARAGRAPH 10 72 0 5 U N 79 a DU U VU Oo P1 P9 LOCATED ON PCB INSIDE OF PDIU DS UNIT SEE NOTES 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 RS 232 0825 FEMALE CONNECTOR SIGNAL DIRECTION AND FUNCTION OF P1 P9 PDIU DS CONNECTED TO DTE PDIU DS CONNECTED TO DCE mE FUNCTION FW FUNCTION SIGNAL SIGNAL NAME PDIU DS SIGNAL A B SI
54. If not refer to the Fault Finding sec tion later in this manual 9 1 INSTALLATION DK16 KSU amp PCB SECTION 100 816 205 MARCH 1993 6 Turnthe switch on the power supply to the ON position Figure 5 3 e The DC LED on the power supply will light green If not refer to the Fault Finding section later in this manual 7 Usingavoltmeter or other device which checks voltage measure the voltages referenced to frame ground FG at the DC OUT connector pins test points located on the motherboard Figure 5 3 The voltages should fall within the ranges below If the voltages do not fall within the ranges unplug the DC power pins from the DC OUT connector and measure again at the same location if the ranges remain unacceptable replace the power sup ply see Paragraph 3 Yellow Green Black and Green Wires Yellow Wire 24V e Range 26 3V 27 8V e Red Wire 5V e Range 4 5V 5 5V e Blue Wire 5V e Range 4 5V 5 5V 2 20 Mounting the Base Key Service Unit 1 Make sure the power supply switch is turned OFF Place the Base Key Service Unit on the de sired location on the mounting surface and mark the location of the four screw holes there is one on each corner See Figure 5 2 NOTE Make sure the location of the Base Key Service Unit meets the minimum clearance requirements specified in Figure 2 2 in Chap ter 2 Drill holes on these marks NOTE If mounting the KSU directly
55. MARCH 1993 REMOTE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES INDEX INITITAILIZATION PROGRAMS PAGE NUMBER PROGRAM PROGRAM PAGE NUMBER System Programs 90 15 46 10 40 3 48 Station Speed Dial I D Codes 92 16 47 3 49 System Speed Dial 92 17 48 3 50 LCD Messages 92 18 50 1 3 50 Timed Reminders 92 19 50 2 3 51 Digital Telephone Volume Level 92 20 50 31 35 3 51 Call Forward Backup 92 21 50 4 3 52 PCB Slot Assignments 03 22 50 5 3 52 50 6 3 53 PROGRAM PROGRAM PAGE NUMBER 51 3 43 TYPE 1 1 26 52 3 54 2 2 27 53 3 55 00 3 23 54 3 56 01 3 24 55 0 3 57 02 3 24 55 1 3 58 03 3 22 55 2 3 59 04 3 25 56 3 60 05 3 25 60 3 38 10 1 2 3 1 26 69 3 39 12 3 28 70 3 40 13 3 28 77 1 2 1 26 15 1 26 78 3 41 16 1 26 79 2 27 19 3 29 80 3 42 20 2 27 81 89 2 27 21 3 29 93 3 43 22 3 30 28 3 30 DATA DUMP PROCEDURES 29 3 31 Svstem Programs 60 30 2 27 Speed Dial Numbers 61 31 2 27 LCD Messages 61 32 3 32 33 3 32 34 3 33 REMOTE LCD 35 2 27 MESSAGING PROCEDURES 36 3 33 Remote Calling Station Edit Mode 95 62 37 3 34 Remote Calling Station New 97 63 38 3 35 Remote Called Station Edit Mode 94 64 39 3 36 Remote Called Station New Mode 96 65 40 2 27 41 2 27 42 0 1 26 REMOTE TEST PROCEDURES 42 1 8 3 37 Station Line Status 66 44 B 3 44 Station Button Activation 66 45 1 3 44 CO Line Test 67 45 2 3 45 Set Date Dav Time 68 45 3 6 3 45 45 8 9 3 46 46 2 4 3 46 REMOTE 46 6
56. Mic LED On2000 series Digital Telephone speak erphone models that are set for low sen sitivity the Mic LED will flash at the in use rate when using the speakerphone When set to normal sensitivity the Mic LED will be on steady when using the speaker phone 3 70 Busy Override and Camp on Ring Tone Over Handset Headset Option 3 71 The Busy Override and Camp on Ring tones can be sent over the telephone handset or head 6 10 set in addition to the speaker with 2000 series digital telephones The tones only sound over the speaker with 1000 series Digital Telephones Per form the following procedure to have these tones sent over the handset of the DKT2010 H model For the DKT2010 SD the DKT2020 S and the DKT2020 SD models see the Note following the procedure 1 Loosen the four captive screws securing the telephone base Figure 6 1 and remove the base 2 Refer to Figure 6 7 and install a strap in the HS BOV W409 location 3 Reinstall the telephone base and secure it with its four captive screws NOTES 1 Toenable Busy Override tone and Camp on Ring tones over the handset or head set of a DKT2010 SD DKT2020 SD DKT2020 S model hold down the Re dial button and press the up button To block the tone hold down the Redial button and press the down Mol button For this to function properly with head sets make sure the OCA strap or R607 is cut on the HHEU PCB and the HHEU strap is cut on the
57. OR 4 WIRE TELEPHONE DKT 1 WITH OR WITHOUT PDIU DI PDIU DI2 MODULAR CORD TO RJ11 JACK ON THE BACK SIDE D TOSHIBA OF PDIU DS FEMALE CONNECTOR TO MODEM PRINTER OR HOST COMPUTER ETC POWER READY CONNECT RS 232 CABLE SEE SECTION 100 016 207 m PDIU DS T R wires are always required PT PR are additional power wires required only for long station runs or when operating on reserve power per Table 8 D PT PR may be used with normal station runs also RS 232 cable length is max 50 ft with 24 AWG wire DIUs can be connected to circuits 1 7 with PDKU1 all Base Unit KCDU and PDKU2 digital circuits support DIUs Expansion Unit slots 04 and 05 only can support DIU KCDU provides circuits 1 4 only FIGURE 8 11 DK16 MDF WIRING FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONES DKTS WITH PDIU DI PDIU DI2 AND PDIU DS TO PDKU KCDU OR BASE UNIT 8 15 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 MDF BLOCK NO SLOT NO COLOR CKT PORT INTERCOM DIGITAL TELEPHONE CODE DESIGNATION NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER DEVICE LOCATION Bun T PWR R T R PWRT we R Eva T we R we R we R we R we R NOTES 1 Indicate if PDIU DS digital telephone with or without PDIU DI PDIU DI2 or ADM DDSS console number 1 or 2 is connected PDIU DS and PDIU DI PDIU DI2 be connected to circuits 1 7 only on PDKUT all Base Unit KCDU and PDKUZ d
58. OR PDIU DS T6 R6 pre CIRCUIT 6 TO DKT6 OR PDIU DS 24 Phe 25 7 26 ali CIRCUIT 7 PT7 27 R PDIU D PR Ups _ T8 VOICE DATA GND R8 VOICE DATA PT ADD POWER GND PR ADD POWER 38 1 34 35 SEE 2 36 37 38 iii 10 0000 000 tc O 2 2 o gt lt lt l m lt lt A NOT USED 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK 5 DDSS BLF CONSOLE 1 Voltage levels CIRCUIT 8 ONLY T PT 26 3 27 8 VDC OR R 0 0 VDC GND DIGITAL Reference to FG ground B JTELEPHONE 8 2 T R wires alwavs required are additional power wires required for Nc long station runs per Table 8 D PT PR may be used with normal station runs also PDIU DS WITH PDKU2 FIGURE 8 10 DK16 MDF WIRI
59. PCB 3 Refer to Peripherals Installation Section 100 5 Refer to Station Apparatus Installation Sec 816 207 for BGM installation procedures tion 100 816 206 for procedures to add OCA 10 14 External Amplifier Configuration The to electronic telephones PESU does not have to be configured to support an 5 24 external amplifier However the svstem must be programmed for one see Paragraph 10 40 The external amplifier requires Circuits 6 and 7 on the PESU See Peripherals Installation Section 100 816 207 for external amplifier installation instruc tions 10 20 PESU Installation Procedure 10 21 Install the PESU in accordance with the following steps 1 Remove the PCB from its protective packag ing The protective shield on the back of the PESU is designed to protect the installer from potentially hazardous ring voltage Do not remove this shield Ensure that the PESU subunit ESTS is securely attached to the PESU refer to Figure 5 15 If the electronic telephones connected to the PESU must receive OCA calls install the EOCU subassembly PCB on the PESU per Paragraph 10 12 If a BGM source is connected to the PESU Circuit 8 cut W7 Ensure that the ring voltage option P90 is set to the position for initial installation The L position is used if devices connected to the PESU trip ring voltage before answer Insert the PESU into the appropriate slot and apply firm even pressure to ensure prope
60. STRATA DK16 Only 3 8 Standard Telephone Circuit Options 3 8 TELEPHONE UPGRADES u uuu e an e amp ie 3 9 Digital Telephone Upgrades es 3 9 Electronic Telephone Upgrades ocupa ceras 3 9 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES 3 9 Strata Example 1 Small Retail 3 9 Strata Example 2 Office eee 3 9 Strata DK16 Example 1 Bank aas 3 10 Strata DK16 Example 2 3 10 CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET n 3 10 TABLE LIST TITLE PAGE CO LINE STATION CONFIGURATION GUIDE 3 2 DK16 CO LINE STATION CONFIGURATION GUIDE BASE AND EXPANSION UNIT uuu reU 3 2 DKS KEY SERVICE UNIT COMPONENTS 3 3 DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT COMPONENTS thru tt moth 3 4 DK16 EXPANSION KEY SERVICE UNIT PGBS arenae trennt tenent 3 5 INTERFACE OPTION MM 3 6 STRATA STATION APPARATUS OVERVIEW 3 6 STRATA DK16 STATION APPARATUS OVERVIEW 3 7 WORKSHEETS TITLE PAGE DKS STATION AND CO EINE TO TALS
61. TWISTED PAIR 24 AWG CIRCUIT 4 CIRCUIT 5 MODULAR CORD NOTE See Program 28 for electronic telephone CIRCUIT 6 to DSS assignments VOICE PAIR NOT USED CIRCUIT 7 DATATE NN ELECTRONIC DATA RING 7 TELEPHONE ASSOCIATED VOICE PAIR NOT USED WITH HDSS CIRCUIT 8 O 2 z n z lt L z E m lt lt wo N DATA TIP 8 DATA RING 8 OCA T1 OCA R1 1 CIRCUIT 2 ONLY IF 1 CIRCUIT ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE 1 CIRCUIT 4 RECEIVES OFF HOOK CALLS 1 5 CIRCUITS 788 T R PAIR ORDER MUST BE 1 6 WIRED AS SHOWN MODULAR CIRCUIT 7 NOTE Place 1 SW to DSS CORD DSS a EKT zl NOT USED 47 49 50 66 150
62. and enter m 9 6 NOTE Enter m lower case anvtime it is desired to start over in this procedure Enter X X X XXX destination station number or destination station group number 30 DKTs EKTs 31 34 per svstem Program 31 Enter p Y Y Y p page command and YYY originating m96 XXX p YYY station number Enter p p page command and m96 XXX p YYY p 2 digit message memory location 10 19 personal messages and 60 99 system messages To Add the New Message M m96 XXX p YYY p Set the terminal keyboard to upper case and enter message as required alphanumeric 32 characters max New message displays as it is entered To Set the Message m96 XXX p YYY p Set the terminal keyboard to lower case and enter p m 0 m 0 Destination station Msg LED flashes CALL YYYM is Zero displayed on LCD Origination station SENT is displayed on LCD To Exit the Message Mode At any time enter m O p lower case NOTES 1 M represents the message entered 2 digital telephone electronic telephone REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM BS STATION CO LINE STATUS CHECK ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Test Mode At the MODE prompt enter T E S T CR gt MODE TEST To Check Station Line Stat
63. connected to the TTY to Word length Seven bits Stop bits One Parity Even 5 20 Local Operation 5 21 Use the procedure below to establish com munications between the local terminal and the PIOU S orthe QSMU sothat programming may be accomplished via the terminal NOTE Hereafter whenever the term CR is used it means the return or enter key depending on the keyboard being used SPACE means the space bar An empty square indicates one of several characters will appear in that location either on the terminal screen or in a printout 1 Set uptheterminal as described in Paragraph 5 10 2 Set the terminal to on line 3 Set Caps Lock on upper case 4 Press CR key e The system responds and the terminal displays DK CONNECT gt CODE 5 Type the four digit security code and press CR Default code 0000 e The system responds and the terminal displays OK MODE NOTE The security code can be entered any time the CODE prompt appears 6 To continue go to Paragraph 7 6 REMOTE TERMINAL OPERATION 6 00 Requirements 6 01 Terminal For the STRATA DK8 or the STRATA DK16 the terminal must interface with an REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES asynchronous modem communicate in ASCII code at 300 or 1200 bps 1200 only for DK8 have a standard typewriter type keyboard and display data via a CRT display or printer A personal computer capable of emulating the described ter minal with a
64. e 16 00 erae 16 10 KCOU Removal ceace i Tm 16 20 KCOU bt kan 17 DK16 POWER FAILURE EMERGENCY TRANSFER OPTION 17 10 DK16 Power Failure Emergency Transfer Installation FIGURE 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 21 5 22 5 23 5 24 TABLE 5 B 5 5 5 5 5 INSTALLATION DK16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 FIGURE LIST TITLE PAGE DK15 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT EXTERIOR ia 5 2 DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT WALL MOUNTING METHODS 5 3 DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT INTERIOR crat tetra sioe 5 3 DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT WIRING CONNECTIONS 5 5 CONNECTING THE DK16 EXPANSION UNIT TO THE DK16 BASE UNIT 5 6 MOUNTING THE DK16 EXPANSION UNIT iii bb 5 7 DK16 EXPANSION UNIT INTERIOR eater cei nien tah prata Eres Fer ER 5 8 DK16 EXPANSION UNIT WIRING CONNECTIONS 5 9 POWER SUPPLY KPSU 5 11 BASE UNIT POWER FAILURE TRANSF
65. is bonded to the PDIU DI PDIU DS PCB If required by local codes the FG should be con nected to external ground Signal Ground SG Pin 7 The SG signal EIA circuit AB establishes the common ground ref erence for all other PDIU and data device sig nals and must be wired for all applications Transmit Data TD Pin 2 DTE devices trans mit and DCE devices receive data on the TD lead EIA circuit BA Before the DTE device can transmit the TD signal the RTS CTS DSR and DTR signals all discussed below must be ON The TD signal is OFF in the idle state 7 35 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SECTION 100 816 207 MARCH 1993 e Receive Data RD Pin 3 The DCE device transmits data to the DTE device on the RD lead EIA circuit BB the DTE receives data on the RD Request to Send RTS Pin 4 Some DTE devices send an RTS signal EIA circuit CA to the DCE device when they are ready to transmit data on the TD lead If the DTE device does not generate the RTS signal the DIU DIP switch SW1 4 should be set ON to inform the DIU Sometimes the DTE DCE device may use RTS CTS for Ready Busy type flow control in these cases DIP switch SW1 4 should be OFF see Figure 7 32 for DIP switch information Clear to Send CTS Pin 5 The DCE device sends the CTS signal circuit CB which indicates that it is prepared to transmit data to the line side The DCE device sends this signal only when it receives the RTS signal from the DTE dev
66. port A into AMP CKTA Out AMP CKT B PEKU port B STRATA DK16 CO tele phone network outside party 2 This path is two way so when outside party 2 talks the talk level is amplified in the reverse direction NOTE Only the outside party 1 talk path is amplified to from a system telephone when it is con nected into a two CO line conference 11 03 Amplifier Requirements e Customer supplied e Must be FCC registered Part 68 and provide automatic gain control e Requires two PEKU or PESU station ports 17 and 18 e Referto the amplifier manufacturer s in stallation documentation for amplifier grounding instructions 11 04 Installation Connect a two way amplifier to the STRATA DK16 system in accordance with the 1 58 following steps see Figures 7 39 and 8 27 1 Atthe main distribution frame MDF connect the voice pair VT VR port A of circuit 6 on the designated PEKU or PESU PCB to one input of the customer supplied two way am plifier In the example in Figure 7 39 this is CKTA Central Office Side A ofthe VFR5050 At the MDF connect the voice pair VT VR port B of circuit 7 on the designated PESU or PEKU PCB to the other input of the amplifier In the Figure 7 39 example this is CKTB subscriber side B of VFR5050 Plug the amplifier s power cord into the 117 VAC standard wall outlet 4 Set the gain and other amplifier parameters options per the amplifier m
67. port number for the station that will have a Fixed Call Forward button Example Port 00 enter O O P36 00 Press The present data will be displayed P36 00 NN Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the port to be forwarded to when the Fixed Call Forward button is pressed Example Port 04 enter O 4 P36 00 NN 04 To Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR B Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 36 data is entered C exit this program press f CR P36 00 NN 04 P36 P REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM AD PROGRAM 37 RING TRANSFER CAMP ON RECALL TIME ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter P R O CR gt MODE PROG P Enter the Program Number 37 Press CR P 37 P37 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required port number Example Port 01 enter O 1 P37 01 Press System will display the present ring transfer recall time P37 01 064 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required ring transfer timeout Example 70 seconds Enter 0 7 0 P37 01 064 070 To Program Store Data A To store data press CR B Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 37 data is entered Toexit this program press f CR P37 01 064 070 P37 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCE
68. press CR OVERSEAS B Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered P93 for this program C To exit this program press f CR NOTE Use SPACE to clear characters REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM AN PROGRAM 44 A OR B TOLL RESTRICTION TRAVELING CLASS OVERRIDE CODE ENTRY ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter P R CR gt MODE PROG Enter Program Number 44 Do Press CR P 44 44 Refer to System Record Sheet and enter the required Toll Restriction Class number 1 4 Example Class 1 Enter 1 The system will display the present override code assigned to that class number P44 1 NNNN Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required override code number Example 3456 Enter 3 4 5 6 44 1 NNNN 3456 To Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR B Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 44 data is entered C To exit this program press CR TABLE RM AO PROGRAM 45 1 TOLL RESTRICTION DIAL PLAN ACTION 44 1 NNNN 3456 P44 DISPLAV PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode At the gt MODE prompt enter P R O G CR gt MODE PROG P Enter Program Number 45 Press CR P 45 P45 Enter the number 1 The system will display the present dial plan code number 1
69. to designated digital telephone circuits ports The DDCB has three interfaces two of which are dedicated to door phones MDFB and one that can be connected to a MDFB or adoor lock DISA Direct Inward System Access A feature available for CO lines that allows an outside party to access a STRATA system s internal stations or outgoing CO lines without going through an operator or automated attendant An optional security code and or account codes may be set to prevent unauthorized access to outgoing CO lines for through system calling DK Digital Key DKSU8 Key Service Unit STRATA DK8 only The standard key service unit which includes the system s motherboard power supply two CO line circuits four digital telephone circuits relay service and interface for Music on hold MOH Background Music BGM and External Page DKSUB16 Base Key Service Unit STRATA DK16 only The standard key service unit which in cludes the system s motherboard power sup ply four CO line circuits eight digital telephone circuits relay service and interface for Music on hold MOH Background Music BGM and External Page DKSUE16 Expansion Key Service Unit STRATA DK16 only The optional key service unit which has four universal slots that can support CO line station and external option printed circuit boards that are compatible with the larger STRATA DK systems DK24 DK56 DK96 DSS Direct Station Selection Console STRATA
70. 31 LED 04 ON This will prevent the problem of auto attendantto auto attendantlooping connec tions Receive Auto Call Forward ID Codes Pro vides auto digits from call forwarded stations to direct callers to stations mailboxes All VM ports should be set to receive auto ID code Program 31 LED 16 and D tones see Paragraph 7 13 7 24 Voice Mail Program Checklist The follow ing items should be verified before programming voice mail 1 Set Toshiba VP Maintenance Menu system parameters to D STRATA and DK16 1 31 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SECTION 100 816 207 MARCH 1993 see Toshiba VP nstallation and Maintenance Manual for other parameter settings 2 STRATA and DK16 programs e Program 92 Initialization clears voice mail auto dial codes e Program 03 Verify that the KRCU is pro grammed in the Base Unit to allow the VM AA to send DTMF tones does not apply to e Program 04 Assigns station numbers to VM AA ports initialized numbers recom mended e Program 05 First digit of special codes 63 and 64 initialized numbers recommended e Program 10 1 Set the system for voice first and program the VM AA device to dial the suffix as 1 after station numbers e Program 10 2 Set 04 ONfor set cancel operation and 06 ON for the VM to detect 80 msec tones e Program 13 If the VM AA device is the message center set the lowest VM port as the message center
71. 4 operation as required this is not required for DK8 QRCU Perform additional voice mail messaging sys tem programming as applicable refer to cus tomer supplied installation programming manuals NOTE Some voice mail devices may ring trip when called in this case set the ring voltage jumper toL low position on QSTU PESU or PSTU2 PCB connected to the voice mail device 8 DK16 ALARM SENSOR INSTALLATION 8 00 The PIOU or PIOUS PCB provides a circuit that can be set to detect a relay open or closed condition from a facility alarm system When the sensor is activated all electronic and digital tele phones will sound an alarm signal The electronic digital telephone alarm signal can be reset by any electronic or digital telephone with an alarm reset button see Program 39 8 01 Alarm Sensor Options Jumper plug P12 on the PIOU is used to set the alarm sensor to detect an open or closed condition from the facility alarm system Set P12 as follows refer to Figure 7 23 e Todetecta closed condition set P12 to the N O position e Todetect an open condition set P12 to the N C position INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 8 02 Jumper W3 on the PIOUS is used to set the alarm sensor to detect an open or closed condition from the facilitv alarm svstem Solderthe W3 jumper wire as follows refer to Figure 7 23 To dete
72. 4 should be ON 10 40 PDIU DI to Personal Computer PC Installation 10 41 The PDIU DI always functions as a DCE device it transmits data on the Receive Data lead RD and receives data on the Transmit Data lead TD Most personal computers function as a DTE device PCs transmit data on the TD lead and receive data on the RD lead Follow the steps below to install the PDIU DI to a DTE PC NOTES 1 Use the steps below when installing an ASCII terminal personal computer or any other DTE device to a PDIU DI 2 The PDIU DI can connect to a DCE com puter or any other DCE type device using a specially configured RS 232 cable or adapter but this application is rarely re quired 3 Change the PDIU DI escape sequence per the guidelines in paragraph 10 63 1 Install the digital telephone that is to be equipped with PDIU DI per the instructions in Section 100 816 206 and the drawing in Sec tion 100 816 208 2 Install the PDIU DI under the digital telephone per the instructions in Section 100 816 206 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 to determine the full extent of these requirements so it is recommended to turn LED 02 ON See the Data Interface User Guidefor information regarding DIU AT commands and result codes LEDs 03 and 04 Should be OFF for PDIU DI ports LED 05 Should be ON if the system is installed behind a PBX or Centrex that uses access codes to make external calls or to insert a
73. 5 P4511 Refer to the record sheet and enter the required code number Example Code 2 enter 2 P45 112 To Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR B To exit this program press CR 44 P45 112 P45 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES TABLE RM AP PROGRAM 45 2 TOLL RESTRICTION DISABLE ACTION SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter P R O G CR Enter Program Number 45 Press CR Enter the number 2 Refer to the record sheet and enter the required CO line number Example CO line 01 enter O 1 The system will display N or Y to define if the LED is on or off Refer to the System Record Sheet and change the CO line status as required Y or N Press SPACE to step to next CO line number gt MODE PROG 45 2 01 45 2 01 02 Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR B Toexit this program press f CR TABLE RM AQ PROGRAM 45 3 6 ACTION 45 2 01 02 45 EQUAL ACCESS SPECIAL COMMON CARRIER NUMBERS and AUTHORIZATION CODE DIGIT LENGTH DISPLAV PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter P R O G CR gt MODE PROG Enter Program Number 45 Press CR P 45 45 Refer to the record sheet and enter the item number 3 6 Example Item 3 enter 3 The svstem will displav the present equal access number o
74. 6 40 KSTU Programming Overview 6 41 The following parameters may be specified for the KSTU Program 03 e Specify code 31 for KSTU slot Program 31 Used to configure all KSTU ports connected to voice mail see Chapter 7 for voice mail installa tion 9 15 Program 10 2 e Used to set standard telephone ringing option e Notrequired for Background Music BGM con nection Program 19 e Used for BGM connection to KSTU Port 11 NOTE KSTU Ports 08 11 are fixed They are as signed even if a KSTU is not installed 7 DIGITAL TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT PDKU 7 00 General 7 01 The Digital Telephone Interface Unit PDKU provides eight ports circuits for digital telephones and it can only be installed in the Expansion Unit The PDKU can also support Integrated Data Inter face Units PDIU DIs PDIU DI2s Stand alone Data Interface Units PDIU DSs a Digital Door Phone Lock Control Unit DDCB a Digital Direct Station Selection Console DDSS and Add on Modules ADMs The DDSS console DDCB and PDIU DSs are wired directly to the PDKU and require no additional hardware but do require their own dedi cated ports circuits The PDIU DI PDIU DI2 or the ADM shares with its accompanying digital tele INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 phone the same wire pair and circuit on the PDKU The PDKU Figure 5 12 has no controls NOTE The PDIU DI attaches to 1000 series Digital Telephones
75. 7 33 DK8 AND DK16 PDIU DS DISASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM 1 50 10 80 PDIU DI PDIU DS Installation Tests 10 81 Paragraphs 10 82 10 86 provide tests for five DIU call applications The telephone and port numbers used in these figures are provided for explanation purposes when actuallv testing use port and telephone numbers appropriate for the svstem Each of these tests can be conducted with manual dialing from a digital telephone s dial pad or AT dialing from a personal computer s keyboard however only the preferred method of dialing for application is presented 10 82 PC to PC Test Call Using AT Commands see Figure 7 34 1 DIU Programming e Program 20 Ports 00 and 01 LEDs 01 02 and 17 ON all other LEDs OFF e Program 39 Ports 00 and 01 Data Call 56 and Data Release 54 but tons should be provided e Default settings for PDIU DI S Regis ters DKT PDIU DI 10 FIGURE 7 34 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SECTION 100 816 207 MARCH 1993 2 Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are on line with a communications software package and that the communication parameters of each PC and communication software package are set to the same values data transmission rate parity data bits stop bits flow control etc 3 From 1 s keyboard type A T D D 1 1 and press ENTER AT commands must be capi tal letters e The Data Call LEDs will be liton DKT 10 and 11 e PC 1 displays CONNECT XXXX e PC 2 displays R
76. 7 and 8 on the PEKU The PESU will not support an HDSS Console Alternate Background Music Source The system will support an alternate Background Music source which can be heard over digital andelectronictelephone speakers and external page speakers This source can be connected to either Circuit 3 on a PEKU Circuit 8 on a PESU or Circuit 4 on a KSTU or PSTU PCB Conference Amplifier An amplifier for two CO line conferencing can be connected to Circuits 6 and 7 Ports 17 and 18 on a PEKU or PESU 3 40 Standard Telephone Circuit Options 3 41 In addition to supporting standard telephones each of the standard telephone circuits can sup port anv one of a number of single wire pair de vices including voice mail Auto Attendant devices and modems The QSTU which can be installed in the STRATA Kev Service Unit has two standard telephone circuits The KSTU which can be installed in the STRATA DK16 Base Kev Ser vice Unit has four standard telephone circuits the PSTU which can be installed in the DK16 Expan sion Kev Service Unit has eight and the PESU which can also be installed in the DK16 Expansion Unit has two Circuits 1 and 2 4 TELEPHONE UPGRADES 4 00 Digital and Electronic telephones can be upgraded for a number of features there are no upgrades for standard telephones Each of these upgrades shares a circuit with the telephone that it is connected to and is not considered a station 4 10 Digital
77. 81 88 and dial 9 connectors group Program 40 e Assigns stations access to CO lines incoming and outgoing access 2 Ifthe Expansion Unit is located within one mile ofthe PBX or CO telephone office set dB PAD switches SW101 through SW401 to the 3 3 signal level drop position 4 After installing the PCOU gently pull the outward Ifthe connectors are properly mated a slight resistance will be felt CO LINE MODULAR JACK CIRCUITS 1 AND 2 CO LINE MODULAR JACK CIRCUITS 3 AND 4 BACKPLANE CONNECTOR FIGURE 5 17 PCOU CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS 5 26 INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU amp PCB SEGTION 100 816 205 1993 5 PCOU CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS CONTROL INDICATOR CONNECTOR TYPE OF COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Figure 5 17 CO Line Circuit 1 Red LED Lights to indicate CO line circuit 1 is in Indicator CD112 operation NOTE CO line indicator will not light unless PCOU is connected to a CO CO Line Circuit 2 Red LED Lights to indicate CO line circuit 2 is in Indicator CD212 operation NOTE CO line indicator will not light unless PCOU is connected to a CO CO Line Circuit 3 Red LED Lights to indicate CO line circuit 3 is in Indicator CD312 operation NOTE CO line indicator will not light unless PCOU is connected to a CO CO Line Circuit 4 Red LED Lights to indicate CO line circuit 4 is in Indicator CD412 operation NOTE CO
78. 816 207 MARGH 1993 DK8 KSU or DK16 BASE KEV SERVICE UNIT E MOH VOLUME CONTROL STATIONS ON HOLD CO LINES AND MOH BGM SOURCE PARRER ELECTRONIC DIGITAL DK8 DK1 TELEPHONE SPEAKER MOH RCA BGM 481 ON 480 OFF gt EXTERNAL PAGE SYSTEM BGM WHEN PAGE IS IDLE SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS INPUT IMPEDANCE 6000 DK8 DK16 INPUT VOLTAGE 600 OHM RECOMMENDED LEVELS PAGE RCA MIN 0 14 VRMS 15 dBm MAX 0 77 VRMS 0 dBm FIGURE 7 3 DK8 AND DK16 MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION A e ri n n n t n sa OR DK16 VR1 VOLUME CONTROL CO LINES AND MOH SOURCE 7 STATIONS ON HOLD DK8 OR DK16 MOH RCA JACK BGM WHEN PAGE IS IDLE QSTU CIRCUIT 2 KSTU PSTU CIRCUIT 4 TO EXTERNAL PEKU CIRCUIT PAGE SYSTEM PESU CIRCUIT 8 DK8 OR DK16 BGM 491 ON 490 OFF 6000 OUTPUT 600 OHM PAGE JACK EXTERNAL SPEAKERS ELECTRONIC DIGITAL TELEPHONE SPEAKER BGM MOH SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS INPUT IMPEDANCE 6000 INPUT VOLTAGE BACKPLANE WIRING RECOMMENDED LEVELS INSTALLATION WIRING MIN 0 14 VRMS 15 dBm MAX 0 77 VRMS 0 dBm SEE PROGRAM 19 SLOT ASSIGNMENT PROGRAM 10 2 CIRCUIT ASSIGNMENT FIGURE 7 4 DK8 AND DK16 MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION B BGM 481 ON 480 OFF 1 5 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 CO LINES AND MOH SOURCE C STATIONS
79. ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM I PROGRAM 92 continued DIGITAL TELEPHONE VOLUME LEVEL INITIALIZATION ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt prompt enter G CR Enter Program Number 92 P 92 Press CR 92 Enter 5 P92 5 Enter 0 L change button LED 01 to ON entering Y 925 01 N Y Press SPACE four times P92 5 01 N Y 02 N 03 N 04 N 05 N Change LED 05 to by entering Y 92 5 01 N Y 02 N 03 N NOTE If program data is not entered correctly CR will not 04 N respond To retry press DELETE CR at the same time 05 N Y Press CR 925 01 N Y Initialization complete 02 N 03 N 04 N 05 N To exit this program press CR REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM J PROGRAM 92 continued CALL FORWARD BACKUP RAM INITIALIZATION ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter CR Enter Program Number 92 Press CR Enter 9 Enter button LED number O 3 Change LED 03 to ON by entering Y Press SPACE Change LED 04 to ON by entering Y Press CR Initialization complete NOTE If program data is not entered correctly CR will not respond To retry press DELETE CR at the same time To exit this program press CR IMPORTA
80. Assigns appropriate Might Transfer or Night Transfer 1 tenant 1 and 2 tenant 2 buttons to electronic and digital telephones NOTES 1 See Paragraph 5 and Figure 7 16 and 7 17 for PIOU zone paging installation instructions 2 Any station can pick up CO lines that night ring over external page zones by dialing Intercom 5 9 66 BLOCK PIN NUMBERS FACILITY ALARM SYSTEM TWISTED PAIR MDF FACILITY ALARM SYSTEM DK16 ALARM SENSOR BLOCK DIAGRAM PIOU PIOUS 1 33 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 10 DATA INTERFACE UNIT INSTALLATION 10 00 General 10 01 STRATA DK8 and DK 16 support two tvpes of Data Interface Units DIUs that enable digital tele phone users to simultaneously transmit and ceive data on the same digital station port and wire pair while communicating on a voice call One unit called the integrated DIU PDIU DI PDIU DI2 becomes part of the digital telephone replacing the telephone s base the other unit is a small self contained unit called the stand alone DIU PDIU DS Each DIU is powered by the digital port it is connected see Table 8 D for wiring requirements NOTES 1 Digital Ports includes the DK8 KSU DK16 Base Unit PDKU and KCDU digital sta tion ports This applies wherever the term Digital Ports is used in the text and figures in this chapter 2000 series digital telephones require PDIU DI2 and 1000 series telephones re quire PDI
81. BR BR BK S BK Y BL _Y GN vs V BL V GN V BR MES 49 125 750 50 66 150 SPLIT BLOCK Q Oo i N S IN Or N i N x a 4 Az k N 27 TELEPHONE 28 DR OR HDSS VT 29 yp CIRCUIT 8 TO ELECTRONIC 31 DT TELEPHONE Fas L IPR ORHDSS 38 OCA T1 OT 3i OCA R1 OR TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA 35 3 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 LU 2 2 Q n gt lt H lt 2 lt l m lt lt 2 LO CIRCUIT 2 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE ojojo 2 CIRCUIT 3 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA CIRCUIT 4 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA 1120 CIRCUIT 5 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE 112 CIRCUIT 6 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA 1 CIRCUIT 7 TO ELECTRONIC TELE
82. Busy Redial Internal 8 Receiver CKT per QRCU e Standard telephone ports e DISA Control Relay One of the following 25 pair Amphenol e Night Relay e External Page Mute Control Relay Conference Circuit Interface Unit e 2 Simultaneous Internal QCNU Conferences 4 SMDR TTY Interface Unit QSMU SMDR Printer or 6 pin Modular Requires PPTC e Maintenance Terminal or PPTC adaptor 1 max QSTU per system Voice Mail Devices 4 e Modem NE 21 Customer supplied equipment not offered by Toshiba Telecommunication Systems Division INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 MARCH 1993 TABLE 3 D DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT COMPONENTS Digital Telephone Circuits 8 e Digital Telephones with 25 pair Amphenol 4 or without PDIU DI2 or ADM e Stand alone Data Interface Units PDIU DS e Door Phone Lock Control Unit DDCB e Digital Direct Station Selection Console DDSS 2 Line Circuits 4 22 22 Start CO Lines RJ11 Modular Power Failure Transfer Interface Failure Transfer Interface Standard Standard Telephone one one RJ11 Modular Modular Batterv Backup Interface with Two 12 volt Batteries Proprietary Cable and built in charger Connector Cable Batteries Music On Hold BGM Interface Music On Hold BGM Interface Hold BGM Interface Music on Hold BGM source on Music on Hold BGM source Source RCAJack Jack 600 Ohm page Interface Amplifier Spe
83. CODE ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter P R CR gt MODE PROG Enter Program Number 47 Press CR P 47 47 Enter exception table 1 8 and press 1 PA7 1 AREA CODE NNN Refer to the Svstem Record Sheet and enter the required area code and press CR Example 714 enter 7 14 47 Y 1 AREA CODE NNN 714 47 Add Exception Office Codes to Table Enter exception table 1 8 and press 2 Enter exception codes or OOL Press SPACE to add more codes Press SPACE CR to store codes P47 112 Except Except To Delete Exception Office Codes from Table e Enter exception table 1 8 and press Enter exception codes or OOL Press SPACE to delete more codes Press SPACE CR to store codes P47 1 13 Delete Delete To Displav Exception Office Codes in Table Enter exception table 1 8 and press 4 SPACE Press SPACE to display more codes Press CR to exit display P47 114 Except To Exit Program Store Data CR 47 2 Except P47 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM AW PROGRAM 48 ST
84. CORD OPTIONAL AC GROUND WIRE FROM FG TERMINAL TO EARTH GROUND COLD WATER PIPE OUTLET DO NOT ROUTE AC POWER CORD SIDE BY SIDE WITH OTHER CABLES FIGURE 5 8 DK16 EXPANSION UNIT WIRING CONNECTIONS 5 9 INSTALLATION DK16 KSU amp SEGTION 100 816 205 1993 13 Knock out the tab on the bottom of the side cover 14 Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and then turn ON the power supplv switch 15 Install the side cover to the Expansion Kev Service Unit Figure 5 7 2 40 Reserve Power Power Failure Options 2 41 The STRATA DK svstems offer two options to protect system operation in the event of a power failure the Reserve Power option Paragraph 2 42 2 44 and the Power Failure Emergency Transfer option Paragraph 17 2 42 Reserve Power Option STRATA DK16 sys tem power supply provides the capability of con necting a reserve power source two customer supplied 12 volt batteries to ensure uninterrupted system operation in the event of a power failure A pre assembled interface cable for installation of the Reserve Power optionis available from Toshiba PBTC 3M refer to Figure 5 9 IMPORTANT NOTE Local ordinances may dictate battery type and installation details 2 43 The batteries require a well ventilated loca tion close within 9 feet to the system the interface cable is 9 feet long WARNING To reduce the risk of fire or injury to persons read and follow these inst
85. Chart No 1 2 02 An assumption is made in the flowcharts that the fault was discovered and reported by a digital or electronic telephone user All faults therefore are classified according to the way they would appear at the digital or electronic telephone 2 03 Faults and associated flowcharts in Table A are organized into the following categories TABLE A FLOWCHARTS Fault Classification Catastrophic Faults Station Dial Tone Faults CO Line Dial Tone Faults DSS Console Faults Voice Mail External Auto Attendant VM AA Faults Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Faults Remote Maintenance Faults 3 FAULT CLEARING PROCEDURES 3 01 Before attempting to clear any fault ensure that it is in the system and not caused by associ ated external equipment such as wiring MOH source etc IMPORTANT Many system features are assigned en abled or disabled using software entries FAULT FINDING SECTION 100 816 500 MARCH 1993 as described inProgramming Procedures It is very important to verify that the sys tem programming is correct and func tional before troubleshooting the hard ware 3 02 Initialize the system Program 90 92 and 03 before testing new systems or when in DK16 cases changing the KFCU Feature cartridge if instructions specify 3 03 Faults in the DK8 and DK16 are cleared by replacing PCBs telephones digital or electronic or the power supply as instructed in the flow charts 3 04
86. Configuration Refer to Station Apparatus Installation Section 100 816 206 and Peripherals Installation Chapter 7 for installation procedures for the PDIU DI PDIU DI2 PDIU DIs PDIU DI2s can be equipped with any digital telephone connected to PDKU Circuits 1 7 with PDKU1 or Circuits 1 8 with PDKU2 7 16 DDCB Configuration Refer to Peripherals Installation Section 100 816 207 for installation procedures for the DDCB The DDCB must be connected to the Circuit 8 on the PDKU 7 17 ADM Configuration Refer to Section 100 816 206 Paragraph 7 00 7 20 PDKU Installation Procedure 7 21 Install the PDKU in accordance with the fol lowing steps 1 Remove the PCB from its protective packag ing 2 Insert the PDKU into the appropriate slot see Paragraph 5 22 and apply firm even pres sure to ensure proper mating of connectors NOTE Ensure the PDKU s component side is facing right when installing it in the KSU 4 After installing the PDKU gently pull the outward Ifthe connectors are properly mated a slight resistance will be felt 7 30 PDKU Wiring 7 31 Refer to PDKU Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 for wiring interconnecting details 7 40 PDKU Programming Overview 7 41 The following parameters may be specified through programming for the PDKU Program 03 e Specify code 61 if no options are installed on a PDKU e Specify code 62 to indicate a PDKU that will support stations that must receive Off ho
87. D is typed for voice calls and A T D D for data calls 10 13 Installation instructions for these devices provided in Paragraphs 10 40 thru 10 70 Call paths and scenarios for five tvpes of data test calls are provided Paragraphs 10 82 10 86 Step bv step data calling procedures are provided in the Data Interface User Guide in the Installation amp Maintenance Manual Operating Procedures 10 20 Interface Leads Signals 10 21 Both DIUs operate with nine standard EIA RS 232 interface leads signals on which signal ing data is transmitted and received DIUs connect to serial data devices with standard RS 232 cables available from telephone supply stores see Fig ures 7 25 7 30 The PDIU DI PDIU DS requires nine signals for some applications but can function with eight using modular cords and connectors with RJ45 DB25 adapters for other applications If un certain which signals are necessary for an applica tion all nine should be connected IMPORTANT NOTES The PDIU DI is always a DCE device the PDIU DS may be a DTE or DCE depending on how its internal jumpers 1 9 are configured In the descriptions below when a sig nal is ON its potential is about seven volts positive relative to signal ground pin 7 when a signal is OFF it is about 7 volts negative relative to the signal ground pin 7 Frame Ground FG Pin 1 The FG signal EIA circuit AA is a protective or safety ground which
88. DISASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM AND DK16 PC TO PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS AND DK16 PC TO PRINTER TEST CALL USING MANUAL DIALING DK8 AND DK16 INTERNAL PC TO EXTERNAL PC TEST CALL Ec cpauERe s pcm DK8 AND DK16 EXTERNAL PC TO INTERNAL PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS T AND 16 AUTO DIAL VOICE CALL TEST ets DK16 AMPLIFIED TWO CO LINE CONFERENCE AND OR AMPLIFIED DISA FUNCTIONAL WIRING DIAGRAM esi SR bu a Y RD a Neo ku CL e RYE T ii 1 GENERAL 1 00 This chapter provides to connect optional peripheral equipment to the STRATA or 16 The installation instruc tions for each peripheral option include hardware requirements printed circuit board PCB configu ration interconnection wiring requirements and programming considerations as applicable 1 01 Peripheral equipment is connected to the Base Unit itself and PCBs located in the Base Unit and Expansion Unit on the DK16 On the DK8 peripheral equipment connects to the KSU Refer to Section 100 816 204 for Kev Service Unit instal lation instructions PCB installation instructions and configuration information for the Refer to Section 100 816 205 for Base Unit and Expansion Unit installation instructions PCB in stallation instructions and PCB configuration infor mation for the DK16 1 02 Wiring diagrams for each pe
89. DK16 the outlet is not adequately grounded 7 Ifthe above tests show the outlet is not prop erly grounded the condition should be cor rected per Article 250 of the National Electri cal Code by a qualified electrician before the system is connected 2 4 TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS MARCH 1993 Strata DKs INSTALLATION GHAPTER THREE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION PARAGRAPH 1 2 2 00 2 10 2 20 2 30 3 3 10 3 20 3 30 3 40 4 4 10 4 20 5 5 10 5 20 5 40 5 50 6 TABLE 3 A 3 B 3 D 3 E 3 G 3 H NUMBER 1 2 3 N INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 MARCH 1993 TABLE OF CONTENTS SUBJECT PAGE INTRODUGTION n 3 1 SYSTEM CGAPACITY dec 3 1 Total System Gap Bel iii ji ka tas Ru M RS REM 3 1 The DK8 Key Service Unit Degli ek a e rap OM eun E 3 1 The DK16 Base Key Service 3 1 The DK 16 Expansion Key Service Unit 3 1 STATION CONSIDERATIONS 3 5 Telephone Circuit Port e 3 5 Digital Telephone Circuit Connections 3 5 Electronic Telephone Circuit Connections
90. DK16 set the P13 jumper plug on the PIOU to the BELL configuration or cut the W4 jumper on the PIOUS also for BELL configu ration NOTE The P13 PIOU and W4 PIOUS CCITT configurations are not normally used in the USA 6 The communication parameters for the termi nal that will be used to communicate through the external modem connected to the TTY port should be set to seven bits even parity one stop bit 300 or 1200 bps see step 3 above Programming and system testing via the ex ternal maintenance modem is described later in this section Access to the external mainte nance modem is accomplished as follows modem is connected to a dedicated CO call the CO line number to estab lish modem communication Ifthe modem is connected to a standard telephone port call a STRATA DK CO line that can be transferred to or pro grammed to ring the standard telephone modem port to establish modem commu nication It is also possible to establish communications by calling in on a STRATA DK DISA CO line and dialing the intercom number of the modem connected to the standard telephone port 4 40 Programming 4 41 is used on DK16 enable the IMDU in Program 77 1 LED 14 If using an external SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 modem with STRATA DK16 or DK8 skip LED 14 in Program 77 1 4 42 For DK8 only turn LED 04 ON in Program 10 3 to activate the QSMU for external modem operation
91. DKSU8 STRATA to provide emergency service during a system power failure PIOU Option Interface Unit STRATA DK16 only A printed circuit board that can be installed in the optional Expansion Key Service Unit to provide support and or circuit interface for optional hard ware peripherals and upgrades PIOUS STRATA DK16 only The same as the PIOU except the PIOUS has one external pag ing interface zone while the PIOU has four NOTE The system cannot support the PIOU and PIOUS simultaneously Only one or the other can be installed PORT There are two types of ports physical and logical A physical portis an actual station circuit location a logical port is the set of characteris tics features station intercom number etc assigned to the physical port Logical ports are mobile They can be moved from one physical port to another PBTC A Toshiba supplied cable used to connect customer supplied batteries to the power sup ply inthe DKSUB for emergency reserve power PPTC STRATA DK16 only A Toshiba supplied adapter that is used to connect the modular SMDR and or maintenance ports to the DB 25 connector of a printer terminal modem or call accounting machine The SMDR Maintenance TTY portis located on the optional QSMU PCB STRATA DK8 or PIOU or PIOUS PCB STRATA DK16 PSTU1 Standard Telephone Interface Unit STRATA DK16 only A printed circuit board with a built in ring generator that can be
92. Five symbols are used in the flowcharts which are identified in Figure 1 3 05 The flowcharts are sequentially arranged to permit rapid fault localization within the system A fault clearing must begin with the Fault Classifica tion Flowchart which is arranged in the correct Marking points of a flowchart sequence Important notes affecting the fault clearing procedure Question to be answered YES or NO Progression TO or FROM another flowchart location Letters and numbers denote the exact entrance or exit points Statement of a required action FIGURE 1 FLOWCHART SYMBOLS fault locating sequence FAULT FINDING SEGTION 100 816 500 MARGH 1993 3 06 The following precautions must be observed when handling PCBs DO NOT e Drop a PCB e Stack one PCB on top of another e Handle a PCB without discharging any static electricity from your person by touching the grounded cabinet e Touch PCB contacts with your fingers Important If the fault is not cleared by substituting a PCB the original PCB must be reinstalled in the KSU before trying another PCB 4 DEFECTIVE APPARATUS RETURNS 4 01 When a defective system apparatus is shipped for repair the apparatus must be packed in a suitable container the original box is highly recommended as follows a Anti static containers for all other PCBs and Feature cartridge b Plastic bags for digital or electronic tele phones KSU etc 4 02 NEVER WRITE
93. INSTALLATION GHAPTER SIX STATION APPARATUS INSTALLATION PARAGRAPH 1 1 00 1 10 2 2 00 2 10 2 20 2 30 2 40 3 3 10 3 20 3 30 3 40 3 50 3 60 3 70 3 80 3 90 4 4 10 4 20 4 30 4 40 4 50 4 60 5 5 10 5 20 6 6 10 6 20 6 30 6 40 7 INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SECTION 100 816 206 MARGH 1993 TABLE OF 5 SUBJECT PAGE OVERVIEW Rr 6 1 PUDSE iare 6 1 Types of Telephones Fs nir haus sued omn e 6 1 TELEPHONE INSTALLATION 2 ea ipejpu 6 1 General T e pusu 6 1 Connecting Digital Telephones to the System 6 1 Connecting Electronic Telephones to the System DK16 only 6 2 Connecting Standard Telephones to the System 6 2 Telephone Wall Mounting 6 2 DIGITAL TELEPHONE UPGRADES naan 6 4 Simultaneous Voice and Data Upgrade PDIU DI2 and PDIU DI 6 4 Off hook Call Announce Upgrade DVSU 6 6 Loud Ringing Bell Headset Upgrade 6 6 Carbon Headset Handsel SS re PL 6 9 Beep Strap usan
94. Installation 7 27 VOICE MAIL OPTIONS ptu ute RE haad e ie 7 28 System Hardware 7 28 Toshiba VP Voice Messaging 7 28 Customer supplied Voice Mail Messaging Systems 7 30 DK16 ALARM SENSOR INSTALLATION 7 32 DK16 NIGHT RINGING OVER EXTERNAL ZONE 7 33 DATA INTERFACE UNIT INSTALLATION ie 7 34 tiq C A s 7 34 Common DIV COMMS Gong m m 7 34 EIA Interface Leads Signals Siena 7 35 oll caer emer u 7 36 PDIU DI to Personal Computer PC Installation 7 36 PDIUDS to Printer Installation cepe 7 37 PDIU DS to Modem 7 38 PDIU DS Disassembly and Assembly 7 40 PDIU DI PDID DS Installation Tests tritt enne 7 51 DK16 TWO CO LINE EXTERNAL AMPLIFIED CONFERENCE 7 56 7 56 FIGURE LIST TITLE PAGE DK8 AND DK16 MUSIC ON HOLD AND BACKGROUND MUSIC
95. MDF WIRING DDCB AND DOOR LOCK CONTROL 8 9 QSTU DK16 STATION MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD 8 10 DKS AND 16 CO LINE RECORD bit 8 10 DKS QSMU TTY SMBR WIRING uuu u Rd uu RE 8 11 DK16 MDF WIRING BASE UNIT P5 AMPHENOL STATION AND RELAY CONNEGTION U M V re 8 12 DK16 MDF WIRING CO LINES TO BASE UNIT enne 8 13 DK16 MDF WIRING FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONES DKTS AND DIGITAL DSS CONSOLE DDSS TO PDKU 8 14 DK16 MDF WIRING FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONES DKTS WITH PDIU DI PDIU DI2 AND PDIU DS PDKU KCDU OR BASE UNIT 8 15 DK8 OR DK16 PDKU KCDU DK8 KSU OR DK16 BASE KSU DIGITAL STATION MDF GROSS CONNECT RECORD 8 16 DK16 WIRING ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE TO PEKU 8 17 DK16 MDF WIRING HDSS CONSOLE AND ASSOCIATED ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE WIRING TO PEKU o DERE rari esami be t vo 8 18 DKT6 PEKU BACKGROUND MUSIC CONNECTION 8 19 DK16 STATION MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD 8 20 DK16 MDF WIRING STANDARD TELEPHONE VOICE MAIL TO PSTU 8 21 DK16 PSTU STATION MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD 8 22 DK16 PESU CIRCUIT CARD WIRING DIAGRAM a Ce 8 23 DK16 PESU STATION MDF CRO
96. Maximum of 4 INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 MARCH 1993 DK8 WORKSHEET 2 KEY SERVICE UNIT AND PCBs 1 From Worksheet 1 enter the number of required ports circuits and lines Digital Ports 8 max Standard Ports 2 max CO Lines 4 max NOTE The maximum number of digital ports is 8 and standard ports is 2 The maximum number of CO lines is four 2 Cross off the printed circuit boards PCBs in addition to the standard Base Key Service Unit lines and ports needed to support the ports and lines entered in Step 1 of this worksheet KSU Interfaces built in 2 CO lines 4 digital ports KSU Optional Unit Station and Line PCBs QCDU 1 CO line and 2 digital ports two max QSTU 2 standard ports one max 3 Refer to Worksheet 3 to determine option and peripheral requirements 3 12 INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 MARCH 1993 DK8 WORKSHEET 3 PERIPHERALS AND UPGRADES 1 BASE UNIT PERIPHERALS Battery Backup Interface Yes or No One or two HPFB batteries can be connected to a backup battery interface Standard on to provide backup battery backup if there is a power failure Connecting cable is included 1 HPFB for 5 1 hour backup 2 HPFBs for 1 5 2 hours backup QRCU Yes or No The QRCU is required to interpret Dual tone Multi frequency DTMF tones from standard telephones Voice Mail Auto Attendant and DISA CO circuits or if the Auto Busy Redial ABR featu
97. NIGHT to be 300 or 1200 BPS ID BELA VINON SW2 Sets the PIOU programming speed to be 300 or 1200 BPS for IMDU or TTY jack CONTROL LED CO4 On 300 BPS SW2 set In T gt ALARM LED CO4 Off 1200 BPS SW2 set Out SW3 Sets the PIOUS to operate with the IMDU or an external device connected to the TTY modular jack MODEM For IMDU operation 7 even 1 TTY For ASCII terminal 8 none 1 or external modem 8 none 1 W4 Sets the IMDU TTY jack for bell or CCITT specification BELL WA4 not installed DB25 PINS MODULAR PINS WIRE COLOR OOOOO a 4 PDIU DS jumpers should be set to the B C position when connected to the PIOUS or SMDR port FIGURE 8 24 DK16 PIOUS TTV AND SMDR WIRING 8 28 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 KSU BACKPLANE BASE UNIT Amplifier mute MDF control can also be provided bv Page relav in Base Units Pin 42 17 of P5 amphenol 1 connector ONTROL DOOR LOCK CONTROL NIGHT BELL ALARM FACILITY ALARM SENSOR UNIT All wiring connections must be 24 AWG twisted pairs Dotted lines show optional connections only one optional connection is allowed RELAY OPTIONS DE DOOR LOCK OR AMP MUTE CONTROL PROGRAM 77 1
98. ON HOLD J6 MOH RCA JACK BASE UNIT SEE PROGRAM 10 2 CIRCUIT ASSIGNMENT PROGRAM 19 SLOT ASSIGNMENT BGM PAGE ELECTRONIC DIGITAL TELEPHONE G O KSTU PSTU ELECTRONIC DIGITAL BGM SOURCE PESU TELEPHONE SPEAKER OR PEKU KSTU PSTU CIRCUIT 4 IN SLOT BGM 481 ON 480 OFF PEKU CIRCUIT PESU CIRCUIT 8 J7 600 OHM PAGE OUTPUT BASE UNIT PAGE EXTERNAL SPEAKER BGM SOURCE PAGE OR BGM TO EXTERNAL UNIT ZONE RELAYS ACTIVATE BGM WHEN PAGE IS IDLE WITH PAGE AMPLIFIER 1 BACKPLANE WIRING INSTALLATION WIRING FIGURE 7 5 DK16 MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION C 1 6 3 10 DK8 KSU and 16 Base Unit Relav 3 11 The KSU or DK16 Base Unit Relay can be programmed for one of three options e BGM mute e Night transfer e MOH source control These options are set in Program 77 1 LED 01 and 02 Only one option is allowed per installation However inthe DK16 these options can be supple mented with PIOU PIOUS relay options Refer to Chapter 8 for wiring interconnecting details Elec trical specifications for the relay contacts are as follows Voltage e 24VDC maximum Current e 1 ampere maximum e Normally open closed when activated 3 20 DK16 Expansion Unit PIOU and PIOUS Relays 3 21 The Expansion Unit via the PIOU or PIOUS provides two additional relays that control periph eral options see Figures 7 6 7 7 8 23 and 8 25 e Door Lock Relay BGM mute e
99. Off hook Call 10 pin connector Interface connector for optional Off hook Announce P60 Call Announce subassembly connector used in conjunction with P10 P20 P40 and P50 DSS EKT DSS Console Two position slide switch Configures PEKU for operation with either Electronic Telephone an HDSS console or electronic SW1 Switch telephones BGM source connection White jumper wire When cut configures PEKU for BGM W5 Jumper Wire source connection 8 14 Background Music BGM Configuration 8 15 External Amplifier Configuration The Configure the PEKU to support a BGM source in does not have to be configured to support an accordance with the following steps external amplifier However the system must be programmed for one see Paragraph 8 40 See 1 Remove the PCB from its protective pack Peripherals Installation Section 100 816 207 for aging I external amplifier installation instructions FERM 8 20 PEKU Installation Procedure PCB 3 Referto Peripherals Installation Section 100 8 21 Install the PEKU in accordance with the fol 816 207 for installation procedures for BGM lowing steps connection 1 Remove the POB from its protective pack aging 5 19 INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 50 20 910 FIGURE 5 14 OFF HOOK CALL ANNOUNCE UNIT EOCU INTERFACE CONNECTORS 2 Ensure the PEKU has b
100. SPLIT BLOCK NOTE All cable 24 AWG max NOTE See Program 29 to assign DSS buttons loop resistance 20 ohms from PEKU to DSS 500 ft HDSS BLF CONSOLE FIGURE 8 14 DK16 MDF WIRING HDSS CONSOLE AND ASSOCIATED ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE WIRING TO 8 18 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 TO irte MU BRIDGING STATION CABLING 24 AWG TWISTED PAIRS CLIPS VOICE T1 VT VOICE R1 VR DATA T1 DT TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE DATA R1 DR VT2 VR CIRCUIT 2 TO ELECTRONIC DT2 TELEPHONE DR2 VT3 BACKGROUND MUSIC VR3 SOURCE OUTPUT DT3 600 OHMS 1V RMS MAX DRS NOT USED VT __ VR DT CIRCUIT 4 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE VT VR 18 CIRCUIT 5 TO ELECTRONIC 19 DT TELEPHONE 20 SL 21 NI NOTES VR CIRCUIT 6 TO 1 Program 10 2 button LED 09 for DT ELECTRONIC BGM connection to port 02 See Program 19 for TELEPHONE slot assignment LA Cut W5 jumper on PEKU 25 Provide to electronic telephone speakers 26 VR a and external page DT Volume is adjusted at BGM source only not at PEKU W BL 26 1 27 2 W GN GN W W BR BR W L w s Kew 55 R BL K OR 14 GN R 7 R BR BR R Kas 35 sr io _ BLBK 11 37 osk 12 B GN GN BK B
101. Store Data A To store data press CR B To exit this program press CR TABLE RM BB PROGRAM 50 5 LCR LOCAL CALL PLAN NUM BER ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt prompt enter G CR Enter Program Number 50 Press CR Enter the number 5 The svstem will displav the present local route plan number Refer to the Svstem Record Sheet and change if required Example 2 enter 2 Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR B To exit this program press CR 52 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM BC PROGRAM 50 6 LCR DIAL ZERO TIMEOUT ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt MODE prompt enter R CR P Enter Program Number 50 P 50 Press CR P50 Enter the number 6 P50 6 06 10 The system will display the present dial zero timeout Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required Example 10 enter 10 Exit Program Store Data P50 6 06 10 A store data press CR P50 B To exit this program press CR P TABLE RM BD PROGRAM 51 LCR AREA CODES ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt MODE prompt enter P R O G CR P Enter Program Number 51 Press CR Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required route plan number 1 8 Example Route plan 1 ent
102. TERMINAL OPERATION 8 5 00 211 1 PES 8 5 10 SEU M 8 5 20 Local Ope rato Mm u ua u cect jects 8 6 REMOTE TERMINAL OPERATION si iacu nr ph ia aaa Er nem n er rui ee 8 6 00 Regum u u EO LL 9 6 10 9 6 20 Remote e M 9 6 30 Operation esse MM 10 7 MODE SELECTION M 10 7 00 Selectirig a Moden gnane ee 10 8 usi9 el niue 10 8 00 General o uapa 10 8 10 System Record 10 8 20 Progam eeens in of len a E DES 11 8 30 Multiple Station Range Programming 2 aa 11 8 40 Programming Procedures 2 2 4 11 9 DATA DUMP MODE ss iba ta ware egret 11 9 00 General ME M M 11 10 TEST MODE M 12 10 00 General 12 10 10 COILING TESNO ELT l 13 11
103. To adjust the volume of the HESB Loud Ringing Bell Call the telephone connected to the HESB and adjust the volume control on the back of the HESB and the ring volume control on the telephone 3 40 Carbon Headset Handset Straps 3 41 If a carbon type handset or headset is con nected to the handset jack on the side of the telephone two jumper straps inside the telephone must be cut Cut the straps in accordance with the following steps NOTE It is not necessary to cut these straps if the headset is connected to the HHEU 1 Loosen the four captive screws securing the telephone base Figure 6 1 and remove the base 2A For 2000 series digital telephones refer to Figure 6 7 or 6 8 and cut the CARBON straps W201 and W202 2B For 1000 series digital telephones refer to Figure 6 9 and cut the CARBON straps W301 and W302 onthe DKT1020 SD W201 and W203 on the DKT1020 H 3 Reinstall the telephone base and secure it with its four captive screws 3 50 Beep Strap 3 51 A beep sounds whenever a dialpad button or feature button is pressed on a digital telephone To eliminate this beep follow the procedure below 1 Loosen the four captive screws securing the telephone base Figure 6 1 and remove the base 2A For 2000 series digital telephones refer to Figures 6 7 or 6 8 and cut the BEEP strap 2B For 1000 series digital telephones refer to Figure 6 9 and cut the BEEP strap 3 Reinstall the telephone b
104. Y BL 41 BL Y 16 Y O 42 O Y 17 Y GN 43 GN Y 18 Y BR 44 BR Y 19 Y S 45 S Y 20 V BL 46 BL V 21 V O 47 O V 22 V GN 48 GN V 23 V BR 49 BR V 24 V S 50 S V 25 STATION CABLING JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS 24AWG 1 OR 2 PAIR SEE NOTE 2 CIRCUIT 2 TO DKT2 OR PDIU DS CIRCUIT 3 TO DKT3 OR PDIU DS CIRCUIT 4 DKT4 OR PDIU DS CIRCUIT 5 TO DKT5 OR PDIU DS OR DDCB MODULAR CORD T6 R6 pre CIRCUIT 6 TO 6 DIGITAL pre ORPDIU DS TELEPHONE DKT 1 WITH OR WITHOUT 7 PDIU DI PDIU DI2 CIRCUIT 7 PDIU D T8 VOICE DATA GND R8 VOICE DATA tc z z lt 24 lt z 3 m lt lt USED STD TEL CIRCUIT 1 OT USED N STD TEL CIRCUIT 2 N OT USED
105. accounting device may be connected to the system to provide a hard copy record of station activity incoming outgoing and transferred calls account code entries on CO lines or a printout of the customer data base Call record data is printed out at the completion of each call Program SMDR with Program 60 and use Program 97 to have the SMDR printer display the customer data base 6 01 SMDR will send out special names for the following types of calls e MSS Prints DISA calls to stations see Note e MODM Prints on calls to the IMDU remote maintenance modem station 619 e DISA Prints on DISA calls to CO lines when INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 66 BLOCK PIN NUMBERS JACKETED TWISTED PAIR PAGE ACCESS 24 AWG CODES ZONE A 35 PGOUT 2 17 PGIN 2 4 PGOUT 3 4 4 2 PI PGIN 4 46 PAGING NIGHT RING SIGNAL FROM BASE UNIT J7 600 OHM PAGE RCA JACK SPEAKER COMMON LINE B JUMPER WIRE BREAK 11 O NIGHT RELAV PROGRAMMING PIOU PIN NUMBERS 77 1 LED 05 OFF LED 06 ON 25 PAIR CABLE 78 ENABLE CO LINES TO NIGHT RING OVER EXTERNAL PAGE 77 1 LED 08 ON FOR DOOR PHONE NOTES NIGHT RING OVER PAGE 1 Page signal path 2 Night ring signal path 3 Background music over zone page is not possible with this configuration 4 Available wit
106. and DK16 Also included are grounding requirements 2 INPUT POWER REQUIREMENTS 2 00 The system requires an input power source of 117VAC nominal 85VAC 135VAC 50 60 Hz 15 amps The AC outlet is recommended to be dedicated and unswitched with a solid third wire ground refer to Paragraph 4 This is to eliminate interference from branch circuit motor noise or the like and to prevent accidental power off 2 01 To avoid accidental power turn off it is rec ommended that an ON OFF wall switch not be used on this dedicated AC circuit DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT AND HPFB CLEARANCE FRONT VIEW TOP VIEW i mir 3 FEET FIGURE 2 1 DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT AND HPFB MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS 2 1 INSTALLATION SITE REQUIREMENTS SECTION 100 816 202 MARCH 1993 2 02 An option Reserve Power Battery and Charger HPFB is available for use with the STRATA to serve as a power failure backup For the STRATA DK16 a reserve power source two customer supplied 12 volt batteries may be connected to the system to serve as a power failure backup 3 SITE CONSIDERATIONS 3 00 Clearance and Location Requirements 3 01 The key service units must be wall mounted Figure 2 1 shows the minimum clearance require ments for the STRATA DK8 system and includes the recommended mounting location and clear ance requirements for the optional HPFB Figures 2 2 Base Key Service Unit and 2 3 Base and Expansion Key Service Unit togeth
107. are used to identify the system s hardware operation and features The following alphabetical listing describes the mnemonics used in this manual ADM Add on Module A telephone upgrade that provides 20 Direct Station Selection DSS but tons with busy LED indicationon STRATADK16 and 10 DSS buttons plus 8 speed dial buttons one for every station one night transfer and one all call page button on STRATA Can be installed on any or all 2000 series Digital Telephones in the system Attaches to the tele phone and uses the same port assigned to the telephone ADM buttons are fixed and cannot be changed in system programming BPS Bits Per Second Unit of measure that re fers to the transmission speed baud rate of electronic signals It is used when describing data interface unit and modem operation CO Central Office The facility which houses switching equipment that provides telephone service CO lines Centrex lines etc for the immediate geographical area CO Line A term used to define the STRATA hardware circuit that connects to the Central Office network line pair Each CO line is as signed a CO line number in system software INSTALLATION INTRODUGTION SEGTION 100 816 201 MARGH 1993 CODECs Coder Decoders Semiconductors that allow the system to process analog to digital and digital to analog conversions DDCB Digital Door Phone Lock Control Unit A peripheral hardware unit that can be connected
108. as required Is the fault cleared No other faults are classified Call your technical support group for assistance data records are sent correctly but not when the customer requires Is the fault cleared Call your technical support group Set SMDR options in Program 60 Threshold Verifv that the SMDR device i i communication parameters are set for 8 data bits no paritv 1 stop bit 1200 bps on KD8 300 or 1200 bps on DK16 Change as required Is the fault cleared Call your technical support group YES Is the fault cleared On DK16 the SMDR port is the bottom Check that the SMDR device modular jack TTY is on is wired correctly to the QSMU top of PIOU PIOUS On DK8 8 DK16 the PIOU PIOUS SMDR port modular cord connecting Refer to PIOU or PIOUS wiring i ion 100 816 208 to the SMDR port must jin Section 100 816 208 _ 6 wires Fix as required FAULT FINDING SEGTION 100 816 500 MARGH 1993 GHART NO 8 REMOTE MAINTENANCE FAULTS START Read the Remote Maintenance Section 100 816 600 Paragraphs 1 to 7 This chart assumes that the remote terminal and modem have no fault and that Remote Maintenance does not operate If a Digital or Electronic telephone is in the programming mode it is not possible to enter the Remote Maintenance mode On DK16 check that the IMDU PIOU or PIOUS is ins
109. call or voice first has been manually answered from the elec tronic or digital telephone This turn off feature prevents audio feedback problems 4 02 Amplified Speaker Option The Amplified Speaker option allows the HESB to be configured as apaging speaker The HESB is connected to the 600 ohm Page RCA jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit to provide an amplified external speaker 4 03 Talkback Amplified Speaker Option The Talkback Amplified Speaker option allows a talkback speaker to be provided in areas where telephone is not needed In this configuration the HESB is connected to the 600 ohm Page RCA jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit and is used as the amplifier and speaker The door phone unit MDFB is connected to the HESB and serves as a microphone to provide talkback operation The MDFB microphone is always on in this application so the pushbutton is inoperative and the unit serves only as a microphone for talkback NOTE The 600 ohm Page RCA jack is two way duplex and is compatible with most commer cially available talkback amplifiers 4 10 System Hardware Requirements 4 11 System hardware requirements vary depend ing on the HESB option selected Refer to the following installation procedures for the system hardware requirements for each option 4 20 HESB Option Installation 4 21 Loud Ringing Bell Installation Install the HESB Loud Ringing Bell option in accordance with the following procedures D
110. capacity INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 MARCH 1993 TABLE 3 A DK8 CO LINE STATION CONFIGURATION GUIDE EQUIPMENT KSU Key Service Unit 2 CO Lines 4 digital circuits CO Central Office QCDU Optional PCB 1 CO line 2 digital circuits DKT Digital Telephone QSTU Optional PCB 2 standard circuits Standard Telephone KSU KSU QSTU KSU QCDU KSU QCDU QSTU KSU QCDU QCDU KSU QCDU QSTU TABLE 3 B DK16 CO LINE STATION CONFIGURATION GUIDE BASE AND EXPANSION UNIT EQUIPMENT BU Base Unit 4 CO lines 8 digital circuits PSTU EU option 8 standard circuits KSTU Base Unit Option 4 standard circuits PCOU EU option 4 CO lines EU Expansion Unit CO Central Office line PDKU EU option 8 digital circuits Digital telephone KCDU EU option 2 CO lines 4 digital circuits Electronic telephone EU option 8 electronic circuits SLT Standard telephone PESU EU option 2 standard 4 electronic circuits CONFIGURATION CO LINES BY STATION DKTs EKTs SLTs EQUIPMENT EU 4 KSTU BU EU PESU BU EU PSTU BU EU BU EU PDKU BU KSTU PESU BU EU PEKU BU KSTU EU PDKU BU KSTU EU PSTU BU EU KCDU BU KSTU EU KCDU BU EU PCOU BU KSTU EU PCOU BU EU PCOU PESU BU EU PCOU PEKU BU EU PDKU BU EU KCDU KCDU BU KSTU EU PCOU
111. cleared Is the fault Using a standard DTMF cleared telephone check all standard telephone circuits QSTU KSTU PSTU or PESU Replace defective PCB if necessary Check that the VM I D codes 656 and 657 are stored correctly in users Digital or Electronic telephones Use operating procedures in the manual for instructions Is the fault cleared Other VM AA related programs e 10 2 LED 11 No DTMF tones 13 Message center 33 Station hunting 35 Busy station transfer ringing 36 Fixed call forward 37 Ring transfer recall time Call your technical support group 12 FAULT FINDING SEGTION 100 816 500 MARGH 1993 GHART NO 7 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SMDR FAULTS START Read the SMDR installation instructions in This chart assumes paragraph 7 of the SMDR device On only verify that the Section 100 816 207 has no faults QSMU is installed and ls the YES before proceeding programmed for SMDR Prog fault with this chart 10 3 LED 04 is off for SMDR cleared QSMU is 1200 bps only On DK16 only Verify that the detected at the QSMU batid rate switoh PIOU PIOUS SMDR SW1 is in the correct position port 300 bps or 1200 bps to match Change the QSMU the SMDR device baud rate PIOU or PIOUS PCB Refer to PIOU PIOUS installation instructions in Section 100 816 205 No SMDR data or garbled data is Change
112. communications software package such as PROCOMM may also be used See Paragraph 15 for compatible personal computers 6 02 Modem For either system the modem must be full duplex asynchronous operate at 300 or 1200 bps 1200 only for DK8 and have an RS 232 interface to connect with a terminal or PC as described in Paragraph 6 01 It must interface with the public telephone network and be compatible with Bell 103 or 212 modem specifications 6 10 Set up 6 11 Referto Figures 2 3 and 4 and verify that the remote terminal is connected and set up as follows 1 Connect the terminal and modem together with the RS 232 cable NOTE If a personal computer is being used connect the cable to the serial COM port 2 Connect the modem line input to a CO PBX line for access to the public telephone net work 3 Set the terminal and modem baud rate to match the DK16 PIOU S setting 300 or 1200 bps or DK8 QSMU setting 1200 bps A Setthe terminal and modem for Full Duplex operation 5 Set the terminal parameters to Word length Seven bits Stop bits One Parity Even 6 20 Remote Operation 6 21 Automatic connection via ringing assign ments To establish communication between the SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 remote terminal and the IMDU or an external modem connected to a dedicated CO line call the number of the system CO line assigned to ring the IMDU or the external modem via the remote termi nal mode
113. connect an FG wire between each HPFB FG screw 10 To test the HPFU remove the DK8 AC plug from the AC outlet The DK8 AC LED will go out but the DK8 DC LED remains on also the system remains in normal working order and the HPFU 24V LED remains on 11 If it is desired to turn off the HPFU after loss of AC power use a pencil or other sharp object to press the Battery Off switch CAUTION Once the HPFU is turned off or unplugged During AC power loss it will not operate again until AC power is restored to the DK8 KSU 3 POWER SUPPLV REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 3 00 The power supplv comes factorv installed in the Kev Service Unit Figure 4 5 if necessarv it can be removed and replaced 3 10 Power Supplv Removal Figure 4 5 1 Make sure thatthe power supply switch is OFF and that the AC power cable is not plugged into an outlet Confirm that green AC LED is not lit Loosen the screws on the front cover of the Key Service Unit and remove the cover Unplug HPFB cable from BATT connector of power supply and disconnectthe HPFB ground wire Figure 4 5 Unplug the AC cable from the CN1 connector on the power supply Figure 4 5 Remove the FG screw and disconnect the green third wire ground ring terminal Figure 4 5 Unplug the DC cable from the CN3 connector on the power supply Figure 4 5 Remove the top two and bottom left corner screws that attach the power supply to the Key Service Unit Remove
114. documentation to install the it to a CO line Section 100 816 208 provides QSTU KSTU PESU PSTU station port wiring information Set the PDIU DS DIP switch SW1 1 4 for the desired application Figure 7 32 showsthe DIP switch location and Paragraph 10 30 de scribes switch functions NOTE nect modems to QSTU PSTU or KSTU standard station ports in a modem pool configuration The RS 232 side of the modem connects to the PDIU If the modem tracks carrier detect DCD AT amp C1 SW1 4 should be ON and SW 1 2 should be OFF when PDIU DS is connected DS with standard RS 232 cables the PDIU DS line to a modem side RJ 11 connector always connects to its own individual digital port Use the following instructions 6 Use the programs below to configure the to install modems to PDIU DSs 1 Configure the PDIU DS as a DTE device PDIU DS to connect to an asynchronous modem see Programming Section 100 816 302 for explanations and record sheets Disassemble the PDIU DS and place jumper Program 20 plugs P1 P9 in the B C position MODEM e 01 Should always be ON for PDIU Reassemble the PDIU DS and mark B C on DS ports the bottom identification label for future refer ence Paragraph 10 70 provides PDIU DS disassembly assembly instructions and Fig ure 7 31 provides jumper plug information Connect the PDIU DS to the appropriate Digi tal port circuit per the wiring diagrams in Sec tion 100 816 208
115. e Program 31 Turn LEDs 05 09 and 15 20 ON for the QSTU KSTU PESU or PSTU ports that are connected to the Toshiba VP VM AA ports Do not set these options for standard telephone digital telephone or elec tronic telephone station ports LED 04 should be off if the auto attendant BLIND transfers if the AA does Supervise or Screened transfers set LED 04 ON for auto attendant ports NOTE A D and B tones should be enabled only for VM AA devices that respond to these tones e Program 33 Set the QSTU KSTU PESU and PSTU ports that are connected to the VM AA ports to a hunting sequence starting with the lowest port hunting to the next high est port etc The last hunt should be to an attendant e Program 35 1 EDs 01 and 02 mustbe ON for stations to receive the message indication Msg LED flashing from a VM device INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 e Program35 LED 20 should be ON to assign auto attendant ports the Busy Station Trans fer option with this option the auto attendant will receive ring backtone when calling sta tions designated with Busy Station Ringing Program 35 LED 19 ON This allows the auto attendant to transfer calls to busy sta tions Set LED 19 ON for answer position stations Program 36 Set fixed call forward to VM AA port per customer requirements Program 37 Set the timer for the VM AA ports to 22 seconds minimum to allow call forward no answert
116. e Usedto busy out unused MDFB positions and to identify which DDCBs support the door lock option and to set the door phone to ring one or five times 6 17 INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SECTION 100 816 206 MARCH 1993 Program 79 e Assigns door phone to station ringing assign ments 7 ADD ON MODULE INSTALLATION 7 01 Install the Add on Module DADM 2020 to a 2000 series Digital Telephone only according to the steps that follow 1 Loosen the four captive screws securing the 2000 series Digital Telephone base Figure 6 1 and remove the base 2 Remove the base handset hanger Figure 6 1 3 Loosen two captive screws securing ADM base and remove base 4 Puton ADM cable supplied with ADM through telephone base and ADM base as shown in Figure 6 18 Connect ADM cable connectors to P1 of ADM and P1 of DKT2000 telephone as shown in Figure 6 18 Install base of ADM and telephone tuck ADM cable into ADM and telephone base as necessary for proper length Secure ADM to telephone base with ADM connecting Plate using four screws Check Table 8 D in Section 100 816 208 install 2 pair house cable or external power and 2 pair modular cord supplied with ADM if required to achieve maximum distance 7 11 ADM Programming ADMs do not require programming The ADM provides 20 DSS buttons only Figure 6 19 for the STRATA DK16 and 10 DSS buttons 8 speed dial buttons one night transfer button and one all
117. en sure it has not opened Figure 3 If the circuit breaker has opened and will not rest remove assemblies KSTU KCOU Expansion Unit PCBs Expansion Unit one at a time and try to reset 24V circuit breaker If itis found Ithat one of the removable assemblies causes the circuit breaker to open replace that assem bly See Section 100 816 205 for PCB re moval and Expansion Unit installation and removal a If the 24V circuit breaker cannot be reset with all removable assemblies dis connected disconnectthe DC OUT con nect P9 fromthe Base unit motherboard and try to reset the 24V breaker b Ifthe circuit breaker resets when the DC OUT connector is removed the Base Unit or Power Supply may be defective Replace the Power Supply first per Sec tion 100 816 205 to avoid reprogram ming the system C If the 24V breaker continues to open after the power Supply is replaced in stall the original Power supply onto the DK16 Key Service Unit KSU and re place the KSU with another KSU 4 Ifthe 24V circuit breaker is not open Step 3 check the Power Supply DC voltages as follows 6 Using a voltmeter or other device which checks voltage measure the voltages referenced to frame ground FG at the DC OUT connector pins test points located on the motherboard Figure 2 The voltages should fall within the ranges below If the voltages do not fall within the ranges unplug the DC power pins from the DC OUT connec
118. ft 303 m or Carbon Handset Battery Backup 330 ft 100 m 1000 ft 308 m 1000 ft 303 m DKT with PDIU DI QPSU KPSU 495 ft 150 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m PDIU DI2 Battery Backup 165 ft 50 m 675 ft 200 m 1000 ft 303 m mus QPSU KPSU 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m Battery Backup 675 ft 204 m 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m and PDIU DI PDIU DI2 Battery Backup 33 ft 10 m 330 ft 100 m 1000 ft 303 QPSU KPSU 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m DDSS2060A Battery Backup 500 ft 151 m 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m QPSU KPSU 1000 ft 303 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m DDCB Battery Backup 500 ft 151 m 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m DKT with DVSU QPSU KPSU 1000 ft 303 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m and HHEU Battery Backup 165 ft 50 m 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m QPSU KPSU 675 ft 204 m 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m DKT with ADM Battery Backup 165 ft 50 m 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m NOTES 1 Battery backup applies to instances when the system is being powered by batteries exclusively 2 Digital telephones and other digital devices can operate at maximum lengths with two pair wiring or an external power source 3 See Figure 8 28 for external power wiring 4 Digital cable runs must not have the following e Cable splits single or double e Cable bridges of any length e High resistance or faulty cable splices 8
119. if the system is close to 13 02 The KCDU is shown is Figure 5 21 and its controls connectors and indicators are described in Table 5 H 5 31 INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 a CO or installed behind a PBX telephone system It does not have to be configured for anything else The decibel db PAD switches SW501 CO1 and SW601 CO2 control the loudness by providing a 3 db signal level drop to or from the PBX or CO when set to the PAD position The switch comes from the factory set at NOR for normal meaning no PAD loss 13 20 KCDU Installation Procedure 13 21 Install the KCDU in accordance with the following steps 1 Remove the PCB from its protective packag ing FIGURE 5 20 2 If the system is located within one mile of the REMOTE MAINTENANCE MODEM UNIT IMDU CO or PBX telephone system set db PAD CONNECTORS SW501 and SW601 to the position 3 Insert the KCDU into the appropriate slot 04 first 05 second in the Expansion Unit and apply firm even pressure to ensure proper mating of the connectors 25 PAIR AMPHENOL CONNECTOR FEMALE UI SW601 SW501 CO2 CO1 pg E BACKPLANE CONNECTOR FIGUR
120. installed Program 31 e Used to configure all PSTU ports connected to voice mail Section 100 816 207 for more de tails Program 10 2 Used to set standard telephone ringing option e Also used for BGM connection Program 19 Used for BGM connection also 10 STANDARD ELECTRONIC TELE PHONE INTERFACE UNIT PESU 10 00 General 10 01 The Standard Electronic Telephone Inter face Unit PESU provides two standard telephone interface circuits 1 and 2 identical to PSTU circuits for connection between standard telephones or two wire devices and the system It also provides four electronic telephone interface circuits 5 8 identical to PEKU circuits for connecting electronic telephones BGM or an external amplifier The PESU provides a ring generator for circuits 1 and 2 with a ring voltage of either 190V P P or 130V P P and it must be installed in the Expansion Unit e The PESU does not support an HDSS console connection e The PESU provides connectors to mount the EOCU for OCA to electronic telephones NOTE A KSU must be installed in the Base Unit for the system to recognize Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF tones sent from standard telephones or other two wire devices that are connected to the PESU 10 02 The PESU controls and interface connec tors are shown in Figure 5 16 and described in Table 5 D 10 10 PESU Hardware Options 10 11 The PESU supports the following hardware options e Internal op
121. installed in the optional Expansion Key Service Unit to provide interface for eight standard telephones or optional hardware peripherals voice mail devices fax machine Background Music source etc PSTU2 Standard Telephone Interface Unit STRATA DK160nly Provides the same func tion as the PSTU with the addition of a switch to select high or low ringing generator voltage QCDU CO Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit STRATA only Optional printed circuit board providing one loop start CO line circuit and two digital telephone circuits that can be installed in the KSU A maximum of two QCDUs may be installed in the Conference Unit STRATA only Standard factory installed printed circuit board provides two conference circuits that can be installed the KSU The PCB allows two simul taneous conferences four parties for the first and three parties for the second simultaneous conference QPSU STRATA only Power supply that comes factory installed in the KSU This power supply provides power to the entire system Available as a spare unit for field replacements QRCU Optional printed circuit board that can be installed in the KSU to provide a 3 circuit Dual tone Multi frequency receiver for DISA CO lines and standard telephones It also provides busy tone detection for Auto Busy Redial QSMU SMDR TTY Interface Unit STRATA DK8 only Optional printed circuit board wh
122. is established the terminal will display CONNECTED or COMMUNICATIONS see Note NOTE If the connection is not completed or commu nication is unsuccessful the remote terminal will display NO CARRIER f this is the case check thatthe equipmentis installed per Para graph 5 10 or 6 10 of this section and try again 6 30 Operation 6 31 Once communication is established between the remote terminal and the IMDU or external modem follow the steps below to enterthe security code and receive the MODE prompt NOTE Hereafter whenever the term CR is used it means the return or enter key depending on the keyboard being used SPACE means the space bar An empty square indicates one of several characters will appear in that location either on the terminal s screen or in a print out 1 Set the keyboard for Caps Lock on 2 Press the CR key e The system responds and the terminal displays DK CONNECT gt CODE 3 Enter the four digit security code and press the CR key Default code is 0000 e The system responds and the terminal displays OK MODE 7 MODE SELECTION 7 00 Selecting a Mode 7 01 To enter an operating mode for either the or the DK16 establish communication with the terminal enter the security code and press the CR key to receive the MODE prompt NOTE Refer to Paragraphs 5 20 or 6 20 to accom plish the above 1 Set the keyboard for Caps Lock on the mode name must b
123. modem QSTU PSTU KSTU or PESU ports should be set to hunt each other in Program 33 Program 31 e LED 18shouldbe turned onfor all QSTU KSTU PESU or PSTU station ports that are connected to modems This provides data security by preventing executive or privacy override of modem calls 10 63 Modem Setup Recommendations 1 Always change the escape sequence of the telephone PDIU DI from default to some other ASCII character ATS2 XX command to PDIU DI This allows placing the PDIU DI or modem into the command mode selec tivelv The ATS2 XX command should be in the modeminitialization command of the com munication software of the PC connected to the PDIU DI XX 2 new ASCII Escape charac ter This will ensure that the new Escape sequence is restored if the telephone or PDIU DI is unplugged 2 Setthe modemto recognize the DTR signal to disconnect AT amp D2 command to modem 3 When the modem tracks the DCD signal issue AT amp C1 command to modem 10 70 PDIU DS Disassembly and Assembly 10 71 Tosetthe jumper plugs P1 P9 on the PCB inside the PDIU DS for DCE or DTE operation the PDIU DS must be disassembled Disassemble the PDIU DS in accordance with the following steps 10 72 Disassembling the PDIU DS 1 Remove the four screws securing the bottom panel to the rest of the unit see Figure 7 33 These screws are not captive so place to gether where they can be easily accessed 2 Remove the bottom panel
124. on and Set the PDIU DS DIP switch SW1 1 4 for the desired application Figure 7 32 showsthe DIP switch locations and Paragraph 10 30 describes switch functions 1 38 NOTE If using Toshiba computers and printers with X On X OFF flow control set SW1 4 ON on the DIU connected to the computer and DIU connected to the printer IMPORTANT NOTE Check the printer s serial documentation for correct RS 232 pin requirements The requirements vary with each manufacturer 6 Use Program 20 to configure the PDIU DS to connect to a serial printer see Programming Section 100 816 302 for instructions and record sheets LED 01 Should always be ON for PDIU DS ports LED 02 Should be OFF for PDIU DS ports connected to printers LED 03 Should be OFF for PDIU DS ports that connect to DTE or DCE type printers LED 04 Should always be ON for PDIU DS ports LED 05 Should be OFF for PDIU DS ports connected to printers LEDs 17 20 Data security groups can be used to allow or deny digital tele phones equipped with PDIU DIs access to PDIU DS ports connected to a printer DIU stations can only make data calls to DIUs in the same data security group 7 Program 22 should be used to configure PDIU DSs to hunt if more than one PDIU DS connected to the same printer server 10 60 PDIU DS to Modem Installation 10 61 STRATA DK16 enables asynchronous type not synchronous modems to be connected to PDIU DSs Thi
125. on hold 6 is also applied through the Page Back ground Music BGM control to provide BGM to electronic digital telephone speakers and external page refer to Paragraph 2 20 2 20 Background Music BGM Options 2 21 The Background Music options allow music to play over optional external speakers external page system and or electronic and or telephone speakers The system allows BGM to be config ured any of the three ways described below 1 Configuration and DK16 one music source This configuration allows BGM and to share the same music source see Figure 7 3 With this configuration the MOH BGM music source is connected to the MOH RCA jackon the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit The music source is sent to CO lines stations on hold to electronic digital telephone speak ers with BGM turned on via Intercom 481 or Tel Set Music button and to the exter nal page system via the 600 ohm RCA jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit Configuration B two music sources This configuration allows the MOH source to be connected to the MOH jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit as in Configuration A and a separate BGM source to be connected to a designated circuit on either a QSTU circuit 2 Port 19 PEKU circuit 3 PESU circuit 8 PSTU or KSTU circuit 4 see Figure 7 4 With this configuration the MOH source is sent only to CO lines stations on hold while the BGM source is sent directly to elect
126. operating HOT AC power source and the power supply ON OFF switch set to ON prior to the final step of connecting the reserve power batteries to the power sup ply via the BATT receptacle If the batteries are connected after AC power is lost reserve power will not function 4 Connect the PBTC 3M battery cable two prong male plug to the power supply BATT receptacle To test reserve power operation disconnect the system AC power plug with the power supply power ON OFF switch in the ON posi tion The system should continue to operate without any interruption KPSU16 TWO PRONG MALE CONNECTOR PRE ASSEMBLED IN LINE FUSE HOLDER 10A FUSE PROVIDED INSTALLATION DK16 KSU amp SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 PBTC 3M BATTERV CABLE WITH RING TERMINALS AND PPSU CONNECTOR LENGTH 9 FEET POWER SUPPLV ACTUAL RING TERMINALS 3 8 IN FIGURE 5 9 RESERVE POWER BATTERY WIRING 3 POWER SUPPLY REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 3 00 The power supply KSPU 16 comes factory installed in the Base Key Service Unit Figure 5 10 if necessary it can be removed and replaced 3 10 Power Supply Removal 1 Make sure that the power supply switch is OFF and that the AC power cable is not plugged into an outlet Confirm that green AC LED is not lit Unplug reserve battery cable from BATT con nector of power supply Figure 5 10 Remove and Expansion Unit Unplug the DC cable fr
127. pause following DIU access of an outside line LEDs 17 20 Used to establish data NOTE The PDIU DI always operates as DCE de vice therefore unlike the PDIU DS it has no internal jumpers 3 Connect the appropriate RS 232 cable be tween the PDIU DI s DB 25 female connector and the PC s appropriate asynchronous serial communications port connector COM port IMPORTANT NOTE Check the PC manufacturer s serial com munication port interface documentation for correct RS 232 pin requirements re quirements vary with each manufacturer The number of EIA RS 232 signals required 8 9 or 10 wires depends on the applica tion When EIA signal requirements are not known connect the 10 EIA signals listed in Paragraph 10 20 Figures 7 25 and 7 30 provide diagrams for connecting RS 232 cables between PDIU DIs and Toshiba lap top and IBM XT and AT PCs 4 Set the PDIU DI DIP switch SW1 1 4 for the desired application Figure 7 32 showsthe DIP switch locations and Paragraph 10 30 describes switch functions 5 Access Program 20 to configure the PDIU DI for DTE type connection and Program 39 for data button assignments of the digital tele phone connected to the PDIU DI Program 20 e Theportnumber enteredforthe PDIU DI in Program 20 is the port number of the digital telephone to which the PDIU DI is connected LED 01 Should always be ON for PDIU DI ports LED 02 Should be ON for PDIU DI ports unless the PC
128. per system equipped with an Expan sion Unit DDSS consoles can operate with an attendant electronic telephone as well as with a digital one e A KCDU will not support a DDSS 5 13 DDSS Programming Overview Program 03 e Code 64 identifies the slots that support DDSS consoles Program 28 e Assigns DDSS console s to telephones Program 29 e Assigns button functions for DDSS consoles 5 20 HDSS Console Connections 5 21 The HDSS console mustbe connected to the data pairs of circuits 7 and 8 on a PEKU in the Expansion Unit via the MDF with standard two pair twisted jacketed telephone cable To accom modate the connection the instrument end of the 6 15 INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SECTION 100 816 206 MARCH 1993 HDSS console cable should be terminated in a modular station connector block RJ 1 1 Refer to Wiring Diagrams Section 100 816 208 for wiring interconnecting details The overall length of the cable run from the Expansion Unit KSU to the HDSS console must not exceed 500 feet 152 meters if using 24 AWG cable The HDSS con sole can operate with either an electronic or digital telephone preferably an LCD model CAUTION When installing the HDSS console cable do notrun parallel and within 3 feet of an AC power line AC power lines should be crossed at right 90 angles only Avoid running HDSS console wire pairs near devices that generateelectrical noise such as neon or fluorescent lig
129. piggy back PCB which provides conference circuits allowing two simultaneous conferences with four of these parties on the first conference 4 9 INSTALLATION DK8 KSU amp PCB SECTION 100 816 204 MARCH 1993 call and three parties on the second simulta neous conference 6 20 PCB Option Considerations 6 21 PCBs may be configured for a variety of hardware and software options Hardware options are defined as either internal generally related to optional PCB subassemblies or external related to connection of peripheral equipment such as background music voice mail etc Hardware and software options for each PCB are identified in the individual PCB installation procedures in this chap ter 6 22 PCB Hardware Options Each PCB must be configured for the applicable hardware options prior to installation of the PCB Configuration in structions for internal hardware options are pro vided in the individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter Configuration instructions for exter nal hardware options are provided in Peripheral Installation Section 100 816 207 6 23 PCB Software Options PCBs are config ured for software options through programming after installation of the PCBs in the KSU A pro gramming overview for each PCB is provided in the individual PCB installation procedures in this chap ter Referto the Programming Procedures Section 100 816 300 for detailed programming instruc tions 6 30 PCB Install
130. print out the existing message and allow addi tions to it such as a time ora date before it is set The message cannot be changed with this mode just added to Mode 96 To add or change a Called Station Message before setting it use this mode It does not display the existing message but allows a completely new message to be entered before it is set 11 20 Remote Calling Station Message Mode 11 21 Allows the terminal to set a Calling Station Message for a station The message will be set on REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 the station s LCD andis automatically displayed on other stations LCDs whenever they call that sta tion Mode 95 To edit and or review a Calling Station Message before setting it use this mode It will display the existing message andallow additions to it such as atime or a date before itis set The message cannot be changed with this mode just added to Mode 97 To add or change a Calling Station Message before setting it use this mode It does not display the existing message but allows a completely new message to be entered before it is set 11 22 Use the procedures in the tables to set messages via Modes 94 96 and 95 97 12 SPEED DIAL MODE 12 00 General 12 01 The Speed Dial Mode see Table RM BW can be used to add or change speed dial numbers to any of the System Speed Dial memory locations 60 99 and Station Speed Dial
131. proper mating of connectors Make sure the edge ofthe QSMU opposite connector J2 snaps firmly into the standoffs on the KSU motherboard FIGURE 4 13 QSMU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS 4 Remove the knock out from the KSU cover SMDR TTY access slot and store the knock out in the slots provided in the KSU base Figure 4 9 11 40 QSMU Wiring 11 41 Refer to Peripheral Equipment Installation Section 100 816 207 SMDR and Remote Main tenance Section 100 816 600 TTV for QSMU wiring interconnecting details 11 50 QSMU Programming Overview 11 51 The following parameters may be specified through programming for the QSMU Program 60 e Assigns SMDR options Program 10 3 e LEDO4 SMDR TTY Select option 11 60 Device Communication Parameters 11 61 Set the communication parameters for the device connected tot he QSMU SMDR TTY jack as follows e TTY 7 Bits 1 Stop Bit Even Parity e SMDR 8 Bits 1 Stop Bit Odd Parity e TTY SMDR 1200 bps 12 BUILT IN CO LINE DIGITAL TELE PHONE AND OTHER CIRCUITS 12 00 General 12 01 As mentioned in Paragraph 6 the KSU comes standard with two CO lines and four digital telephone circuits already installed 12 10 Built in CO Line Circuits 12 11 The two standard loop start CO line circuits INSTALLATION DK8 KSU amp PCB SECTION 100 816 204 MARCH 1993 are integrated into the KSU motherboard and are identical to the QCDU CO line circuits For wiring and progr
132. screws 6 30 Door Phone MDFB Wall Mounting 6 31 Mount door phones MDFBs to a wall or vertical surface in accordance with the following steps 1 Remove the screw from the bottom of the cover Detach the cover from the base and metal frame Figure 6 17 2 Position the metal frame and base to the mounting surface and secure with two one inch panhead wood screws Figure 6 17 3 Attach coverto the metal frame and base and secure with the screw which was removed in Step 1 6 32 Door Phone Volume Control Adjustthe ring and voice volume to the MDFB in accordance with the following procedure 1 Remove the screw from the bottom of the MDFB cover Detach the cover from the base and metal frame Figure 6 17 3 25 INCHES TWO WALL MOUNTING HOLES DOOR PHONE FIGURE 6 17 DOOR PHONE MDFB INSTALLATION 2 The volume level is changed bv a screw adjustment on the back of the MDFB Turn the screw with a flat tipped screwdriver while ringing the MDFB or while on a call with it The volume level will change as the screw is turned 6 40 Door Phone Lock Programming Consid erations 6 41 The following programs should be consid ered when programming the system for door phones Program 39 e Assigns door phone and door lock buttons to digital telephones Program 77 1 e Assigns DDCBs to ports door phone ringing over External Page during the NIGHT mode and door lock activation time Program 77 2
133. telephone see Para graph 3 32 3 80 External Power Straps 3 81 Digital telephones equipped with options such as Integrated Data Interface Units and ADMs require two pair wiring or external power to oper ate efficiently at the maximum allowed distance from the key service unit KSU Two pair wiring or external power is also necessary for maximum cable run lengths for digital telephones that are connected to systems that must operate with re serve power See Table 8 D in Section 100 816 208 for reference Each Digital telephone has two external power straps which must be cut for external power when the cabling of the telephone is connected to an external AC DC power supply Cut these straps in accordance with the following procedure 1 Loosen the four captive screws securing the telephone base Figure 6 1 and remove the base 2 Depending on the telephone refer to Figure 6 7 6 8 or 6 9 and locate the EX POW straps W101 and W102 Cut these straps 3 Reinstall the telephone base and secure it with its four captive screws NOTE Refer to Section 100 816 208 for external AC DC power supplv ordering information and installation instructions 3 90 DKT2000 Add On Module Installation 3 91 See Paragraph 7 in this chapter 4 ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE UPGRADE OPTIONS DK16 Oniv 4 00 This section describes how to upgrade and configure electronic telephones for features and options 4 10 Off hook Call Announce Upg
134. telephone ports The reading will be a plusor minus dependingon meterlead place ment 3 An improper reading indicates an open crossed or shorted wire For the MDF to telephone digital or elec tronic cable a more precise check is made using an ohmmeter 8 10 Ohmmeter Test 8 11 The continuitv of the cable run between the KSU and digital or electronic telephone is checked with an ohmmeter as follows 1 Disconnect the electronic or digital tele phone 2 At the MDF remove the bridging clips 3 At the MDF place shorting jumper wires between the T and R of pair 1 green red the T and R of pair 22 black yellow and the T and R of OCA pair 3 blue white for PEKU PESU only For MDF pin numbers see Section 100 816 208 4 At the modular block measure the resis tance between all wire combinations The proper readings are shown in Table C for electronictelephones and HDSSs and Table E for digital telephones DDSSs and DDCBs 8 20 Cable Installation 8 21 If cable voltmeter and ohmmeter tests are within limits digital telephones may not operate because of the following 1 Digital telephone cable runs must be free of cable splits single or double Test for and FAULT FINDING SECTION 100 816 500 MARCH 1993 eliminate all cable splits 2 Cable bridge taps Digital telephones will not operate if cable runs contain any type short or long of cable bridge Test for and eliminate all cable bridges
135. terminal DB25 connector 2 For the DK8 QSMU set Program 10 3 LED 04 ON for TTY operation 3 For the DK16 set the PIOU or PIOUS SW2 switch to match the modem or terminal baud rate as follows e Push in for 300 bps baud rate indicator CDA is lit let out by pushing again for 1200 bps 4 is not lit NOTE The DK8 QSMU baud rate is always 1200 bps 4 ForDK16 setthe PIOU or PIOUS SW3 switch to the TTY position NOTE The PIOU or PIOUS SWS switch is set to MODEM position for IMDU operation only 5 For DK16 set the P13 jumper plug on the PIOU to the BELL configuration or cutthe W4 jumper on the PIOUS also for BELL configu ration NOTE The P13 PIOU and W4 PIOUS CCITT configurations are not normally used in the USA 6 For DK8 and DK16 set terminal communica tion parameters to seven bits even parity one stop bit 300 or 1200 bps See step 3 above NOTE If a digital or electronic telephone is in the program mode programming from the main tenance terminal is not allowed 4 30 Remote Maintenance Option Installation 4 31 DK16 IMDU Maintenance Modem Figure 4 The IMDU mounts on the PIOU or PIOUS PCB and provides 300 or 1200 bps full duplex commu nication for remote maintenance seven bits even parity one stop bit If the IMDU is employed a dedicated CO line or standard telephone port is not required Connection of the remote maintenance terminal is through existing system CO lines
136. the dedi cated telephone will become inoperative again 4 10 DK8 Power Failure Emergency Transfer Installation Install the dedicated emergency stan dard telephone as follows see Figure 4 6 1 Connect a standard telephone to the PF1 connector in the Base Unit 4 20 DK8 Power Failure Emergency Transfer Test 1 Turn the system power switch off 2 Liftthe emergency standard telephone hand set and verify that there is CO dial tone INSTALLATION DK8 KSU PCB SEGTION 100 816 204 1993 3 TIE WRAP TIE WRAP HOLDER RESERVE BATTERY j pb HOLDER HPFB CONNECTOR FG SCREW AC POWER DC ON OFF CORD AND POWER SWITCH PLUG 4 7 6 WIRE SMDR TTY MODULAR JACK STATION TIP RING AMPHENOL 25 PAIR JACK FEMALE TIE WRAP SUPPLIED WITH DK8 TO HOLD I 1 AMPHENOL RJ11 POWER FAILURE CONNECTOR TRANSFER JACK TIE WRAP HOLDER LEFT SIDE VIEW RIGHT SIDE VIEW FIGURE 4 4 DK8 CABLING DIAGRAN 4 6 RAM STORAGE BATTERV 5 8 POWER SUPPLV POWER SUPPLV MOUNTING SCREW F G SCREW FOR THIRD WIRE GROUND CONNEGTION TO POWER SUPPLV HPFB6 FG SCREW HPFB POWER CORD CONNECTOR POWER SUPPLY MOUNTING SCREW J17 J18 CONNECTOR FOR QCNU INSTALLATION J15 J16 CONNECTOR FOR QSTU INSTALLATION J11 J14 CONNECTOR FOR QSTU INSTALLATION 25 PAIR FEMALE AMPHENOL CONNECTOR TO STATION TIP RING AND RELAY CONTACT J13 SI J
137. the failure to obtain such a license 2 12 Music on Hold Installation Install the Mu sic on Hold option in accordance with the following steps refer to Figure 7 1 1 Connect the external music source to the MOH RCA jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit Rotate the MOH volume control VR1 on the Base Unit to adjust Music on Hold volume clockwise increases volume counterclock wise decreases volume Listen to the CO line on hold when setting MOH to the proper vol ume 3A If MOH relay control is required in DK8 the MOH relay is selected in Program 77 1 Fol low program instructions to make selection This will short pins 42 and 17 of the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit amphenol connector when MOH is activated by a CO line on hold 3B If MOH relay control is required in DK16 the Base Unit or the PIOU PIOUS relay may be selected in Program 77 1 Follow Program instruction to make the selection 4A SetPIOU jumper plugP11to MAKE or BREAK position as required e MAKE M Shorts the normally open contacts pins 9 and 34 when MOH is activated BREAK B Opensthe normally closed contacts pins 9 and 34 when MOH is activated INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 DK8 KSU OR DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT TWISTED PAIR VR1 24 MOH BGM VOLUME CONTROL BACKPLANE MOHTO MUSIC MUSIC Music MA ON HOLD LINES STATIONS ON HOLD ON OFF PAGE OR CONTROL BACKGROUND BGM T
138. total number of digital ports KCDU does not support DDSS 3 Refer to Worksheet 3 to determine option and peripheral requirements 4 Refer to Worksheet 4 to determine the amount of power used by the system 3 16 INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 MARCH 1993 DK16 WORKSHEET 3 PERIPHERALS AND UPGRADES 1 BASE UNIT PERIPHERALS Battery Backup Interface Yes or No Two 12 volt customer supplied batteries can be connected to this interface to provide backup battery backup if there is a power failure See PBTC 3M KARCU Yes or No The K4RCU is required to interpret Dual tone Multi frequency DTMF tones from standard telephones Voice Mail Auto Attendant and DISA CO circuits Music on hold Background Music Source Interface Yes or No A music source can be connected to this interface Standard on DK16 to provide Music on hold to CO lines and stations on hold and to provide Background Music to station speakers and external page speakers Alternate Background Music Source Yes or No see Worksheet 1 Power Failure Transfer Interface Yes or No A standard telephone can be connected to this interface to provide connection to a CO line if there is a power failure PFT interface is standard on DK16 one customer supplied standard telephone is required PBTC 3M Yes or No One PBTC 3M cable is required for each system that requires battery backup See Battery Backup Interface 600 ohm page interface Standard on DK1
139. upgraded with the HVSU2 subassembly or the combined HVSU HVSI subassemblies to re ceive Off hook Call Announce NOTE A PEKU or PESU PCB that supports elec tronic telephones that must receive Off hook Call Announce must be equipped with an EOCU Loud Ringing Bell Headset Upgrade HHEU An electronic telephone can be upgraded with an HHEU to provide a dual interface forthe Loud Ringing Bell feature and a headset simulta neously 5 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES 5 00 The following provides an examples of how to configure a STRATA 5 10 Strata DK8 Example 1 Smalll Retail Store 5 11 Customer Requirements A store needs two CO lines and four digital telephones 5 12 Analysis The store s system hardware re quirements are as follows e Two CO line circuits for the CO lines Four digital telephone circuits for the digital telephones 5 13 Conclusion A standard Key Service Unit would be adequate in this case The unit s stan dard four digital telephone circuits and two CO line circuits could easily accommodate the store s needs and allow for future expansion 5 20 Strata DK8 Example 2 Home Office 5 21 Customer Requirements In addition to three CO lines a home office needs five digital tele phones three of which will have PDIU Dls a modem a door phone one facsimilie machine Music on hold and Telephone Set Background Music 5 22 Analysis The customer s requirements could be broken down as follow
140. user will never use DIU AT commands other than ATDD ATDT and ATD and neverrequire the PDIU DI to send result codes to display on the PC display screen Frequently it is difficult 1 31 security groups PDIU stations are only allowed to make calls to PDIUs in the same data group to which they are as signed Program 39 e The following data call buttons can be assigneddigitaltelephones equipped with PDIU DIs Data Call and Modem Assign SD buttons to data devices as required Do not assign DSS buttons to data devices DSS buttons are used for voice calls only 10 50 PDIU DS to Printer Installation 10 51 STRATA and DK16 enables serial print ers laser dot matrix or other types to be con nected to stand alone data interface units PDIU DSs Digital telephones equipped with PDIU DIs can share access to these printers Serial printers operate as DCE or DTE devices depending on the vendor the PDIU DS can be connected to either type since it can be configured as a DTE or DCE device The PDIU DS comes from the factory configured as a DCE device Follow the steps below to install the PDIU DS to a serial printer NOTES 1 Only serial printers not parallel that con form to EIA RS 232 signaling require ments can be connected to PDIU DSs 2 In rare applications it may be desired to connect printers to PDIU DIs Refer to the printer s installation instructions INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 2
141. via intercom number 619 Refer to the PIOU or PIOUS portion of Section 200 816 205 for hardware instal lation and programming requirements 4 32 DK8 and DK16 External Maintenance Mo dem Installation Refer to Figure 2 or 3 as appli cable and install the external modem in accor dance with the following steps NOTE The Toshiba PPTC RS 232 modular to DB25 adaptor is factory configured for ASCII termi nal connection Pins 2 and 3 and Pins 8 and 20 of the adaptor must be reversed for external modem connection see Table RM A 1 Connectthe modularcordfromthe DK8 QSMU or DK16 PIOU or PIOUS TTY porttothe PPTC adaptor and then to the external maintenance modem RS 232 25 pin connector 2 Connect the external maintenance modem line side to a dedicated CO line tip and ring or to a dedicated standard telephone port tip and ring QSTU with DK8 KSTU PSTU or PESU with DK16 Refer to Wiring Diagrams Section 200 816 208 for wiring interconnect ing details 3 ForDK16 setthe PIOU or PIOUS SW2 switch to match the modem or terminal baud rate e Push in for 300 bps baud rate indicator REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES CDA is lit let out by pushing again for 1200 bps 4 is not lit NOTE The DK8 QSMU baud rate is always 1200 bps 4 For DK16 setthe PIOU or PIOUS SW3 switch to the TTY position NOTE The PIOU or PIOUS SWS switch is set to the MODEM position for IMDU operation only 5 For
142. wants to connect a printer to a PDIU DS 5 42 Analysis The bank s system hardware re quirements are as follows Two CO line circuits for the two CO lines Seven digital telephone circuits Six for tele phones and one for the PDIU DS The PDIU DIs do not require a dedicated circuit 5 43 Conclusion A standard Base Key Service Unit would be adequate in this case The unit s standard eight digital telephone circuits and four CO line circuits could easily accommodate the bank s needs 3 10 5 50 Strata DK16 Example 2 Office Ware house 5 51 Customer Requirements In addition to five CO lines a small office warehouse facility needs 11 digital telephones three of which will have PDIU DIs two PDIU DSs a modem a facsimile machine conference capability a door phone one standard telephone Music on hold and an amplifier speaker for paging 5 52 Analysis The customer s requirements could be broken down as follows e 14 digital telephone circuits one for each of the 11 digital telephones the PDIU DIs do not require dedicated circuits one for each of the two PDIU DSs one for a digital door phone lock control unit to support a door phone 3 standard telephone circuits one for the modem one for the facsimile machine one for the standard telephone A music source for Music on hold and an ampli fier speaker for paging could both be connected to the Key Service Unit RCA jacks A K4RCU would be needed for
143. 0 and plug battery cable into BATT con nector ofthe KPSU 16 power supply Figure 5 3 and 5 4 Setthe KCOU PAD switches SW400 SW475 to the appropriate position Figure 5 3 The factory setting is NORMAL If CO lines are connected to a PBX or are in close proximity to the central office the PAD position may be required If the Expansion Key Service Unit is going to be installed refer now to Paragraph 2 30 If not proceed to Step 12 Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and then turn ON the power supply switch Reinstall the front and side covers onto the Base Key Service Unit 2 30 Mounting the Expansion Key Service Unit 1 Make sure the side cover is removed from the Base Key Service Unit Turn Base Key Ser vice Unit DC power switch off Set the Expansion Key Service Unit on the Base Key Service Unit s hinge mounts mak ing sure that the Expansion Unit sets properly in place Figure 5 5 Remove safety lock from plastic bag which comes with the Expansion Unit Install safety lock to the Base Unit as shown in Figure 5 5 Pull out on the safety lock until it can no longer be moved securing the Expansion Key Ser vice Unit to the Base Key Service Unit Figure 5 5 Donotdetachthe lock from the Base Key Service Unit Connect the Expansion Key Service Unit Rib bon Cable to the connector on the Base Key Service Unit Figure 5 5 Close ribbon cable connector lock on Base Unit Connect Expansion Unit green y
144. 07 MARGH 1993 1 2 Consult the serial printers documentation and determine if the printer operates DCE or DTE device e f the printer is device Disas semble the PDIU DS and configure it to operate like device placing the jumper plugs P1 P9 in the B C MODEM position Reassemble the PDIU DS and mark B C on the bottom identification label for future reference Paragraph 10 70 provides PDIU DS dis assembly assembly instructions and Fig ure 7 31 provides jumper plug informa tion e f the printer is DTE device It may not be necessary to disassemble the PDIU DS since it comes direct from the factory configured as a DCE device However if uncertain disassemble the PDIU DS and verify that jumper plugs P1 P9 are in the A B DTE position Reassemble the PDIU DS and mark A B on the bottom identification label for future ref erence Paragraph 10 70 provides PDIU DS disassembly assembly instruc tions and Figure 7 31 provides jumper plug information Connect the PDIU DS to the appropriate digi tal telephone circuit per wiring diagrams in Section100 816 208 and information provided in Section 100 816 206 Connect the appropriate RS 232 cable be tween the printer and the PDIU DS see Fig ure 7 27 and 7 29 for an example printer cable connection If steps 2 and 3 are done properly the Power and Ready LEDs on the PDIU DS should light when the printer is turned
145. 13 CONNECTORS FOR QSTU INSTALLATION J8 EXTERNAL PAGE RCA JACK INSTALLATION DK8 KSU amp PCB SECTION 100 816 204 MARCH 1993 RAM STORAGE BATTERY JUMPER PLUG J20 CONNECTOR FOR QSMU PCB INSTALLATION POWER SUPPLY MOUNTING SCREW CN4 BATTERY CONNECTOR PLUG BATTERY CONNECTOR FOR HPFB DC POWER ON OFF SWITCH AC AND DC POWER INDICATOR LEDs F201 3 AMP FUSE NON REPLACABLE YELLOW WIRES 24V CN3 J19 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTORS SYSTEM FRAME AND CABLE GROUND BAR L J3 CO LINE 2 MODULAR JACK RJ11 DK8 MAIN PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD J2 CO LINE 1 MODULAR JACK RJ11 SW101 1 SW201 CO2 3 db PAD SWITCHES FOR CO LINE 1 AND 2 HON J1 POWER FAILURE TELEPHONE MODULAR JACK RJ11 J9 J10 CONNECTORS FOR QCDU S INSTALLATION 1 PER QCDU HON MODULAR JACK COVER HOLDERS FOR STORAGE OF MODULAR JACK VR701 MOH VOLUME COVERS CONTROL SCREW J7 MUSIC ON HOLD RCA JACK ADJUSTER FIGURE 4 5 BASE UNIT JACKS AND CONNECTORS 4 7 INSTALLATION DK8 KSU PCB SEGTION 100 816 204 MARGH 1993 OR DK16 KSU MAIN POWER AVAILABLE oh KCOU CO LINE 1 POWER FAIL CONNECTION PFT STANDARD TELEPHONE MOD JACK 1 BASE UNIT FIGURE 4 6 DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT POWER FAILURE TRANSFER PFT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 4 8 PART PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD INSTALLATION 5 GENERAL 5 01 This chapter provides procedures for installa ti
146. 16 Page with Separate Ex ternal BGM same amplifier In this configura tion the MOH source or alternate BGM source provides BGM to digital electronic telephones and a separate BGM source provides music to external speakers Also in this configuration Pag ing and external BGM are amplified by a common customer supplied paging amplifier When the ex ternal page access code is dialed the external page control relay is activated which applies a short to the amplifier mute control to mute the external BGM music Install this option in accor dance with the following steps refer to Figure 7 15 1 Connectthe input no 1 from the paging ampli fier via an RJ11 jack to the 600 ohm RCA jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit 1 19 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SECTION 100 816 207 MARCH 1993 ONE WALL MOUNTING FIGURE 7 14 HESB WALL MOUNTING 2 Connect the paging amplifier mute terminal via a MDF to pins 42 and 17 of the 25 pair amphenol connector from the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit 3 Connect the music source to the input no 2 of the paging amplifier 4 Connect the speaker to the paging amplifier output 5 13 DK16 Zone Page with BGM separate am plifiers This configuration provides multiple zone paging capability The output of the paging ampli fier is routed back to the PIOU where it is switched to one of four sets of speakers by PIOU relays K1 through K4 The relay selected is determined by the access code dialed
147. 17 TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES INSTALLATION INTRODUCTION DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS SECTION 100 816 205 MARCH 1993 Strata INSTALLATION CHAPTER FIVE DK16 KSU AND PCB INSTALLATION PARAGRAPH 2 00 2 10 2 20 2 30 2 40 3 10 3 20 5 10 5 20 5 30 5 40 6 00 6 10 6 20 6 30 6 40 7 00 7 10 7 20 7 30 7 40 8 00 8 10 8 20 8 30 8 40 9 00 9 10 9 20 9 30 9 40 INSTALLATION DK16 KSU amp PCB SECTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 TABLE OF 5 SUBJECT PAGE PARTI 16 KSU INSTALLATION 5 1 GENERAL 5 1 DK KEY SERVICE UNIT MOUNTING Seen e PAR DEIN SER Du 5 1 Mounting Surface Consitler alil iS zoo peras bentes net 5 1 Mounting Preparation suce ais tactis ina rr SE 5 1 Mounting the Base Key Service Unit ss 5 1 Mounting the Expansion Key Service Unit aa 5 4 Reserve Power Failure oie 5 10 POWER SUPPLY REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 5 11 Power Supply Rem Val u ua tup QR A Ben an PA 5 11 Power Supply Replacement r 5 12 PARTII DK16 PR
148. 1993 TABLE 3 H STRATA DK16 STATION APPARATUS OVERVIEW Type and Number of Base Unit Base and Expansion Circuits Required PCB or Interface Capacity Unit Combined Capacity Digital Telephone Digital one for each Base Unit Circuits 1 8 16 DKT with or without DKT PDKU2 Circuits 1 8 ADM or PDIU DI KCDU Circuits 1 4 Stand alone Data Digital one for each Base Unit Circuits 1 8 Interface Unit PDIU DS PDKU2 Circuits 1 8 PDIU DS KCDU Circuits 1 4 Digital Direct Station Digital one for each Base Unit Circuit 8 2 Selection Console DDSS PDKU Circuit 8 DDSS Digital Door Digital one for each Base Unit Circuit 5 2 Phone Lock Control DDCB PDKU Circuit 1 Unit DDCB or first KCDU Circuit 1 8 Electronic Telephone Electronic one for Circuits 1 8 EKT each EKT PESU Circuit 5 8 Electronic Direct Electronic two for the PEKU Circuits 7 and 8 Station Selection Console HDSS Conference Amplifier Electronic two for the PEKU Circuits 6 and 7 amplifier PESU Circuits 6 and 7 Single wire pair Standard one for KSTU Circuits 1 4 Devices each device voice PSTU Circuits 1 8 Standard Telephone mail devices may PESU Circuits 1 2 Voice Mail Device require more than one Facsimile Machine circuit Modem Dictation Equipment Alternate Standard or KSTU Circuit 4 Background Music Electronic one for the PEKU Circuit 3 Source source PESU Circuit 8 PSTU
149. 2 Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line circuit 1 when set in PAD position Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line circuit 2 when set in PAD position connected to a standard telephone circuit and it is required for Direct Inward System Access DISA calls The KARCU can only be installed in the Base Unit The KARCU circuits are also used to detect busy tone for the Automatic Busy Redial ABR feature and must be installed to allow ABR to operate 14 10 KARCU Configuration 14 11 The KARCU does not have to be configured for operation 14 20 KARCU Installation Procedure 14 21 Install the KARCU in accordance with the following steps Figure 5 22 1 Remove the PCB from its protective packag ing 2 Make sure that the power supply switch is OFF 3 Making sure that the component side of the KARCU is facing up toward the power supply plug the KARCU P602A and P602B female connectors into the P2A and P2B KARCU connectors on the motherboard INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 14 30 KARCU Wiring 14 31 The K4RCU does not require any wiring 14 40 KARCU Programming Overview 14 41 The following parameters may be specified Program 03 e Enter code 92 for Slot 00 if KARCU is installed Program 12 e Set KARCU release time Program 15 e Sets KARCU operation after CO line flash 15 BUILT IN CO LINE AND DIGITAL TELEPHONE CIRCUITS 15 00 General 15 01 As mentioned in Par
150. 20 3 30 3 40 3 50 4 4 10 INSTALLATION INTRODUCTION SECTION 100 816 201 MARCH 1993 TABLE OF CONTENTS SUBJECT PAGE PURPOSE uuu uu ua n ILU 1 1 ORGANIZATION iu tret re gale tede Qe eee tee tete reete dete 1 1 REFERENCE 56 8 nnns nnns Na 1 1 General DOSEHISUDI aciei e u pu nda ud ets 1 1 TT 1 1 User eu ter te ere 1 1 Fault Finding Procedures ru des a je i 1 1 Remote Maintenance and Administration 1 1 SYSTEM MNEMONIGS TERMIS 1 1 Use of Notes Important Notes Cautions and Warnings 1 5 1 1 1 PURPOSE 1 00 The purpose of this section is to provide detailed step bv step instructions for installing the STRATA and STRATA DK16 systems 1 01 This chapter provides an overview of the entire installation section and includes a list of reference documentation that supports the in stalled system a list of system mnemonics is also provided 2 ORGANIZATION 2 00 This manual is organized in modular chap ters for easy removal and replacement of updated materials The chapters are as follows Chapter Introduction Chapter Two Site Requirements Chapter Three System Configu
151. 20 6 30 7 00 7 10 7 20 7 30 7 40 8 00 8 10 8 20 8 30 8 40 9 00 9 10 9 20 9 30 9 40 10 00 10 10 10 20 10 30 INSTALLATION DK8 KSU 8 PCB SEGTION 100 816 204 1993 TABLE OF 5 SUBJECT PAGE PARTI KSU INSTALLATION u rit 4 1 GENERAL We P a E 4 1 KEY SERVICE UNIT MOUNTING socie u u u uuu o E 4 1 Mounting Surface Considerations l bt 4 1 Mounting Preparation ai B ad 4 1 Mounting the Key Service Unit 4 4 Installing the Reserve Power Battery and Charger 4 4 POWER SUPPLY TEST REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENTT 4 5 Power Supply Removal 4 5 Power Supply 4 5 POWER FAILURE EMERGENCY TRANSFER OPTION 4 5 Power Failure Emergency Transfer Installation 4 5 Power Failure Emergency Transfer 4 5 PART II DK8 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD INSTALLATION 4 9 GENERAL 4 9 PCB INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS tnr 4 9 KSU Option PGBS 4 9 PCB Option CONSId rall liSu
152. 30 all stations 31 34 per system Program 311 Enter p Y Y Y p page command lower case and m94 XXX p YYY Y Y Y originating station number Enter p p page command lower case and m94 XXX p YYY p 2 digit message memory location 10 19 personal messages and 60 99 system messages After p is entered the previously stored message M is displayed If there is no stored message nothing is displayed To Change the Message m94 XXX p YYY p Set the terminal keyboard to upper case and change message as required alphanumeric 32 characters max for total message To Set Message m94 XXX p YYY p Set the terminal keyboard to lower case and enter p m O m 0 Destination station Msg LED flashes CALL YYYM is L zero displayed Origination station SENT is displayed To Exit the Message Mode At any time enter m O q lower case NOTES 1 Press m at any time to start over 2 M represents the message entered REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM BR MODE 96 REMOTE CALLED STATION MESSAGING ADD CHANGE ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Message Mode gt MODE MESG At the gt MODE prompt enter M S G CR To Change or Add a New Called Station Message m 96 Set the terminal kevboard to the lower case cap lock off
153. 4 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 G O STANDARD TELEPHONE OR OTHER DEVICE DK8 KSU DSS DIGITAL OR DK16 KSU ELECTRONIC CONSOLE BASE UNIT DK16 only TELEPHONE QCDU PDKU PEKU PESU KCDU DI ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE MDFB Secondary protectors DK8 KSU DK16 KSU BASE UNIT KCDU CO LINE PCOU QCDU FIGURE 8 1 SECONDARY PROTECTOR DIAGRAM IMPORTANT To protect against transient voltages and currents secondary protectors must be installed if there is outside wiring Figure 8 1 These protectors which contain fast semiconductors in addition to fuses shallcomply with the requirements for secondary protectors forcommunication circuits UL 497A As of October 1 1990 the following manufacturers offer secondary protectors that are UL listed 8 5 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 1 Certron Corp Anaheim California 92807 e Secondarv protector Model 08450 2 Curtis Mfg Co Inc Jaffrev New Hampshire 03452 e Secondarv protector Model Diamond Chip For indoor use on the protected side of the telephone circuit oniv 3 Oneac Corp Libertvville 60048 e Secondarv protector Model OnLine 6144 and OnLine DG S For indoor use on the protected side of primarv telephone protector oniv 4 Siemon Watertown Connecticut 06795 e Secondarv protector for com
154. 5 Press CR P55 Enter Modified Digits Table Number Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the modified digits table number 1 6 Example Enter modified digits table number 1 enter 1 Enter Code 0 P55 10 05 10 The system will display any previously entered number of digits to be deleted 01 10 Refer to the System Record Sheet and change number if required Example Change to 10 enter 1 O To Exit Program Store Data P55 10 05 10 A To store data press CR P55 fit B Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered P for this program C To exit this program press CR 57 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM BI PROGRAM 55 1 LCR MODIFIED DIGITS ADD ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt prompt enter G CR Enter Program Number 55 55 Press CR 55 Enter Modified Digits Table Number 55 1 Refer to System Record Sheet and enter the required modified digits table number 1 6 Example Enter table number 1 enter 1 Enter Code 1 P55 110110 up to 22 digits The system will display any previously entered digits up to 22 1234 P3 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter new numbers if required Example Enter 12 3 4 P 3 NOTE Pause codes may also be entered To enter pauses press P plus the pause number 1 8 Special Code Input P
155. 500 MARCH 1993 Strata uissgomg FAULT FINDING PROCEDURES STRATA DK FINDING SEGTION 100 816 500 MARGH 1993 TABLE OF 5 PARAGRAPH SUBJECT PAGE 1 GENERALE Un EMIL a uS 1 2 FAULT nennen nnne nennen nennen 1 3 FAULT CLEARING PROCEDURES a nn na 1 4 DEFECTIVE APPARATUS RETURNS 2 5 FAULT IDENTIFICATION AND ELIMINATION PROCEDURES 2 6 DK8 HARDWARE FAULT ISOLATION a 2 7 DK16 HARDWARE FAULT 5 4000 0 00 4 8 STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK 4 8 01 Voltmeter TeSt ero 4 8 10 O mmeter Test ua au i reete eter tee Ec a g 5 8 20 Gable Installation a 5 9 FAULT ISOLATION FLOWCHARTS 5 FEOWGERAR TIS eut I DE 7 CHART NO 1 FAULT CLASSIFICATION 7 CHART NO 2 CATASTROPHIC FAULTS 8 CHART NO 3 STATION DIAL TONE FAULTS 9
156. 6 Yes or No This interface connects with customer supplied speakers and amplifiers or Toshiba HESB for paging and Background Music applications Night Bell Yes or No A customer supplied night ringing bell can be installed and controlled by the Base Unit relay control Standard on DK16 2 EXPANSION UNIT PERIPHERAL PCB PIOU or PIOUS If yes which one See Table 3 D PPTC One or Two Modular adaptor required for PIOU PIOUS interface to SMDR device or local maintenance terminal 3 TELEPHONE UPGRADES All upgrades share the telephone port and do not require separate ports Add on Module Total 2000 series digital telephones can be equipped with an Add on Module to provide 20 Direct Station Selection buttons If PDIU DI2 is installed Add on Module cannot be installed DVSU Total One DVSU is required for each digital telephone that must receive Off hook Call Announce HESC 65A Total One HESC 65A modular connecting cable is required to connect the HESB to the HHEU in each telephone requiring the Loud Ringing Bell feature See HHEU and HESB 3 17 INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 MARCH 1993 DK16 WORKSHEET 3 PERIPHERALS AND UPGRADES continued HHEU Total One HHEU must be installed in each digital and electronic telephone that supports a headset or connects to an HESB for the Loud Ringing Bell feature See HESC 65A HVSU2 or Combined HVSU HVSI Total Electronic telephones must be equi
157. 60 SMDR Threshold Time P60 21 Enter Item code 2 The system will display either O or 1 O indicates that the threshold time is set at 0 1 seconds 1 indicates 10 seconds The default is 1 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the correct digit if it is not already being displayed and then CR If you wish to change another parameter within this program enter its associated item code To exit this program go to step 4 Allow SMDR printout Enter Action code 3 System will print out 1 if incoming and outgoing calls will be printed on SMDR A O will be printed out if only outgoing calls will be printed Refer to the System Record Sheet and change to 1 or O if required and press CR If you wish to change another parameter within this program enter its associated item code To exit this program go to step 4 Set Account Code Digit Length Enter Item code 4 The system will display the number of digits allowed in the account code The default is 06 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required number of digits 04 15 and press CR If you wish to change another parameter within this program enter its associated item code To exit this program go to step 4 SMDR Toll Calls Only Enter Action code 5 The system will display the presently selected feature 0 5 The default is O Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required feature code and press CR I
158. 8 KSU amp PCB SECTION 100 816 204 MARCH 1993 TIE WRAP RESERVE BATTERY HPFB CONNECTOR DC ON OFF POWER SWITCH 6 WIRE SMDR TTY MODULAR JACK RJ11 POWER FAILURE TRANSFER JACK RIGHT SIDE VIEW INSTALLATION DK8 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 204 1993 2 20 Mounting Service Unit 1 Make sure the power supply switch is turned OFF 2 Place the Key Service Unit on the desired location on the mounting surface and mark the location of the four screw holes there is one on each corner See Figures 4 1 and 4 2 NOTE Make sure the location of the Key Service Unit meets the minimum clearance require ments specified in Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 3 Drill holes on these marks 4 Securescrews approximately two thirds of the way into the top two holes on the mounting surface Hang the unit from the top two screws and then secure the screws completely into the mounting surface Finish securing the unit to the mounting sur face by completely screwing the bottom two screws into the wall 7 Ground system according to Chapter 2 Para graph 4 8 Connect applicable wiring modular CO line cords 25 pair amphenol connector cable etc to the Key Service Unit Route the wiring as shown in Figure 4 4 and then fasten wiring to the unit with the tie wraps that come with the Key Service Unit See Section 100 816 208 for additional wiring information NOTE Figure 4 4 shows cables routed t
159. 9 MK BR BK 14 NOT USED 2 NOT USED R3 ckt 3 CAN SUPPORT BGM NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED cono CI LID NOT USED STANDARD TELEPHONE VOICE MAIL PORT OR SIMILAR DEVICE NOT USED NOTES MBKS 40 8 ckt8 CAN 1 All cable 24 AWG max loop resistance 15 R8 SUPPORT BGM 300 ohms from PSTU to standard telephone VM port ERE Standard telephones be on Ex off premises Off premises connection Y GN 43 is made via OL13A FIC and RJ21X jack Connect up two telephone ringers 44 to each Tip and Ring pair 19 WI ring voltage option MES 15 L 130V S Y 20 USED 190V KV BL_ 46 Two ringers maximum per port H or L 21 position M V O 47 POV K 48 POWER FAILURE K GN v 23 TRANSFER BOX 49 J1 BR V 24 24 VOLTS vs 50 J1 25 N S V 25 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK c 2 2 gt lt ed x m a m lt lt LO
160. 93 TABLE RM BM SPEED DIALING DATA DUMP ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Data Dump Mode gt MODE DUMP At the gt MODE prompt enter D U M P CR D To Output Speed Dialing Data Enter R E P CR CR ALLorSYS Port number for individual station speed dial To Stop Printout at Any Time Enter DELETE CR atthe same time To Exit the Dump Mode Enter Q U IT CR TABLE RM BN LCD MESSAGING DATA DUNP ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Data Dump Mode gt MODE DUMP At the MODE prompt enter D U M P CR To Output Message Data D MSG Enter M S G CR MSG ALLorSYS Port number of individual station To Stop Printout at Any Time Enter DELETE CR at the same time To Exit the Dump Mode Enter Q U I T CR REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM BO MODE 95 REMOTE CALLING STATION MESSAGING ADD REVIEW CHANGE ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Message Mode gt MODE MESG At the gt MODE prompt enter M S G CR To Add Or Review a Calling Station Message m 95 Set the terminal kevboard to the lower case cap lock off and enter m 9 5 NOTE Enter m anytime it is desired to start over in this procedure Enter X X X XXX station number where the message willbe 95
161. AL OPERATION 5 00 Requirements 5 01 For DK16 the optional Expansion Unit must have a PIOU or PIOUS PCB installed to perform on site Remote Administration from a local termi nal For DK8 a QSMU is required Paragraph 4 and Figure 5 provide installation details on local terminal installation 5 02 The local terminal for either the STRATA DK16 or the DK8 must have an EIA RS 232 inter face communicate in ASCII code at 300 or 1200 bps 1200 bps only for DK8 have a standard typewriter type keyboard and display data via a display or printer A personal computer PC capable of emulating the described terminal with a communications software package such as PROCOMM may also be used Figure 5 5 03 Operating the PC or terminals local or re mote is identical The only difference is the physi cal connection and the method used to establish initial communications 5 10 Set up 5 11 Refer to Figure 2 and verify that the local terminal is connected and set up as follows 1 Connect the RS 232 cable to the terminal connector and the PIOU S or QSMU TTY connector NOTE If a personal computer is being used connect the cable to the serial COM port 2 Set the PC or terminal baud rate to match the DK16 SW2 PIOU S setting 300 or 1200 bps or the DK8 QSMU setting 1200 bps 3 Set the terminal for Full Duplex operation 4 Set the keyboard for Caps Lock on 5 Setthe parameters of the terminal or modem
162. ARD INTO BASE OF 6500 SERIES ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE PER INSTRUCTIONS IN SECTION 100 816 206 FIGURE 7 11 DK16 HESB ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE WITH LOUD RINGING BELL WIRING 1 15 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 4 23 Amplified Speaker Installation Install the HESB Amplified Speaker option in accordance with the following steps refer to Figure 7 12 1 Connect a jumper between terminals 1 and 2 of the HESB TBI terminal block 2 Connect a jumper between terminals 6 and 7 of the HESB TB1 terminal block 3 Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal block 4 Connect a jumper between terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB2 terminal block 5 Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 6 of the HESB TB2 terminal block 6 Connect the 600 ohm PAGE RCA jack output on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit to termi nals and 4 of the HESB TBI terminal block 7 Connect the power supply s 12 lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block and connect the OV lead to terminal 2 8 Plug the provided power cord into the power supply and to a 117VAC 60Hz power source 4 24 Amplified Speaker Test Test the amplified speaker installation in accordance with the follow ing steps 1 Make an external page e Page should be heard over the HESB 2 Adjustthe HESB volume controlto the desired level screwdriver adjustment on back of HESB 4 25 HESB MDFB Talkback Ampli
163. ATION TOLL RESTRICTION CLASSIFICATION ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the MODE prompt enter R O G CR Enter Program Number 48 P 48 Press CR 48 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required port 48 00 number Example Port 00 enter 0 0 Press key The system will display the present data as a P48 00 13 two digit code The first digit designates digit free or digit restrict The second digit is the station restriction code Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required To Exit Program Store Data P48 00 13 A store data press CR P48 B Continue returning to step 3 until all data is recorded for this P program C To exit this program press CR TABLE RM AX PROGRAM 50 1 LCR PARAMETERS ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode PROG At the gt MODE prompt enter CR Enter Program Number 50 Press CR Enter 1 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required button LED number Example Button 01 enterO 1 Refer to the System Record Sheet and change button LED status if required Press SPACE to move to next button LED To Exit Program Store Data To store data press CR B To exit this program press CR REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM AY PROGRAM 50 2 LCR HOME AREA CODE ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT
164. BOTTOM PCB DIGITAL TELEPHONE TOP ASSEMBLY TO P2 OF BOTTOM PCB IMPORTANT DO NOT CONNECT DIU CABLES TO HHEU CONNECTOR DIRECTORY TRAY NOTE A 1000 SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE CANNOT SUPPORT AN HHEU AND A PDIU DI 1000 DIGITAL PDIU DI AT THE SAME TIME TELEPHONE BASE FIGURE 6 5 PDIU DI INSTALLATION INTO 1000 SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE 6 5 INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SEGTION 100 816 206 MARGH 1993 3 20 Off hook Call Announce Upgrade DVSU 3 21 To receive Off hook Call Announce OCA calls a digital telephone must be upgraded with a DVSU the telephone making the call does not require a DVSU An additional wire pair is not required for digital telephones that receive OCA calls The DVSU is compatible with both 2000 series and 1000 series Digital Telephones NOTE Digital telephones cannot be equipped with a DVSU and integrated data interface unit PDIU DI or PDIU DI2 at the same time 3 22 DVSU Upgrade Installation Install the DVSU upgrade in accordance with the following steps 1 Loosen the four captive screws securing the telephone base Figure 6 1 and remove the base Loosen the four captive screws securing the metal plate to the standoffs inside the base where the DVSU will be installed Figure 6 6 Remove the plate which can be discarded Position the DVSU PCB on the standoffs Figure 6 6 and secure with the four pro vided screws 4A Ifinstallingthe DVSU into a 2000 series digital te
165. CEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM BG PROGRAM 54 LCR ROUTE DEFINITION ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt prompt enter G CR Enter Program Number 54 Press CR Enter Route Plan Number Refer to the Svstem Record Sheet and enter the required route plan number 1 8 Example Route plan 1 enter 1 Enter Route Definition Number 54 12 11 32 Refer to the Svstem Record Sheet and enter the required route definition number 1 4 Modified Digit Table No Example Enter route definition number 2 enter 2 CO Line Group No The svstem will displav the previousiv entered CO line Route Definition No group number 1 8 and the modified digits table number 1 6 Plan No Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the CO line group and modified digit numbers as required then press CR Example Change the CO line group number to 3 and the modified digits table to 2 Enter 3 2 CR To Exit Program Store Data P54 12 11 32 A To store data press CR P54 B Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered P for this program C To exit this program press CR REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM BH PROGRAM 55 0 LCR MODIFIED DIGITS DELETE ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the MODE prompt enter P R O CR P Enter Program Number 55 P 5
166. CHART 4 CO DIAL TONE 10 CHART NO 5 DSS CONSOLE FAULTS errem 11 CHART NO 6 VOICE MAIL EXTERNAL AUTO ATTENDANT FAULTS ee ER 12 CHART NO 7 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING 13 CHART 8 REMOTE MAINTENANCE FAULTS 14 TABLE LIST TABLE TITLE PAGE A FEOWGHARTS ene er 1 STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING VOLTMETER 6 STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING OHMMETER 6 D STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING VOLTMETER 6 E STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING OHMMETER 6 FIGURE LIST FIGURE TITLE PAGE 1 FLOWCHART SYMBOLS aimi cele t bus A 1 2 QPSUS DG VOLTAGE TEST ect a ee 3 3 KPSU16 DG VOLTAGE ia gran 3 1 GENERAL 1 01 This section describes the maintenance cedures used to diagnose faults in the STRATA DK8 and DK 16 digital kev telephone svstem Faults are classified and then cleared bv replacing the malfunctioning unit and performing operational tests in the sequences prescribed by the fault clearing flowcharts in Paragraph 9 2 FAULT CLASSIFICATION 2 01 A Fault Classification Flowchart is provided to ensure that fault clearing is pursued in a logical sequence
167. CONNECTOR TYPE OF COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Figure 5 18 SMDR TTY Interface Dual modular connector Interface connector for SMDR printer Connector J3 call accounting device and maintenance terminal modem IMDU Connector P1 10 pin connector Interface connector for Remote Maintenance Modem piggy back module IMDU Connector P2 9 pin connector Interface connector for Remote Maintenance Modem piggy back module IMDU Connector P3 3 pin connector Interface connector for Remote Maintenance Modem piggy back module M B Make Break Three terminal jumper External Page Door Lock Control Relay Jumper Plug P10 MAKE or BREAK jumper plug M B Make Break Three terminal jumper plug Night Hold Relay MAKE or BREAK Jumper Plug P11 jumper plug Alarm Sensor Three terminal jumper plug Alarm sensor normally open or normally Jumper Plug P12 closed jumper plug CCITT BELL Jumper Three terminal jumper plug IMDU or external modem operating Plug P13 specification jumper plug SMDR Baud Rate Two position slide switch Selects baud rate 300 or 1200 bps for Switch SW1 SMDR printer or accounting device TTV Baud Rate Switch Two position locking Selects baud rate 300 or 1200 bps for SW2 button switch Remote Maintenance Modem piggv back module IMDU or external TTV jack Modem TTV Switch Two position slide switch Enables PIOU for operation with IMDU SW3 jack 2 Set the SW2 baud rate switch on the
168. Circuit 5 Port 04 of the Base Unit and or Circuit 1 Port 12 of a PDKU or KCDU in the Expansion Unit NOTE DDCBs cannot connect to the QSTU KSTU PSTU PESU or PEKU 6 10 DDCB and MDFB Cabling 6 11 Refer to Section 100 816 208 for DDCB and MDFB wiring interconnecting details For door lock control installation procedures refer to Section 100 816 208 The length of the cable run from the key service unit KSU to the MDFB via the must not exceed 1 000 feet 305 meters if using 24 AWG cable see Table 8 D NOTES 1 DDCB cable runs must not have the fol lowing e Cable splits single or double e Cable bridges of any length e High resistance or faulty cable splices 2 See Section 100 816 208 for secondary protector information 6 20 DDCB Wall Mounting 6 21 The DDCB is designed to be mounted on a wall or other vertical surface Mount the units in accordance with the following steps 1 Locate the two mounting holes on the right hand side on the DDCB Figure 6 16 2 Remove the side cover from the DDCB to expose the two left hand mounting holes Fig ure 6 16 3 Position the DDCB adjacent to the key ser vice unit KSU with regard to wiring needs 6 16 EXTERNAL POWER STRAPS DDCB ONLY II MOUNTING SCREWS 4 See Table 8 D regarding external power requirements FIGURE 6 16 DOOR PHONE DDCB INSTALLATION 4 Secure the DDCB to the mounting surface with four one inch panhead wood
169. Connection ena neta nem dti etate 4 17 FIGURE LIST FIGURE TITLE PAGE 4 1 KEY SERVICE UNIT WALL MOUNT METHOD Genn 4 1 4 2 DK8 DIMENSIONS AND SCREW LOCATIONS sese 4 2 4 3 SIDE VIEW DIMENSION AND PLUG JACK LOCATIONS 4 3 4 4 DKS CABLING DIAGRAM kk ir 4 6 4 5 BASE UNIT JACKS AND CONNECTORS 4 7 4 6 DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT POWER FAILURE TRANSFER PFT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM D 4 8 4 7 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 4 10 4 8 QCDU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE 4 11 4 9 MODULAR JACK COVER REMOVAL AND STORAGE 4 12 4 10 QSTU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE lt 25 4 14 4 11 QRCU INTERFACE CONNECTORS std sitientes deti reni tk 4 15 4 12 INTERFACE CONNECTORS renean tror aaepe petunt nupt tani 4 16 4 13 QSMU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS 4 16 4 ii PARTI KSU INSTALLATION 1 GENERAL 1 00 This chapter provides the instructions nec essary mount the STRATA Key Service Unit Instructions are also provided on how to remove and replace the power supply 2 KEY SERVICE UNIT MOUNTING 2 00 Mounting Surface Considerations 2 01 The Key Service Unit KSU is designed to be mounted on a wall or ot
170. D 14 shown in steps 9 10 and 11 If this is not completed remote programming must be reactivated locally from the programming digital or electronic telephone 15 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM E PROGRAM 92 STATION SPEED DIAL SPEED DIAL MEMO VM ID CODES INITIALIZATION ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the MODE prompt enter P R O CR Enter Program Number 92 Press CR Enter 1 Enter button LED number O 1 Change LED 01 to ON by entering Y Press SPACE two times Change LED 03 to ON by entering Y Press CR Initialization complete NOTE If program data is not entered correctly CR will not respond To retry press DELETE CR at the same time Clear system speed dial using the procedure on the next page REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM F PROGRAM 92 continued SYSTEM SPEED DIAL SPEED DIAL MEMO INITIALIZATION ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode PROG At the MODE prompt enter P R O CR Enter Program Number 92 Press CR Enter 2 Enter button LED number O 1 Change LED 01 to ON by entering Y Press SPACE three times Change LED 04 to ON by entering Y 22224 Press CR Initialization complete NOTE If program data is not entered correctly CR will not respon
171. DK16 only A console designed to facilitate the processing of aheavy load of incoming calls 1 2 There are two types of DSS consoles the 0055 console andthe HDSS console The chief differ ence between them is that the DDSS console can be connected to designated digital tele phone circuits while the HDSS console can only be connected to designated electronic tele phone circuits DTMF Dual tone Multi frequency Push button dialing DVSU Off hook Call Announce Upgrade A sub assembly that allows a digital telephone to re ceive Off hook Call Announce EOCU Off hook Call Announce Upgrade STRATA DK16 only An optional subassembly to the Electronic Telephone Interface Unit PCB PEKU or Standard Electronic Telephone Interface Unit PESU that provides support for electronic tele phones that must receive Off hook Call An nounce Electronic telephones that must re ceive Off hook Call Announce must also have an HVSU2 subassembly or the combined HVSU HVSI subassemblies FCC Federal Communication Commission The telecommunication industry s federal regulatory agency All Toshiba hardware is FCC listed or approved HESB External Speaker Box A speaker ampli fier that can be configured with the svstem and telephones to provide a varietv of functions 5 65 A cable that an equipped digital telephone or electronic tele phone to an HESB for Loud Ringing Bell HHEU Loud Ringing B
172. DURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM AE PROGRAM 38 DIGITAL AND ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE BUTTONSTRIP TYPE ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt prompt enter P R O G CR Enter the Program Number 38 38 Press CR P38 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the P38 00 required port number Example Port 00 enter O 0 Press The system will display the present P38 00 31 telephone code Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter P38 00 31 21 the required telephone code number Example Code 21 enter 2 1 To Exit Program Store Data P38 00 31 21 A To store data press CR P38 B Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 38 P data is entered C To exit this program press CR REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM AF PROGRAM 39 FLEXIBLE BUTTON ASSIGNM ENT ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt prompt enter R O G CR Enter the Program Number 39 39 Press CR P39 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter P39 00 the required port number Example Port 00 enter O O Press Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the button number Example Button 01 enter O 1 The system will display the feature code presently assigned to this button Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the re
173. E 5 21 KCDU INDICATORS OPTIONS AND CONNECTORS 9 32 INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 TABLE 5 H KCDU CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS TYPE OF COMPONENT Red LED Red LED CONTROL INDICATOR CONNECTOR Figure 5 21 CO line circuit 1 Indicator CD517 CO line circuit 2 Indicator CD617 J7 Connectors PAD Switch SW501 PAD Switch SW601 4 After installing the KCDU gently pull the PCB outward Ifthe connectors are properly mated a slight resistance will be felt 13 30 KCDU Wiring 13 31 Refer to KCDU Wiring Diagram in Section 100 816 208 for wiring interconnecting details 13 40 KCDU Programming Overview 13 41 See the PCOU programming overview and the PDKU overview in this chapter for KCDU pro gramming information When running Program 03 for the KCDU slot s specify code 65 if the KCDU does not support OCA or PDIU DI telephones or code 66 if the KCDU supports OCA or PDIU DI telephones Do not specify code 11 61 62 or 64 14 DTMF RECEIVER ABR TONE DETECTOR UNIT KARCU 14 00 General 14 01 The KARCU must be installed to recognize Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF tones gener ated by a standard telephone or any other device Modular connector Two position slide Two position slide 9 33 DESCRIPTION Lights to indicate CO line circuit 1 is in operation Lights to indicate CO line circuit 2 is in operation Interface connector for CO line circuits 1 and
174. E EMERGENCV TRANSFER OPTION 17 00 Adedicated standard telephone can be nected to the Power Failure Transfer Interface PF1 on the DK16 Base Unit to provide power failure backup During normal operation this tele phone cannot be used it does not count as a station so it does not reduce the system s 20 maximum station capacity But if there is a power failure the telephone will automatically be con nected to CO line 1 When power is restored the system will automatically resume with its normal station and CO line assignments and the dedi cated telephone will become inoperative again DK8 OR DK16 KSU MAIN PCB 17 10 DK16 Power Failure Emergency Transfer Installation Install the dedicated emergency stan dard telephone as follows see Figure 5 24 1 Connect a standard telephone to the PF1 connector in the Base Unit 17 11 DK16 Power Failure Emergency Trans fer Test 1 Turn the system power switch off 2 Lift the emergency standard telephone hand set and verify that there is CO dial tone POWER AVAILABLE CONNECTION 4 e O KCOU gt COLINE 1 MOD JACK BASE UNIT POWER FAIL STANDARD TELEPHONE MOD JACK PF1 BASE UNIT FIGURE 5 24 DK16 BASE UNIT POWER FAILURE TRANSFER PFT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 5 36 TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS SECTION 100 816 206 MARCH 1993 Strata
175. ENERAL uuu 7 1 MUSIC ON HOLD BACKGROUND MUSIC OPTIONS 7 1 and DK16 Music on Hold MOH Option 7 1 Background Music BGM Options kanen 7 3 RELAY CONTROL OPTIONS coruscat 7 4 EAS Al EU 7 4 KSU and DK16 Base Unit Relay 7 7 DK16 Expansion Unit PIOU and PIOUS Relays 7 7 DK16 Expansion Unit Night Transfer Music on Hold Relav Options with al ia 7 9 EXTERNAL SPEAKER UNIT HESB 7 12 System Hardware 7 12 HESB Option Installation sies tijej 7 12 EXTERNAL PAGE OPTIONS ktibt 7 19 System Hardware 7 19 External Page Option 7 19 AND DK16 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SMDR PRINTER CALL ACCOUNTING DEVICE OPTIONS 7 23 SMDR Hardware Requirements sese 7 27 SMDR Printer Call Accounting Device
176. ER PFT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 5 12 STU OPTIONS AND GONNEU POS 32525 i pps je bi in lapi g ae tt 5 14 PDKU INTERFACE CONNECTION ER REP Rb IK era ERE ud 5 16 PEKU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS 5 18 OFF HOOK CALL ANNOUNCE UNIT EOCU INTERFACE CONNECTORS 5 20 PSTU AND SUBUNIT SS T E Etica a eu desinat 5 21 PESU PCB OPTION LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION eee 5 23 PCOU CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS 5 26 PIOU CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS 5 28 PIOUS PCB SWITGH JUMPEHR OPTION LOCATION rrt 5 30 REMOTE MAINTENANCE MODEM UNIT IMDU INTERFACE CONNECTORS 5 32 KODU INDICATORS OPTIONS AND CONNECTORS maskra 5 32 K4RGU POB usen iibi ped as aq qawa ditat rere teen ipte 5 34 KGOU p yaa 5 35 EMERGENCY STANDARD TELEPHONE INSTALLATION 5 36 TABLE LIST SUBJECT PAGE KSTU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS iii ink atti 5 15 CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS manant 5 19 PSTU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS 5 21 PESU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS 5 24 PCOU CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS 5 27 PIOU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS 5 29 PIO
177. EU2 has longer wires to accommodate wall mounting A Toshiba HESC 65 or HESC 65A cable is required to connect the HHEU in an electronic telephone to the HESB Refer to Section 100 816 207 for HESB instal lation procedures 4 All HHEU versions and types except for HHEU1 are compatible with the Off hook Call Announce upgrades HVSU2 and HVSU HVSI 3 4 22 HHEU Upgrade Installation Installthe HHEU upgrade in accordance with the following steps 1 Loosen the four captive screws securing the telephone base Figure 6 1 and remove the base 2 Using a screwdriver or other suitable tool remove the plastic tab located on the back of INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SEGTION 100 816 206 1993 the base Figure 6 1 The HHEU modular NOTE connector for the headset will be accessed Do not cut the R607 resistor if connecting an through this opening HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing Bell even ifa headsetis also installed on the 3 If using a or earlier HHEU1 set the HHEU SW601 switch to the HEADSET position for HESB and or headset connection Figure 6 5B For the HHEU1 or the HHEU2 If only the 15 This switch is not on either the V 4 headset is connected to the HHEU cut the HHEU1 or the HHEU2 because the opera OCA strap Figure 6 15 tion is automatic with these subassemblies NOTE 4 Connect the HESC 65 or HESC 65A cable Do not cut the OCA strap if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for t
178. FIER DK16 PIOU ZONE PAGE BGM NIGHT RING SEPARATE AMPLIFIERS DK16 PAGING WITH MULTIPLE AMPLIFIERS DK16 NIGHT RINGING OVER ALL EXTERNAL PAGE ZONES DK8 AND 16 SMDR PRINTOUT EXAMPLES rtt ttt AND DK16 PIOU PIOUS SMDR CABLE CONNECTIONS PIOU PIOUS SMDR PORT PROGRAM 97 DATA DUMP AND DK16 VOICE MAIL AUTO ATTENDANT BLOCK DIAGRAM DK16 ALARM SENSOR 42 ierit Etro eerta tois OR DK16 DATA INSTALLATION EXAMPLE BLOCK DIAGRAM DK8 AND DK16 PDIU DI TO IBM AT TYPE COMPUTER RS 232 CONNECTOR GABLE DK8 AND DK16 PDIU DI TO IBM XT TYPE COMPUTER 5 232 GONNECTOR GABLE CONNECTIONS iini ntt nti trs DK8 AND DK16 PDIU DS TO TOSHIBA PRINTER 5 232 CONNECTOR CABLE CONNECTIONS green DK8 AND DK16 PDIU DS TO HAYES TYPE SMART MODEM RS 232 CONNECTOR CABLE CONNECTIONS lira DK8 AND DK16 PDIU DI PDIU DS MODULAR CABLE RJ 45 ADAPTER GONNEGTOM m DK8 AND DK16 PDIU DI PDIU DS MODULAR CORDS AND RJ 45 RS 232 ADAPTER PIN CONNECTIONS entes DK8 AND DK16 PDIU DS JUMPER PLUG OPTIONS RS 232 CONNECTOR INFORMA AND DK16 PDIU DI PDIU DS SW1 DIP SWITCH INFORMATION AND DK16 PDIU DS
179. FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM m 7 2 DK16 BGM SOURCE STANDARD TELEPHONE CIRCUIT PRECAUTION DIAGRAM M M IPTE 7 4 AND DK16 MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION 7 5 AND DK16 MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION 7 5 DK16 MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION C 7 6 T i INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 FIGURE 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 14 7 15 7 16 7 17 7 18 7 19 7 20 7 21 7 22 7 23 7 24 7 25 7 26 7 27 7 28 7 29 7 30 7 31 7 32 7 33 7 34 7 35 7 36 7 37 7 38 7 39 FIGURE LIST TITLE DK16 PIOU RELAY CONTROL FUNCTIONAL WIRING DIAGRAM DK16 PIOUS RELAY CONTROL FUNCTIONAL WIRING DIAGRAM DK15 DOOR LOCK CONTROL OPTION PIOU PIOUS tna AND DK16 DOOR LOCK CONTROL OPTION DDCB DK8 AND DK16 HESB DIGITAL TELEPHONE WITH LOUD RINGING BELL WIRING I DK16 HESB ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE WITH LOUD RINGING BELL te AND DK16 HESB AMPLIFIED SPEAKER AND DK16 HESB TALKBACK AMPLIFIED SPEAKER WIRING HESB WALL MOUNT ING AND DK16 PAGE AND SEPARATE BGM USING SAME AMPLI
180. GNAL B C ABBREVIATON FUNCTION PIN NO DIRECTION DTE MODE DIRECTION MODEM MODE p memnon mem m m mee mem em mense mre mm o me tiov es ore n Z mes ore NOTES 1 Mode select P1 P9 if PDIU DS is connected to a terminal tvpe device DTE 2 Mode select P1 P9 B C if PDIU DS is connected to modem type device DCE 3 See Figure 7 33 to disassemble assemble PDIU DS 4 Some RS 232 leads go by different names depending on the equipment manufacturer 5 Do not cut the Perception strap when installing a PDIU DS in Strata DK systems mmm m FIGURE 7 31 DK8 AND DK16 PDIU DS JUMPER PLUG OPTIONS RS 232 CONNECTOR INFORMATION 1 48 PDIU DI VIEW U DIRECTORY TRAY REMOVE FROM ORIGINAL TELEPHONE BASE AND INSTALL ON PDIU DI BASE U HA PDIU DI DIGITAL TELEPHONE BASE A INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS DIP SWITCH SECTION 100 816 207 MARCH 1993 ACCESS FROM BOTTOM SCO Co LT OUTSIDE OF PDIU DI DIP SWITCH SW1 BACK VIEW ACCESS FROM BACK OUTSIDE OF PDIU DS PDIU DS REAR VIEW DB25 CONNECTOR FEMALE FOR DTE OR DCE RS 232 6 CABLE CONNECTION MODULAR CONNECTOR FOR DIGITAL PORT CONNECTION PDIU DI AND DS SW1 DIP SWITCH 1 4 FUNCTIONS INITIAL
181. HESB VOICE modular jack instead of the TB1 terminal block Install an HHEU PCB and HESC 65 or HESC 65A cable in the telephone per Section 100 816 206 before proceeding with Step 3 3 Connect Terminal 1 ofthe HESB TB1 terminal block to the red wire of the HESC 65 cable using a modular block 1 13 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SECTION 100 816 207 MARCH 1993 4 Connect Terminal 2 ofthe HESB TB1 terminal block to the green wire of the HESC 65 cable using a modular block Connect Terminal 3 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to pin 3 of the electronic telephone s modular block VOICE TIP Connect Terminal 4 ofthe HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin 4 of the electronic telephone s modular block VOICE RING Connect the HACU 120 power supply s 12V lead to Terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block and connectthe power supply s OV lead to Terminal 2 8 Plug the provided power cord into the power supply and to a 117VAC 60Hz power source 4 22 Loud Ringing Bell Test Test the Loud Ring ing Bell installation in accordance with the follow ing steps 1 Make a CO or station call to the station config ured for the loud ringing bell Ringing will be heard over the HESB 2 Adjustthe HESB volume control to the desired level Screwdriver adjustment on back of HESB and ring level control of associated telephone 3 If ringing is heard at the station but not over the HESB perform the following check while the statio
182. IGURE 5 10 POWER SUPPLY KPSU16 4 Plugthe DC cable into the DC OUT connector 7 Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and Green yellow wire is on right hand side Figure turn ON the power supply switch 5 10 8 Refer to Paragraph 2 10 to confirm that the 5 Fasten FG green yellow wire ring terminal and power supply is working properly building ground wire to the left side of the power supply with the FG screw 9 Plugreserve battery cable into BATT connec tor of power supply Figure 5 10 6 Re install KARCU if required PART 1 DK16 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD INSTALLATION 4 GENERAL 4 01 This chapter provides procedures for installa tion of STRATA DK 16 system printed circuit boards PCBs into the Base and Expansion units This includes installation instructions optional configu ration information and wiring and programming considerations for each PCB 4 02 Be sure the power supplv has been tested and the ground has been checked See Chapter 5 Section l for the power supplv and Chapter 3 for grounding 4 03 It is recommended to install the Base Unit option PCBs KARCU and or KSTU before mount ing the Base KSU on the wall 4 04 Begin Expansion PCB installation only after completion of Expansion Unitinstallation see Chap ter 5 Section 1 5 DK16 PCB INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS 5 01 The STRATA 16 Base Unit comes stan dard with eight digital telephone circuits ports and four CO line circuits The
183. ING e 1 and PC 2 are connected as shown by the thick solid lines PDIU DIs are now in the communication mode 4 Tvping from PC 1 kevboard will displav on PC 2 displav and vice versa 5 To terminate the call Press Data Release or a Tvpe XXX from either PC kevboard The screen displavs STRATA DK8 OR DK16 DIGITAL PORT 00 DIGITAL PORT 01 DK8 AND DK16 PC TO PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 b H from the PC kevboard used in step 5a e PC 1and PC2 screens both display NO CARRIER e The Data Call LEDs on each are off XXX PDIU DI escape sequence see graph 10 63 10 83 PC to Printer Test Call Using Manual Dialing see Figure 7 35 1 DIU Programming e Program 20 Port 01 LEDs 01 02 and 17 ON all other LEDs OFF e Program 20 Port 03 LEDs 01 04 and 17 ON all other LEDs OFF e Program 39 Port 01 Data Call 56 and Data Release 54 buttons should be provided e Default settings for PDIU DI S Regis ters 2 Make sure the PC is configured to print data from its serial COM port the PC COM port connected to DKT PDIU DI port 01 This is FIGURE 7 35 normally accomplished using the DOS and MODE commands 3 Using the manufacturers documentation make sure the communication parameters data speed parity data bits stop bits etc of the PC COM port match the printer s
184. INTED CIRCUIT BOARD INSTALLATION 5 13 rz 5 13 PCB INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS nr 5 13 Base Unit POB 5 13 Expansion Unit PCBS uuu uu u uuu M 5 13 PCB Option Consideration Ps 5 13 PCB Installation Power Supply Considerations 5 14 BASE UNIT STANDARD TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT KSTU 5 14 CIC 5 14 RSTU COE AMON be ta sia 5 14 KSTU Installation Procedure ntt n kk en pnt ine 5 14 P E E 5 15 Programming 22 3 38 uuu sneren orane isa 5 15 DIGITAL TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT PDKU sie 5 15 General x uu ra a 5 15 PDKU Hardware infeta 5 16 PDKU Installation uu uuu uuu nu Dada boe a ctor ri Siehe 5 17 fe a tr Att una un 5 17 PDKU Programming Overview 5 17 ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT PEKU 5 17 CET UT 5 17 PEKU Hardware DDIDOFS 252 u benc u Da uu be pre 5 17 PEKU Installation Procedure ra 5 19 PEKU WINING ERE RE T m 5 20 PEKU Programming r
185. IRING PIOU PERIPHERALS 25 PAIR 8 27 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 DB 25 RS 232 NOTE 1 If connected to external modem interchange pin 2 and pin 3 MALE gt lt 20 8 Send amp 1 command to external modem status of carrier detect signal 1 BL lt lt NOTE 2 Wire colors may vary with other types of modular adaptors PDIU DS TO ASCII TERMINAL OR EXTERNAL MODEM e PIOUS MAINTENANCE CARD PORT TYSG 6 PIN MODULAR TYCD JACK TYDTR TYDSR 3 PAIR TYTD MODULAR TYRD TOSHIBA RS 232 MODULAR CORD MAX SMSG ADAPTOR PART NO PPTC DB 25 RS 232 0 FT WITH N SMCD MALE 24 AWG SMDTR SMDSR SMTD SMRD 7 BIT EVEN PARITY 1 STOP o Lh TO PRINTER PDIU DS OR CALL ACCOUNTING DEVICE J STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING PORT e oC Dra 8 BIT NO PARITY 1 STOP BIT NOTE 600 ohm Page TB1 TO MDF is not functional 6 PIN MODULAR on DK16 JACK 600 DOOR LOCK NOTE 3 PIOUS option settings PIOU MODULAR PIN OUT AMP MUTE SWI Sets the SMDR baud rate
186. K8 and DK16 HESB Installation for Digital Telephone Loud Ring Bell Figure 7 10 1 Connect a jumper between Terminals 2 and 10 on the HESB TB1 terminal block 2 Connect a jumper between Terminals 4 and 5 on the HESB TB2 terminal block NOTES 1 HESB connections made in steps 3 5 may be accomplished using the HESB VOICE modular jack instead of the TB1 terminal block 2 InstallanHHEU PCB and HESC 65A cable in the telephone per Section 100 816 206 before proceeding with Step 3 3 Connect Terminal 1 ofthe HESB TB1 terminal block to the red wire of the HESC 65A using a modular block Connect Terminal 2 ofthe HESB TB1 terminal block to the green wire of the HESC 65A using a modular block Connect Terminal 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the yellow L2 wire of the HESC 65A cable using a modular block Connect the HACU 120 power supply s 12V lead to Terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block and connectthe power supply s lead to Terminal 2 7 Plug the provided power cord into the power supply and to a 117VAC 60Hz power source DK16 HESB Installation for Electronic Tele phone Loud Ring Bell Figure 7 11 1 On the HESB TB1 terminal block connect a jumper between Terminals 6 and 7 and con nect another jumper between Terminals 5 and 8 2 On the HESB TB2 terminal block connect a jumper between Terminals 4 and 5 NOTES 1 HESB connections made in steps 3 6 may be accomplished using the
187. LED 07 K2 NH NIGHT RELAY OR MUSIC ON HOLD CONTROL PROGRAM 77 1 LED 05 e K1 amp 24 VDC 1 AMP MAXIMUM FIGURE 8 25 DK16 PIOUS PAGE RELAY ALARM CONNECTIONS 8 29 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 DB 25 RS 232 NOTE 1 If connected to an external Hayes compatible modem interchange pin 2 MALE gt lt and pin 3 and pin 20 and 8 Send amp 1 80250 6AW ENTER command to external modem R O hs iu lt PDIU DS TO ASCII TERMINAL OR EXTERNAL MODEM 1 BL lt NOTE 2 Wire colors may vary with other types of modular adaptors P v 9 O o e li r MAINTENANCE pioU PORT E CARD TYSG 6 PIN MODULAR TYCD JACK TYDTR TYDSR S PAIR TYTD MODULAR TYRD TOSHIBA RS 232 MODULAR CORD MAX ADAPTOR PART NO PPTC 50 FT WITH MEE 24 AWG Zo A 7 BIT EVEN PARITY 1 STOP OOOOO N E Co DB 25 RS 232 MALE B ho TO PRINTER PDIU DS OR CALL ACCOUNTING DEVICE STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING I PORT a O7 6 PIN MODULAR 25 PAIR JACK FEMALE AMP JACK D 7 8 DTR 8 BIT 1 STOP BIT
188. LED MESSAGE MODEL do HE Re ze RA na b FERE ARD 13 11 00 General sms 13 11 10 Remote Called Station Message Mode 13 11 20 Remote Calling Station Message 13 12 SPEED DIAL MODE dtt lou ee dea LR tt teenth 14 12 00 General uu 14 13 MODE EXIT i p 14 14 DISCONTINUE OPERATION mia ian eg aka e 14 14 00 Bann 14 14 10 Remolie rtt aa preti f 14 15 EQUIPMENT COMPA BILITY i a 14 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION amp MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE LIST TABLE SUBJECT PAGE RM A MODIFIED WIRING FOR EXTERNAL MODEM TO TTY CONNECTION 4 RM B PPTC WIRING FOR LOCAL TERMINAL OR PERSONAL COMPUTER TO TIY GONNEGTION m dad a twa i a 5 RM C PROGRAMMING PROMPTS gr a red 10 RM D PROGRAM 90 INITIALIZING PROGRAMS 00 97 15 RM E PROGRAM 92 STATION SPEED DIAL SPEED DIAL MEMO VM ID CODES INITIALIZATION iii g arana aa 16 RM F PROGRAM 92 CONTINUED SVSTEM SPEED DIAL SPEED DIAL MEMO INITIALIZATION kasi ia era iisi ciecie a adaa 17 RM G PROGRAM 92 CONTINUED LCD CHARACTER MESSAGE MEMORV INETIALIZATION R E 18 RM H PROGRAM 92 CONTINUED TIMED REMINDERS INITIALIZATION
189. MODULAR CORD TO RIT JACK ON BOTTOM OF PDIU DI PDIU DI2 FEMALE GND CONNECTOR pp PERSONAL COMPUTER OR ASCII RS 232 TERMINAL ETC CABLE SEE SECTION 100 016 207 DIGITAL 13 o R7 VOICE DATA 39 NI NI DD POWER 14 PT A PR ADD POWER 40 Ko 25 PAIR CABLE W MALE CONNECTOR 15 41 o 16 U 02 3 42 17 43 18 44 EN 3 19 45 Ko 20 B B o 46 um 21 B B N 47 B B 22 B B 48 B a B a 23 B B 49 B Rar B 24 B B 50 B B 25 50 50 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK Voltage levels T PT 26 3 27 8 VDC R PR 0 0 VDC GND Reference to SG ground CIRCUIT 8 TO DKT8 OR DDSS NOT USED 2
190. NCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 FIGURE LIST FIGURE SUBJECT 1 SECTION FLOWCHART pl coire a 2 REMOTE MAINTENANCE EXTERNAL MODEM CONNECTION FOR DK8 16 METHOD ONE OF ALONS ttt ttes 3 REMOTE MAINTENANCE EXTERNAL MODEM CONNECTION FOR DK8 16 METHOD TWO OF TWO ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt nanna 4 REMOTE MAINTENANCE USING IMDU MODEM DK16 ONLY 5 LOCAL MAINTENANCE USING ASCII TERMINAL OR PERSONAL COMPUTER 6 DATA DUMP PRINTOUT EXAMPLE 7 SAMPLE PRINTOUT OF SYSTEM 8 TEST MODE FUNCTION DIAGRAM ettet ttt ttti INDEX A MESSAGE RECORD SHEET MESSAGE RECORD SHEET iv PAGE PAGE 70 PAGE REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 1 USING REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE 1 01 Figure 1 is provided as a quick reference aid in using this section General Description The functions available on STRATA DK systems via a Local or Remote Terminal are explained in Paragraph 2 The hardware and installation requirements are explained in Paragraphs 3 and 4 To set up and operate a Local To set up and operate a Remote Terminal see Paragraph 5 Terminal see Paragraph 6 To enter Operation Modes from a Local or Remote Terminal Program Data Printout Test LCD Message Entry Speed Dial Entry See Paragraph 7 T
191. NETWORK MODEM OR DK16 PIOUS DK8 OR DK16 MODEM LINE JACK 3 PAIR MODULAR CORD TTY MODULAR JACK 7 BITS EVEN PARITY 1 STOP BIT FIGURE 2 REMOTE MAINTENANCE EXTERNAL MODEM CONNECTION FOR DK8 amp DK16 METHOD ONE TTY MODULAR JACK 7 BITS EVEN PARITY 1 STOP BIT PPTC ADAPTOR MODIFIED FOR EXTERNAL MODEM CONNECTION AS SHOWN IN TABLE RM A OF THIS SECTION QSMU DK8 MODEM LINE JACK EXTERNAL MODEM 3 PAIR MODULAR CORD REMOTE PERSONAL COMPUTER STANDARD TELEPHONE CIRCUIT OR ASOII TERMINAL CO LINE DK8 OR DK16 TELEPHONE CO LINE NETWORK CIRCUIT OR DK16 CO line connects to modem station port via DISA Ring Transfer or ringing assignments Programs 81 89 FIGURE 3 REMOTE MAINTENANCE EXTERNAL MODEM CONNECTION FOR DK8 amp DK16 METHOD TWO EA REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM A PPTC MODIFIED WIRING FOR EXTERNAL MODEM TO TTY CONNECTION PPCT Modular to DB25 ADAPTOR MODIFIED WIRING FOR CONNECTING TTY JACK TO AN EXTERNAL MODEM QSMU OR PIOU PIOUS PPTC1A 5M ADAPTOR MODEM TTY JACK RS 232 MODULAR PIN NO MODULAR PIN NO DB25 PIN NO LEAD NAME IMPORTANT PPTC1A 5M pins 2 8 3 and pins 8 amp 20 must be reversed in the field as shown for modem connection Set Hayes modem to track status of carrier detect signal AT amp C1 and to answer ATSO 1 PIOU OR PIOUS TIME SWITCH REMOTE CO LINE TELEPHONE
192. NG FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONES DKTS AND DIGITAL DSS CONSOLE DDSS TO PDKU 8 14 PDKU KCDU BASE UNIT W FEMALE BRIDGING K w BL 26 STATION CABLING 1 VOICE DATA INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS 24AWG 1 OR 2 PAIR SEE NOTE 2 1 R1 VOICE DATA 27 PTI ADD POWER 2 PR1 ADD POWER K W GN 28 GN W 3 K W BR 29 o Ou Co o BR W 4 KWw S 30 K S w 5 o R BL 31 BL R 6 32 i2 7 B B 33 8 o 34 RCUIT 2 TO DKT2 PDIU 9 35 Ko 10 36 11 N 37 12 38 CIRCUIT 6 DKT6 OR PDIU DS 7 2 4 WIRE
193. NT NOTE This program clears Call Forward memory for all stations but does not reset the Call Forward indication on the station Call Forward LCD information and or Call Forward button LED To clear station Call Forward indications system power must be turned OFF for five seconds then ON Fixed Call Forward is not cleared by this program 21 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM K PROGRAM 03 SLOT ASSIGNMENTS ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the MODE prompt enter P R CR Enter Program Number 03 P 03 Press CR PO3 Enter the Slot Number PO3 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the desired PO3 00 91 slot number Example Slot number 00 enter O 0 Enter the PCB Code Number Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the desired 00 91 92 PCB code number Example PCB code 92 enter 9 2 To Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR 00 91 92 B Continue returning to Step 3 until all Program 03 fitt data is entered C Toexit this program press ff f press CR Turn system power OFF for 5 seconds and then turn Remote maintenance is disconnected power ON to store data in working memory see Notes IMPORTANT NOTES 1 This program only applies to DK16 and must be completed with on site assistance after installing PCBs if any because the system must be powered down momentarily af
194. Night Transfer Music on Hold Relay NOTE The above relay options are available in con junction with the Base Unit relay option 3 22 Each relay may be configured as normally open make or normally closed BREAK Electri cal specifications for the relay contacts are as follows Voltage e 24VDC maximum Current e ampere maximum CAUTION Do not connect relays directly to 120VAC power source 3 23 Door Lock Control PIOU or PIOUS Con 1 1 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 figure the PIOU or PIOUS for the door lock control function in accordance with the following steps refer to Figure 7 6 and 7 7 NOTE one door lock control is available using an optional interface PIOU or PIOUS be cause only one interface PCB is allowed 1 Access Program 77 1 Set LED 07 for the door lock control function 2 Access Program 77 1 Set LED 20 to OFF for 3 second door lock activation time or set LED 20 to ON for a 6 second door lock activation time 3A Set the P10 jumper plug on the PIOU to the MAKE or BREAK position as required e MAKE Shorts the normally open con tacts pins 7 and 32 when a station s door lock button is pressed e BREAK Opens the normally closed contacts pins 7 and 32 when a station s door lock button is pressed 3B Solder the W1 jumper plug on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK position as required e MAKE Shorts the normally open con tact
195. O MUSIC 2 ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE _ T 17 SPEAKERS DK8 OR MOH CONTROL CHOOSE BASE UNIT pk16 OR PIOU PIOUS RELAY RELAY OPTIONAL PROG MOH SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS d EXTERNAL PAGE INPUT IMPEDANCE 6002 BGM OUTPUTS INPUT VOLTAGE NOTE RECOMMENDED LEVELS HESB OR MIN 0 14 VRMS 15 dBm AMPLIFIER MAX 0 77 VRMS 0 dBm AND HM SPEAKER TYPICAL MOH SOURCES PLAYER RCA JACK TUNER DK16 EXPANSION UNIT PIOU PIOUS NOTE PIN NO s OF PIOU AMPHENOL CONNECTOR MOH OR NIGHT TRANSFER CONTROL MOH NT RELAY RELAY CONTACT JUMPER PLUG MAKE OR BREAK SELECT P11 MOH PROG 77 1 W2 IF USING PIOUS RELAV SPECIFICATION SEE FIGURE 7 7 24 MAX 1 DK8 KSU relav DK16 Base Unit relav be programmed 77 1 as the control relay or in DK16 the PIOU MOH NT relay be used to control FIGURE 7 1 DK8 AND DK16 MUSIC ON HOLD AND BACKGROUND MUSIC FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM SEE MDF WIRING DIAGRAM FOR DETAILS 1 2 4B Solder PIOUS jumper W2to MAKE or BREAK position if required e MAKE M Shorts the normally open contacts NHT and NHR when any CO line is in the hold condition e BREAK B Opensthe normally closed contacts NHT and NHR when any CO line is in the hold condition 5 For DK8 and DK16 sentto any station or CO line that is
196. ODE PROG P Enter Program Number 46 Press CR P 46 46 Enter class number 1 4 Enter 2 3 or 4 SPACE 2 to add codes to memory allow 3 to delete codes from memory deny 4 SPACE to display codes in memory allowed codes Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the area code or area code group Single LILILI Group sk LILI Press SPACE to enter more codes 46 Class Number 1 2 30 4 ALLOW or DENY PA6 X Y Arrow OOO OUO or DENY Press SPACE to temporarily store data Press CR when completed P46 Continue returning to step 3 until all data input is completed for this program To Exit this Program Press CR REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM AT PROGRAM 46 6 8 TOLL RESTRICTION ALLOWED DENIED OFFICE CODES ASSIGNED BY CLASS ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt MODE prompt enter P R O G CR Enter Program Number 46 P 46 Press CR 46 Enter class number 1 4 46 Class Number X Enter 6 7 or 8 SPACE P46 U 6 to add codes to memory allowed L_ 6 7 0r8 Y 7 to delete codes from memory deny 8 SPACE to display codes in memory allowed codes Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the office code or P46 X Y office code group Single Gr
197. ON 3 pair Modular Cord 7 ft max DK8 QSMU DK16 PIOU or DK16 PIOUS SMDR Modular Jack 50 ft max 24 AWG Wire Twisted Pair QSMU Modularized PROGRAM 10 3 LED 04 OFF Modular Jack Toshiba PPTCTA 5M RS232 Modular to DB25 Adaptor DATA FORMAT e ASCII 8 bits No paritv l stop bit QSMU 1200 bps PIOU PIOUS 300 or 1200 bps Printer or Call Accounting Device BASIC WIRING see QSMU PIOU or PIOUS TTV and Wiring in Chapter 8 for more detail PIOU SMDR Jack Modular Pin No PPTC1A 5M Adaptor Modular Pin No DB25 Pin RS 232 Lead Name SG 4 Jumper to 5 FIGURE 7 20 RTS to CTS DK8 AND DK16 PIOU PIOUS SMDR CABLE CONNECTIONS 7 VOICE MAIL OPTIONS 7 00 System Hardware Requirements 7 01 The STRATA DK8 and DK16 may be config ured to support Toshiba VP voice mail messaging system or a customer supplier voice mail system 7 02 The must be equipped with a QSTU and the DK16 mustbe equipped with a KSTU PSTU or PESU to support a voice mail system The DK8 QSTU is equipped with two standard telephone circuits the DK16 KSTU is equipped with four standard telephone circuits the PSTU with eight and the PESU with two A KARCU subassembly 1 28 must be installed in the DK16 Base Unit and a QRCU must be installed inthe KSU The voice mail system can be connected to any standard telephone circuit at the MDF bl
198. ON 100 816 203 MARCH 1993 TABLE 3 F PIOU PIOUS INTERFACE OPTION DK16 ONLY Expansion Unit nterace Options POU PIOUS Ezra Neh Transtar or museora Conley X x Boor Lack or External X x X OC SMDR output RS 232 6 wire modular connector x x Maintenance Port for a Local ASCII Terminal or External Modem RS 232 6 wire modular connector Remote Maintenance Modem IMDU subassembly no external connector NOTE X the option is provided TABLE 3 6 STRATA DK8 STATION APPARATUS OVERVIEW Type and Number of KSU KSU and Optional PCB Circuits Required PCB or Interface Combined Capacity Digital Telephone Digital one for each KSU Circuits 1 DKT with or without DKT QCDU UE 1 5 Stand alone Data Digital one foreach KSU 1 4 Interface Unit PDIU PDIU DS QCDU Circuits 1 2 DS Digital Door Digital one for each Port 02 Phone Lock Control DDCB Port 03 Unit DDCB Single wire pair Standard one for QSTU Circuits 1 2 devices each device voice e Standard mail devices may Telephone require more than one e Voice Mail Device circuit e Facsimile Machine e Modem e Dictation Equipment Alternate Standard port for the QSTU Circuit 2 Background Music source Port 19 Source May require interface transformer see Section 100 816 207 3 6 INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 MARCH
199. ON MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD 8 24 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 TO NETWORK T Ri 2 TELCO PROVIDED MODULAR BLOCK 625 TYPE OR EQUIVALENT PCOU 4 3 O 2 MODULAR CORD 9 PCOU PIN OUT 50 NETWORK JACK RJ14C FIC 02152 50 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK FIGURE 8 21 DK16 MDF WIRING CO LINES TO PCOU 8 25 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 TO CO LINE CABLING NETWORK BRIDGING CLIPS Ri 12 KCDU CO2 LED
200. ON THE APPARATUS ITSELF Describe the nature of the defect on an information tag Attach the tag to the front of the unit with string not wire so the tag can remain attached during the testing and repair process Return tags are available from Toshiba America Information Systems Inc TSD Division 5 FAULT IDENTIFICATION AND ELIMINATION PROCEDURES 5 01 The DK8 or DK16 KSU common control circuits or DK16 KFCU may contain a soft fault dueto an extremely high levelof static electricity If it is found defective during the fault finding procedures attempt to clear a soft fault prior to returning the KSU or KFCU for repair The correct procedure for this is to perform the initialization procedure and then re program the system as necessary to test for the fault If the fault returns after these procedures are performed tag the defective KSU or KFCU and return it for repair 6 DK8 HARDWARE FAULT ISOLATION 6 01 If a DK8 hardware fault is suspected check the hardware using the following procedure 1 Make sure the BATT jumper plug SW1 onthe KSU motherboard is in the ON position to save the system s customer data base 2 Unplug HPFB battery cable from BATT con nector on QPSU8 Power Supply see Figure 2 3 Remove all piggy back PCBs from the DK8 motherboard one at a time Retest to check if the problem is cleared each time a PCB is removed If it is found that a particular PCB is causing the problem replace that PCB and
201. OUS does not support Zone Paging see Paragraph 12 11 12 02 PIOU controls indicators and interface connectors are shown in Figure 5 18 and de scribed in Table 5 F PIOUS information is pro vided in Figure 5 19 and Table 5 G 12 03 The internal 600 ohm or 3 watt page am plifier of the PIOU is not supported bv Strata DK16 12 10 PIOU and PIOUS Hardware Options 12 11 The PIOU and PIOUS support the following STRATA DK16 hardware options 50 PIN AMPHENOL CONNECTOR FEMALE Internal Options e Remote Maintenance Modem Unit IMDU External Options Alarm Sensor Local Maintenance Terminal or Modem SMDR Printer or Call Accounting Port Remote Maintenance Port Relay control options Zone Page via relays PIOU only NOTE Refer to Peripheral Equipment Installation Section 100 816 207 for installation of exter nal options 12 12 Remote Maintenance Modem Unit IMDU Installation Install the Remote Maintenance Mo dem Unit IMDU in accordance with the following steps 1 Remove the PCB from its protective packag ing BACKPLANE CONNECTOR FIGURE 5 18 300 fieq P13 O MODEM PIOU CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 TABLE 5 F PIOU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS CONTROL INDICATOR
202. P13 1 NN Refer to the record sheet and enter the required port number P13 1 NN 00 Example Port 00 enter O O CR P13 To Exit this Program P13 1 NN 00 Press CR P13 ff P NOTES 1 A blank is displayed by N 2 Programs 15 and 16 use Type 1 procedure REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES TABLE RM U PROGRAM 19 SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 BACKGROUND MUSIC SLOT IDENTIFICATION ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter P R CR gt MODE PROG Enter Program Number 19 Press CR P 19 19 Enter the number 1 The present slot number will be displaved 19 19 1 NN Refer to the record sheet and enter the required slot number Example Slot 04 enter 0 4 CR 19 1 NN 04 19 To Exit this Program Press f f CR NOTE Program 20 uses Tvpe 2 procedure TABLE PROGRAM 21 MODEM POOLING ACTION 1 19 fitt DISPLAV PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter P R O G CR gt MODE PROG Enter Program Number 21 Press CR P 21 P21 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required port number for the PDIU DS Example port 04 Enter O 4 Press The system will display the presently selected standard telephone port number P21 04 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required standard telephone port number Example P
203. PESU BU KSTU EU KCDU KCDU BU KSTU EU PCOU PEKU BU KSTU EU PCOU PDKU BU KSTU EU PCOU PSTU N N 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 MARCH 1993 TABLE 3 C DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT COMPONENTS Item Supports Connector Type Standard Optional Digital Telephone Circuits 4 e Digital Telephones with 25 pair Amphenol JY or without PDIU DI2 or ADM e Stand alone Data Interface Units PDIU DS Door Phone Lock Control Unit DDCB CO Line Circuits 2 e Loop Start CO Lines RJ11 Modular Os Power Failure Transfer Interface Standard Telephone RJ11 Modular JY one Battery Backup Interface e Optional HPFB Battery Proprietary Interface HPFB one or two per system Cable Connector with cable Music On Hold BGM Interface e Music on hold BGM RCA Jack Source 600 Ohm page Interface Amplifier Speaker RCA Jack CO line CKT 1 e Digital Telephones with 25 pair Amphenol Digital Telephone CKT 2 QCDU or without PDIU DI2 or max 2 QCDU per system ADM e Stand alone Data Interface Units PDIU DS e Loop Start CO Line RJ11 Modular Standard Telephone Standard Telephones Interface Unit QSTU Other Single line Devices 25 pair Amphenol e 2 standard telephone circuits Fax Machine Alternate BGM source DTMF ABR Tone Receiver e Automatic
204. PHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA olololololololololo CIRCUIT 8 ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE o 2 USED FIGURE 8 15 DK16 BACKGROUND MUSIC CONNECTION 8 19 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 MDF BLOCK NO SLOT NO COLO CKT PORT INTERCOM ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE CODE DESIGNATION NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER DEVICE LOCATION GSM NOTES 1 Indicate if BGM or electronic telephone is connected see Program 10 2 and 19 BGM connects to VT VH circuit 3 only DT and DR not used 2 Indicate if electronic telephone or HDSS console 3 OCA wiring not shown see MDF to electronic telephone wiring FIGURE 8 16 DK16 PEKU STATION MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD 8 20 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 TO PSTU W FEMALE BRIDGING JACKETED TWISTED STATION CABLE CLIPS 24 AWG RING 1 K W BL 26 1 127 2 K W GN 28 K GN W 3 K W BR 29 KBRW 4 K WS 30 KSW 5 KR BL 31 K BER 6 K RO 132 KOR 7 K R GN 33 8 KR BR 34 KBR R 9 MRS 35 10 K BK BL 36 K BL BK 11 K BK O 37 K 12 K BK GN 38 K GN BK 13 K 3
205. RAM 01 LOGICAL PORT DISPLAY ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter P R O CR gt MODE PROG P Enter Program Number 01 Press CR P 01 P01 Enter the Physical Port Number Enter the desired physical port number Example Port number 01 enter 1 PO1 1 01 Logical Port Displays Physical Port Verify Physical Port s Associated Logical Port 01 01 Logical Port To Displav More Ports Exit Program A To displav more logical ports press CR and go to Step 3 Toexit this program enter f CR twice TABLE RM N PROGRAM 02 PHVSICAL PORT DISPLAV ACTION PO1 01 IL POL P afterexit DISPLAV PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter P R O G CR gt MODE PROG P Enter Program Number 02 Press CR P 02 P02 Enter the Logical Port Number Enter the desired logical port number Example Port number 02 enter O 2 P02 P02 02 Physical Port Displays Logical Port Verify Logical Ports Associated Physical Port PO2 02 Physical Port To Display More Ports Exit Program A To display more physical ports press CR and go to Step 3 B To exit this program enter CR twice 24 PO2 02 PO2 P after exit REMOTE ADMINISTRA
206. SS CONNECT RECORD 8 24 DK16 MDF WIRING CO LINES TO PCOU A 8 25 DK16 MDF WIRING CO LINES AND DIGITAL TELEPHONES TO KODU 8 26 DK16 WIRING PIOU PERIPHERALS 25 PAIR 8 27 DK16 PIOUS TTY AND SMDR WIRING r 8 28 DK16 PIOUS PAGE RELAY ALARM CONNECTIONS 8 29 DK16 PIOU SMDR TTY OPTIONS AND WIRING 8 30 DK16 MDF WIRING AMPLIFIED TWO CO LINE CONFERENCE 8 31 DK16 EXTERNAL POWER FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONE CONNECTION 8 32 8 1 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 TABLE 8 8 8 8 0 TABLE LIST TITLE PAGE FCC REGISTRATION NUMBERS STRATA DK8 AND DK16 8 1 STATION REQUIREMENTS uuu uuu b ar cori 8 2 NETWORK 5 tak isa aid bosta iii 8 3 DIGITAL TELEPHONE DIU DDSS CONSOLE ADM LOOP LIMITS 8 4 8 ii 1 GENERAL 1 00 This chapter contains point to point wiring diagrams for connection of telephones lines pe ripheral equipment and power supply to the DK svstems Wiring diagrams are divided into groups according to the PCB or unit which provides the interface for or controls the operation of the asso ciated equipment 2 WIRING DIAGRAMS 2 01 The following
207. SWITCH FUNCTION POSITION 1 SW1 2 3 4 NOTES 1 DIU port must have LED 02 ON in Program 20 to enable auto disconnect 2 See Paragraphs 10 20 and 10 30 for more details regarding SW1 option settings 3 When a PDIU DS is connec ted to a modem that tracks the DCD signal amp 1 SW1 4 must be 4 If using Toshiba Personal Computers and Toshiba Printers using X ON X OFF flow control set SW1 4 ON on PDIU DIs and DSs 5 SW1 2 should be off when PDIU DS is connected to a modem FIGURE 7 32 Forced hang up when DIU does not detect space signal on TD or RD for about 9 minutes ON enable auto disconnect OFF disable DCD DSR control ON continuous on OFF DSR depends on DTR DCD is on during communication state RI control ON RI is on continuously during ringing state OFF RI is 1 sec ON 3 sec OFF during ringing state RTS control ON DTE doesn t have RTS signal OFF DTE has RTS signal ready busy flow control RTS CTS DCD DK8 AND DK16 PDIU DI PDIU DS SW1 DIP SWITCH INFORMATION 7 49 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 SIDE GROOVES PERCEPTION JUMPER PLUGS PDIU DS PCB NOTES 1 Donotcut the PERCEPTION jumper wire for STRATA or DK16 installations Jumper wire is for PERCEPTION applications only 2 See Table 8 D regarding external power requirements FIGURE
208. Strata Digital Kev Telephone Svstems DK16 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL COPVRIGHT 1993 TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS INC Telecommunication Systems Division All rights reserved No part of this manual covered by the copyrights hereon may be reproduced in any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording taping or information retrieval systems with the exception of the System Record forms without written permission of the publisher of this material SERIAL NO DK8 amp DK16 DK8 MA IN MT R1 4025021 TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES INSTALLATION INTRODUCTION DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS SECTION 100 816 201 MARCH 1993 Strata INSTALLATION ChapterOne Introduction Section 100 816 201 Chapter Two Site Requirements Section 100 816 202 Chapter Three System Configuration Section 100 816 203 Chapter Four DK8 KSU PCB Installation Section 100 816 204 Chapter Five DK16 KSU and PCB Installation Section 100 816 205 Chapter Six Station Apparatus Installation Section 100 816 206 Chapter Seven Peripheral Installation Section 100 816 207 Chapter Eight Wiring Diagrams Section 100 816 208 TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES INSTALLATION INTRODUCTION DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS SECTION 100 816 201 MARCH 1993 Strata DKs e DKS INSTALLATION CHAPTER ONE INTRODUCTION PARAGRAPH 1 2 3 3 10 3
209. T PESUOR PESUOR CONF ENABLE SLOT PEKU PEKU BUTTON LED POSITION NUMBER CIRCUIT Amplifier LED 02 ON m A 17 CKT6 All amplifier equipment is customer or dealer 18 supplied Use a 2 way telephone amplifier that is am sin and 2 2 f f FCC Part 68 registered and provides automatic rogram 13 9 nete appropriate mostor gain control the above example is with a Reliance tandem connection Electric Co R TEC VFR5050 VVSG Repeater Program 78 2 enable appropriate CO lines if with 500 X or 500 X CT mounting assembly and a amplified DISA is required PS16 power adapter Program 10 2 LED 18 and 19 ON Recommended switch settings for VFR5050 are FLAT GAIN 1 2 4 8 all ON Equalizer 1 5 all OFF e Sensitivity NORM e 1 screw down Data DIS OFF The above R TEC options may be different for some installations see VFR5050 installation Practice before installing VFR5050 DUPLEX AC PLUG FIGURE 7 39 DK16 AMPLIFIED TWO CO LINE CONFERENCE AND OR AMPLIFIED DISA FUNCTIONAL WIRING DIAGRAM 7 57 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 11 02 Amplified Talk Path Figure 7 39 provides a functional diagram of a two CO line amplified con ference connection an VFR5050 amplifier is used here The talk path for the connection is as follows outside partv 1 public telephone net work CO CKTX STRATA DK16 PEKU
210. TION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM O PROGRAM 04 PORT STATION NUMBER ASSIGNMENT ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the MODE prompt enter P R G CR P Enter Program Number 04 P 04 Press CR P04 Enter the Logical Port Number P04 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the desired P04 01 logical port number Example Port number 01 enter 1 Press button System displays present station number Refer to the 014 11 06 System Record Sheet and enter the desired station number Example Station number 16 enter 1 6 To Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR 014 11 06 B Continue returning to Step 3 until all Program 04 data is entered C To exit this program press f CR NOTE A blank is displayed by TABLE RM P PROGRAM 05 FLEXIBLE ACCESS CODE NUMBERING ACTION DISPLAV PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the MODE prompt enter P R O G CR Enter Program Number 05 P 05 Press CR 05 Enter Access Code number that you wish to change 0 9 P05 4 4 Example 4 if it was not previously changed the system will print another 4 If it has been previously changed the system will print the number to which it was changed Change the number if required one or two digits Example Change to 6 press CR Continue returning to Step 3 until all required access codes have bee
211. TLE 6 1 REMOVING THE TELEPHONE BASE metn treten ideae td 6 2 HANDSET HANGER set 6 3 WALL MOUNTING BASE ROTATION e e dm 6 4 PDIU DI2 INSTALLATION INTO 2000 SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE 6 5 PDIU DI INSTALLATION INTO 1000 SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE 6 6 DVSU INSTALLATION FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONES 6 7 DKT2010 H STRAP AND CONNECTOR 6 8 DKT2010 SD DKT2020 S AND DKT2020 SD STRAP AND CONNECTOR LOGATIONS p x 22 e roms 6 9 1000 SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE STRAP AND CONNECTION Hr ETT 6 10 HHEU INSTALLATION FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONE 6 11 cM 6 12 HVSU2 INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES 6 13 ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE PCB CONNECTIONS 6 14 HVSI HVSU INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES 6 15 HHEU INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES eres 6 16 DOOR PHONE DDCB INSTALLATION 6 17 DOOR PHONE MDFB INSTALLATION 6 18 ADD ON MODULE INSTALLATION a 6 19 DK16 ADD ON MODULE DSS BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS 6 20 DK8 ADD ON MODULE DSS BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS 1 OVERVIEW 1 00 1 01 This chapt
212. TRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM AK PROGRAM 78 CO LINE SPECIAL RINGING ASSIGNM ENTS DISA IM DU NIGHT RINGING OVER EXTERNAL PAGE ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the MODE prompt enter O G CR Enter Program Number 78 Press CR Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the feature number for the feature to be programmed Example Feature code 1 enter 1 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the code number for the area of the feature being programmed Example Code 3 enter 3 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the CO line buttons P78 13 01 N that will be associated with this feature 02 N Y Example CO button 01 enter 0 1 The system will designate whether the CO button LED is on off Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required Press SPACE to display next CO button LED To Exit Program Store Data P78 13 01 N A store data press CR 02 N Y B Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered P78 for this program P C To exit this program press CR NOTE Program 79 uses Type 2 procedure 41 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM AL PROGRAM 80 DIGITAL AND ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE RINGING TONES ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the MODE prompt enter P R O G CR P Enter Program N
213. TWORK ESSE N CO LINE B WEATHER FIGURE 8 TEST MODE FUNGTION DIAGRAM 2 Establish a talk path between a remote station and the time or weather service via a CO to connection through STRATA or DK16 10 13 The procedures in the tables provide ex amples of the tvpes of tests and functions that can be accomplished with the Test Mode These proce dures do not cover all the possible tests that can be performed remotelv however bv using the prin ciples given other tests are possible 11 LCD MESSAGE MODE 11 00 General 11 01 This mode allows a local or remote terminal to set Called and Calling Station LCD messages for station users see Table RM BO BR The mes sages be svstem or station tvpe and are stored in their respective memorv locations when set 11 10 Remote Called Station Message Mode 11 11 Allows the terminal to set a Called Station Message for an originating station with the destina tion of the message being a station or group of STRATA DK16 DK8 CO LINE A IMDU OR EXT MODEM STATION CKT Digital Telephone XX CO to CO CONNECTION CO LINE C stations 11 12 When the message is set the Msg LED s on the destination station s flash 11 13 When adestination station calls the originat ing station the message is displaved on the desti nation station s LCD Mode 94 To edit and or review a Called Station Message before setting it use this mode It will
214. Telephone Upgrades 4 11 Digital telephones can be upgraded with the following subassemblies Integrated Data Interface Unit PDIU DI PDIU DI2 A Digital telephone can be upgraded with a PDIU DI PDIU DI2 to provide the telephone with data switching capabilities 2000 series Digital Telephones usethe PDIU DI2 and 1000 series Digital Telephones use the PDIU DI PDIU DI2 cannot be installed on a telephone if ADM is installed Add on Module ADM A 2000 series Digital Telephone can be upgraded with an ADM to provide 20 Direct Station Selection buttons on STRATA DK16 or 10 DSS buttons 8 speed dial buttons one night transfer button and one all call page button on STRATA The 1000 series Digital Telephone models cannot support ADMs ADM cannot be installed on a telephone if PDIU DI2 is installed Off hook Call Announce Upgrade DVSU A Digital telephone that must receive Off hook Call Announce must be upgraded with a DVSU LoudRinging Bell Headset Upgrade HHEU A digital telephone can be upgraded with an HHEU to provide a dual interface for the Loud Ringing Bell feature and or a headset Simulta neously with PDIU DI2 or ADM 4 20 Electronic Telephone Upgrades 4 21 On STRATA DK16 electronic telephones can be upgraded with the following subassem blies 3 9 INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 MARCH 1993 Off hook Call Announce Upgrade HVSU2 or HVSU HVSI An electronic telephone must be
215. U any type or INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SEGTION 100 816 206 MARGH 1993 DIU amp ADM RD PI DIU amp ADM RD P1 CARBON gt o gt E 2 2 o gt DVSU DIU amp DVSU REDI RED FIGURE 6 7 FIGURE 6 8 DKT2010 H STRAP AND CONNECTOR DKT2010 SD DKT2020 S AND DKT2020 SD LOCATIONS STRAP AND CONNECTOR LOCATIONS EX POWER W101 W102 1020H BEEP W301 1020H W304 1020SD CARBON EX POWER DKT1020H 102080 ROOM p NOISE SWITCH Z EX SP STRAP W204 1020H W305 1020SD FIGURE 6 9 1000 SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE STRAP AND CONNECTION LOCATIONS 6 7 INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SEGTION 100 816 206 MARGH 1993 version and the integrated data interface unit PDIU DI at the same time but 2000 series digital telephones can support an HHEU and a PDIU DI2 at the same time 4 Connect the HESC 65A cable to P601 of the HHEU both HHEU1A versions and the HHEU2 have P601 if the Loud Ringing Bell option is required Figure 6 11 Refer to Section 100 816 207 for HESB installation 3 32 HHEU Upgrade Installation HHEU Install procedures the Loud Ringing Bell headset upgrade HHEU in accordance with the following steps 5A For the V 3 HHEU1 If only the headset is 1 Loosen the four captive screws securing the telephone base Figure 6 1 and remove the base N Using a screwdriver or other suitable tool remove the plastic tab located on the back of the b
216. U DI 10 02 Both DIUs can be connected to standard Electronic Industries Association EIA RS 232 asynchronous serial data devices EIA devices are divided into two categories data communication equipment DCE and data terminal equipment DTE Common DCE devices are modems and some printers common DTE devices are personal computers ASCII terminals and some printers The PDIU DI operates like a DCE and connects directly to DTE devices using standard RS 232 cables Depending on how its internal jumper plugs are configured the PDIU DS can either operate like a DTE and connect to DCE devices or operate like a DCE device and connect to a DTE device In mostapplications DTE and DCE devices exchange data between each other via the standard RS 232 cable connection 10 03 DIUs can function with DCE and DTE de vices at data speeds of up to 19 2 kbps However keyboard dialing using AT commands from a PC 1 34 or terminal connected to a DIU is limited to 9600 bps A speed of 19 2 kbps can be achieved when dialing from a PDIU Dl equipped digital telephone dialpad but many PC software programs do not yet handle 19 2 kbps in an error free manner Also for a 19 2 Kbps operation the computer or terminal s COM port must be specified to function at 19 2 Kbps Some computer COM ports like those used in older IBM XT type computers will not operate at 19 2 without errors DIU data transmis sion speed is set by the first AT command that th
217. UNIT 16 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 16 00 General 16 01 The KCOU comes factory installed in the Base Key Service Unit Figure 5 3 if necessary it can be removed and replaced 16 10 KCOU Removal 1 Make sure the Power Supply 5016 DC power switch is turned off 2 Loosen and remove screws 1 and 2 Figure 5 23 3 Pull back plastic stand off tab and pull up on KCOU until P7 is unplugged 4 Pull wires on P6 and remove P6 connector from Base Unit BASE UNIT MOTHERBOARD FIGURE 5 23 KCOU PCB INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU amp PCB SECTION 100 816 205 MARCH 1993 16 20 KCOU Replacement 1 Make sure the Power Supply 5016 DC power switch is off 2 Mate and connect KCOU P6 cable connector to P6 on Base Unit motherboard so that the red wire is aligned as shown in Figure 5 23 Position KCOU as shown in Figure 5 23 Mate and connect KCOU P7 to P7 onthe Base Unit motherboard S 5 Secure plastic stand off tab and install screws 1 and 2 6 Set SW400 475 to appropriate position In most cases set to the normal position NOR if CO lines are connected to a PBX or are in close proximity to the Central Office setto the PAD position to provide a 3 db loss in signal level E E F E E oe PLASTIC STAND OFF sw400 FOR coi SW425 FOR 2 SW450 FOR CO3 SW475 FOR CO4 INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 17 DK16 POWER FAILUR
218. US CONTROLS AND INTERFACE 5 31 KCDU CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS 5 33 5 iii INSTALLATION DK16 KSU amp SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 IMPORTANT INITIAL INSTALLATION NOTES These minimum installation steps must be carried out for proper svstem operation 1 Set the SW1 switch in the Base Unit ON BATTERY OPERATION otherwise all programmed customer data will be lost on power down If required install KSTU and KARCU in the Base Unit If the svstem is configured with an Expansion Unit follow the order prescribed below a Install PDKU PEKU PSTU PESU or KCDU in Slot 04 b If installing two KCDUS install KCDU in Slot 05 The other KCDU should be installed Slot 04 If the system is configured with a PCOU install it in Slot 05 The system cannot be configured with both a PCOU and KCDU in the Expansion Unit d If the system is configured with a PIOU or PIOUS install it in Slot 06 Slot 07 should be reserved for future use Initialize Programs 00 97 by running Program 90 Run Program 92 Enter the hardware configuration with Program 03 exit the programming mode turn power OFF for five seconds then turn power back ON WHEN LATER ADDING KSU PCBs Install new PCBs and set the new configuration with Program 03 Turn power OFF for five seconds after running Program 03 Program
219. VIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS GENERAL Primary power Input AC AC frequency Power Environmental specifications Operating temperature Operating humidity Storage temperature Power supply DC voltage output specification Battery charger characteristics DK16 only QSTU KSTU PSTU or PESU circuits 1 amp 2 Ring voltage Ringing capability GROUND 1 THIRD WIRE GROUND TO AC POWER CORD THIRD WIRE AC GROUND L D POWER SUPPLY A ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GROUND FIGURE 2 4 KSU GROUNDING DIAGRAM DK8 OR DK16 KSU 3 85 135VAC 50 60 Hz DK8 46 watts maximum DK16 75 watts maximum 32 104 F 0 40 C 20 80 relative humidity without condensation 4 158 F 20 70 C DK16 24VDC 26 3 27 8VDC 4 5 5 5VDC 4 5 5 5VDC DK8 24VDC 426 3 27 8VDC 4 5 5 5VDC Note 5V converter on KSU PCB Charger current limiting Nominal float voltage 2 275 volts cell Charge current 0 7 amps maximum Battery discharge cut off voltage 20 5 0 5VDC Square wave output with high low option jumper Low position 130 20VDC peak to peak no load High position 190 25VDC peak to peak no load Two ringers maximum per circuit high or low position 2 Connect the meter probes between the two main AC voltage terminals white and black wires on the wall outlet The reading obtained should be between 100 120 VAC Move one of the meter probes t
220. WITCH CIRCUIT BREAKER RIGHT SIDE MODULAR CONNECTORS J4 4 J3 ir MOUNTING HOLE Onn CO2 CJ CO1 VOLUME CONTROL PFI STANDARD TELEPHONE ETE P5 AMPHENOL JACK TO MOH BGM SOURCE J7 6000 PAGE TO PAGE AMP J6 MOH MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE AND SCREW KFCU CONNECTOR NOR FIGURE 5 3 DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT INTERIOR TIE WRAP HOLDER PAD SWITCH ASSIGNMENTS SWA00 1 SW425 CO2 SW450 SW475 4 5 3 SCREW INSTALLATION DK16 KSU amp SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 4 10 11 12 13 Secure screws approximately two thirds of the way into the top two holes on the mounting surface Hang the unit from the top two screws and then secure the screws completely into the mounting surface Finish securing the unit to the mounting sur face by completley screwing the bottom two screws into the wall Ground system according to Chapter 2 para graph 4 Connect applicable wiring modular CO line cords 25 pair amphenol connector cable etc to the Base Key Service Unit and then fasten wiring to the unit with the tie wrap that comes with the base unit Figure 5 4 Remove amphenol connector clamp from plastic bag that comes with the Base Unit Fasten the clamp to hold the amphenol connector Connect Reserve batteries per Paragraph 2 4
221. Y 17 K Y GN 43 K GN Y 18 Y BR_ 44 K BR Y_ 19 K Y S 45 K SY 20 K V BL 46 K BL V 21 K V O 47 K Ov 22 K V GN 48 K GN 23 K V BR 49 K 24 K VS 50 V S V 25 CIRCUIT 2 DOOR PHONE A MDFB REAR VIEW Joo poy CIRCUIT 3 DK8 DDCB ATS Jeo oo x 5 Joo ek DOOR PHONE MDFB A B C HKSU CIRCUIT 4 DK8 DDCB N N eu AB AB D D T5 VOICE DATA GND R5 VOICE DATA 2 PAIR PT5 MODULAR PR5 B SEE TABLE 8 D CORDS 4 N l 2 gt To N 21 N N ill CIRCUIT 6 Az Sal Gray CIRCUIT 7 MDFB DOOR PHONE B OR DOOR LOCK CIRCUIT 8 CONTROL ill MDFB DOOR PHONE C NI
222. ach button LED has a different meaning depending on the program number The status of this data is reviewed changed and stored in system memory using Type 1 program procedures Type 2 All Type 2 programs follow the same entry procedure however they require port number and button LED entries Each button LED has a different meaning depending on the program number Type3 Inthistype program the information shown inthe System Record Sheet indicates the data to be stored in system memory Each program has a different meaning and the data is reviewed changed or stored in memory using an individual procedure for each program 8 30 Multiple Station Range Programming 8 31 Some programs select options for individual stations where represents the port number being programmed To save time it is possible to program all ports or a range of ports simultane ously 8 32 Multiple station programming is accomplished by substituting arangeofports 11 forthe port number part of the program Example all ports 00 0 9 DK8 or 00 1 9 DK16 8 33 When the multiple station range is entered the terminal displays existing data as follows Y or N YorN indicates if a button LED is ON or OFF if DATA is the same for all ports in the 11 SEGTION 100 816 600 1993 dialed group Y ON N LED OFF U If DATAis not the same for all ports U indicates that the b
223. agraph 2 the Base Unit comes standard with four CO lines and eight digital telephone circuits already installed 15 10 Built in CO Line Circuits 15 11 The four standard loop start CO line circuits are on a printed circuit board PCB called the KCOU which is installed on the motherboard at the factory Figure 5 23 The KCOU circuits are iden P2A BASE UNIT CONNECTORS FIGURE 5 22 KARCU PCB tical to the PCOU and KCDU CO line circuits The KCOU also has four PAD 3 dB switches SWA00 SW425 SW450 and SW475 to reduce exces sive loudness caused by a nearby CO or PBX telephone system For wiring and programming considerations see the PCOU instructions in Para graph 8 The Base Unit circuits are fixed and are assigned to Base Unit virtual equipment slots as follows 8 digital station circuit to slot 01 4 CO line circuits KCOU to slot 02 and 4 standard tele phone circuits KSTU to slot 3 15 20 Digital Telephone Circuits 15 21 The eight digital telephone circuits that come standard with the system are integrated into the motherboard in the Base Unit These circuits are indentical to the digital circuits found on the PDKU and KCDU The motherboard does not have to be configured for the digital circuits to operate For wiring and programming considerations see the PDKU instructions in Paragraph 7 15 30 Base Unit CO Line Digital Station Circuit Wiring 15 31 Refer to Section 100 816 208 for details P2B BASE
224. aker RCA Jack Standard e Standard Telephones 25 pair Amphenol e Other Single line Devices e Alternate BGM Source e Fax machine e Voice mail devices DTMF ABR e Automatic Busy Redial Internal Receiver KARCU e Standard Telephone Ports e Interprets Tones e DISA Feature Cartridge e Future Feature Upgrades Control Relav Choice of one 25 pair Amphenol e MOH Source Control e Night Bell Control e BGM Mute Control Customer supplied equipment not offered Toshiba Telecommunication Svstems Division INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 MARCH 1993 TABLE 3 E DK16 EXPANSION KEY SERVICE UNIT PCBs 8 digital telephone circuits 8 electronic telephone circuits Circuits per PCB Digital telephones with or without PDIU DI2 or ADM DDSS console PDIU DSs DDCB Electronic telephones HDSS console BGM source EOCU PCB for OCA Standard telephones 25 pair amphenol 25 pair amphenol 25 pair amphenol Voice mail ports Background music source PSTU 8 standard telephone circuits Off premises stations Other similar devices Standard same as PSTU Electronic same as PEKU except PESU does not support HDSS console 2 standard telephone 4 electronic telephone circuits standard electronic telephone ports PCOU KCDU PIOU PIOUS 4 CO line circuits lines 2 CO line circuits 4 digital telephone circuits
225. al Port 04 of the Base Unit Digital telephone circuit set and to circuit 1 of the KCDU or PDKU Logical Port 12 in the Expansion Unit Each DDCB door lock control installed reduces the sys tem door phone capacity of six by one Any elec tronic or digital telephone can be equipped with a button for each of the door locks Install each DDCB door lock control as follows DDCB Installation 1 On DK8 connect applicable digital telephone circuit Logical Port 02 or 03 to the DDCB KSU modular jack see Figure 7 9 and Figure 8 4 2 On DK16 connect the applicable digital tele phone circuit Logical Port 04 or 12 to the DDCB HKSU modular jack see Figure 7 9 and Figure 8 4 1 8 3 Onthe DDCB set SW1 tothe DOOR position and SW2 to the LOCK position In Program 77 1 set the door unlock activa tion for three or six seconds and enable the applicable port for DDCB connection and specifv if door phones should ring over exter nal page at night In Program 77 2 enable the DDCB B jack for door lock operation and specify 1 or 5 rings when door button is pressed 4 6 In Program 79 specify door phone ringing assignments 7 InProgram 39 assign Unlock Door buttons to the desired stations 8 Check each Unlock Door button from each station DDCB modular B jack pins 3 and 4 will momentarily close three or six seconds when the appropriate Unlock Door button is pressed ALARM SENSOR NORMAL CLOSE
226. al electronic telephones for headset or HESB 23 loud bell option a or CIRCUIT 6 All cable 24 AWG max 40 ohm loop resistance from OT __ PEKU to electronic telephone 1000 ft CIRCUIT 7 OT 47 CIRCUIT 8 49 50 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK K W BL_ 26 KBLW 1 K w o 27 K 2 K W GN 28 K GN W 3 K W BR 29 BR w 4 K 5 30 S W 5 KR BL 31 KBL R 6 K R O 32 K O R 7 K R GN 33 K 8 K 34 BR R 9 K 5 35 K S R 10 BK BL 36 11 K 37 O BK 12 K 38 GN BKI 13 39 14 5 40 K S BK 15 YBL 41 16 42 17 K Y GN 43 18 K 44 19 K 5 45 K S V 20 46 21 v o 47 22 K V GN 48 23 49 BR v_ 24 K VS 50 V S V 25 O LLI z Q gt lt L LLI m
227. al level drop to or from the PBX or CO when setto the PAD position The switch comes from the factory set at NOR for normal meaning no PAD loss INSTALLATION DK8 KSU amp PCB SECTION 100 816 204 MARCH 1993 4 11 7 20 QCDU Installation Procedure 7 21 Install the QCDU in accordance with the following steps Figure 4 7 1 Remove the PCB from its protective packag ing 2 If the system is located within one mile of the CO or PBX telephone system set db PAD switch SW101 to the PAD position 3 Make sure that the power supply switch is OFF INSTALLATION DK8 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 204 MARGH 1993 MODULAR JACK L KNOCK OUT JACK COVER WHEN SMDR TTY IS INSTALLED 2 TAKE OUTJACK COVER WHEN PFT IS CONNECTED STORE THE JACK COVER THAT HAS BEEN TAKEN OUT IN THE JACKCOVER HOLDER 2 REINSTALL THE JACK COVER WHEN THE PFT TELEPHONE IS UNPLUGGED FIGURE 4 9 MODULAR JACK COVER REMOVAL AND STORAGE 4 Slide front edge and FG wire of QCDU under 6 Remove the knock out from the KSU cover the System Frame Ground Bar align and or CO4 access slot and store the knock insert QCDU connector J1 intothe motherboard out in the slots provided in the KSU base connector J9 for first J10 for 4 Figure 4 9 second and apply firm even pressure to ensure proper mating of the connectors Make 7 30 QCDU Wiring sure the edge of the QCDU nextto the connec tor J1 snaps firmly i
228. amming considerations see the QCDU instructions in Paragraph 7 12 20 Built in Digital Telephone Circuits 12 21 The four digital telephone circuits that come standard with the system are integrated into the motherboard in the KSU These circuits are identi cal to the digital circuits found on the QCDU The motherboard does not have to be configured for the digital circuits to operate For wiring and program ming considerations see the QCDU instructions in Paragraph 7 12 30 KSU Motherboard CO Line Digital Station Circuit Wiring 12 31 Refer to Section 100 816 208 for details e Station circuits DK8 MDF to KSU Amphenol Wiring Diagram e CO lines DK8 MDF TO CO Line KSU and QCDU Wiring Diagram 12 40 Power Failure Telephone Installation 1 Remove the RJ1 1 cover Figure 4 9 from the PFT jack and store the jack cover 2 Connect the power failure telephone 500 2500 type standard telephoneto the PFT jack Refer to the DK8 MDF to CO Line Wiring Diagram in Section 100 816 208 12 50 Music On Hold MOH Background Music BGM Source Connection 12 51 Connect the MOH BGM source to the MOH RCA jack Figure 4 7 in accordance with Music Source Configuration A in Section 100 816 207 12 60 External Page Output Connection 12 61 Connect the external page system to the 6000 PAGE output jack Figure 4 7 to an external amplifier in accordance with the External Page Installation guidelines in Section 100 816 207 4
229. and the PDIU DI2 attaches to 2000 series Digital Telephones 7 10 PDKU Hardware Options 7 11 The PDKU supports the hardware options noted below Unlike the other PCBs there are no controls on the PDKU that need to be set for options Internal option e none External option e DDSS console e PDIU DS e PDIU DI PDIU DI2 e DDCB NOTE There are two versions of the PDKU PDKUT and PDKU2 These versions are identical except for the number of Data Interface Units DIUs they can support see Paragraphs 7 14 and 7 15 Also supports continuous DTMF tones with 2000 series digital tele phones but PDKU1 does not support continu ous DTMF tones 7 12 Hardware Configuration 7 13 DDSS Console Configuration Referto Sta tion Apparatus Installation Section 100 816 206 for installation procedures for the DDSS console The DDSS console requires dedicated use of Cir cuit 8 of the PDKU 7 14 PDIU DS Configuration Refer to Peripher als Installation Section 100 816 207 for installa tion procedures for the PDIU DS A PDIU DS can be connected to Circuits 1 7 on a PDKU1 or 50 PIN AMPHENOL CONNECTOR FEMALE D BACKPLANE CONNECTOR l FIGURE 5 12 PDKU INTERFACE CONNECTION 9 16 Circuits 1 8 a PDKU2 the circuit must dedicated to the PDIU DS 7 15 PDIU DI PDIU DI2
230. anufacturer s in stallation documentation 5 Program the STRATA DK16 system as follows e Program 10 3 Enables the appropriate PEKU or PESU PCB ports for amplifier connection Only enable the ports that will be connected with the amplifier s Program 15 5 Enables appropriate CO lines for tandem connection Program 10 1 LEDs 19 and 20 must be ON Program 10 2 LED 18 and 19 must be ON 3 TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS SECTION 100 816 208 MARCH 1993 Strata INSTALLATION CHAPTER EIGHT WIRING DIAGRAMS PARAGRAPH 1 2 2 10 2 20 2 30 FIGURE 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 13 8 14 8 15 8 16 8 17 8 18 8 19 8 20 8 21 8 22 8 23 8 24 8 25 8 26 8 27 8 28 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 TABLE OF 5 SUBJECT PAGE GENERAL ua T H 8 1 WIRING DIAGRAMS u u mt 8 1 Station Wiring DISOEAITIS ues sci beds b 8 1 GO Line Wining EET TIE 8 1 PIOU and PIOUS Wiring Diagrams Rm run 8 1 FIGURE LIST TITLE PAGE SECONDARY PROTEC TOR DIAGRAM 8 5 DK8 MDF WIRING TO KSU AMPHENOL STATION AND RELAY ge epe lH HH 8 7 DK8 MDF WIRING TO CO LINES KSU AND QODU 8 8 DK8 DK16
231. ar connecting cable is required to connect the HESB to the HHEU in each telephone requiring the Loud Ringing Bell feature See HHEU and HESB HHEU Total One HHEU must be installed in each digital telephone that supports a headset or connects to an HESB for the Loud Ringing Bell feature See HESC 65A PDIU DI2 Total for 2000 series Digital Telephones If ADM is installed PDIU DI2 cannot be installed PDIU D1 Total for 1000 series Digital Telephones Digital telephones must be equipped with a PDIU DI2 or a PDIU DI to transmit and receive voice and data calls 3 13 INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 MARCH 1993 DK8 WORKSHEET 3 PERIPHERALS AND UPGRADES continued Miscellaneous Peripherals HESB Amplifier Speaker Total 1 One HESB and HHEU is required for each digital telephone with the Loud Ringing Bell feature 2 One HESB is optional to provide single zone external page connected to the KSU s 600 ohm external page output Customer supplied amplifiers speakers may be used in place of the HESB 3 One HESB is optional to provide a talkback amplifier page speaker connected to the KSU s 600 ohm external page output Customer supplied amplifiers speakers may be used in place of the HESB Talkback requires MDFB also DDCB MDFB Door Phone Total DDCBs Total MDFBs The MDFB plugs into the DDCB to provide a door phone Each DDCB can support up to three MDFBs a maximum of two DDCBs and 6 MDFBs can be
232. ase Figure 6 1 the HHEU modular connector for the headset will be accessed through this opening If installing V 3 HHEU1 set the SW601 switch on the HHEU to HEADSET for the headset or loud bell application Figure 6 10 V 4 HHEU1 and 2 not have this switch because both of these upgrades are automatically set for the headset loud bell application COMPONENT SIDE OF HHEU R607 V 1 V 3 N ASS BHEU vx i gt HHEU1 lt V 4 or HHEU2 connected to the HHEU cut both sides of the R607 resistor Figure 6 10 then remove the resistor to eliminate electrical contact NOTE Do not cut the R607 resistor if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing Bell even ifa headsetis also installed on the HHEU 5B For the V 4 HHEU1 and the HHEU2 If only the headset is connected to the HHEU cut the OCA strap Figure 6 10 NOTE Do not cut the OCA strap if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing FEED THROUGH FOR HESC 65 A CABLE TO HESB HESC 65 CABLE OR HESC 65A CABLE FIGURE 6 10 HHEU INSTALLATION FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONE FIGURE 6 11 HESC 65A CABLING 6 8 Bell even if a headset is also installed on the HHEU 6 Position the HHEU PCB on the standoffs inside the base Figure 6 10 and secure with the two provided screws 7A For 2000 series digital telephones refer to Figure 6 7 DKT2010 H or F
233. ase and secure it with its four captive screws INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SEGTION 100 816 206 MARGH 1993 3 60 Microphone Speaker Sensitivitv Adjust ment Speakerphones Oniv 3 61 High ambient noise levels mav cause the speaker on some digital telephone speakerphone models to cut off frequently To prevent this for the 1000 series digital telephone models perform the following procedure to make the telephones less sensitive to the noise The 2000 series Tele phones are adjusted per the instructions in the Note after the procedure 1 Loosen the four captive screws securing the 1000 series Digital Telephone speakerphone base Figure 6 1 and remove the base N For the 1000 series speakerphone model DKT1020 SD refer to Figure 6 9 and lo cate the ROOM NOISE switch Push the switch carefully to the H high position for lowsensitivity when there is high background noise in the area surrounding the telephone Co Reinstall the telephone base and secure it with its four captive screws NOTES 1 To make the 2000 series Digital Tele phone speakerphone models less sensi tive to loud surrounding noise hold down Mic button then press the up but ton The less sensitive level will be set after the third flash of the Mic LED To reset the sensitivity back to the normal level hold down the Mic button then press the down button The normal level will be set after the third flash of the
234. ation Power Supply Consid erations 6 31 Whenever removing or installing PCBs it is recommended that the power supply be OFF 7 CO LINE DIGITAL TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT QCDU 7 00 General 7 01 The QCDU provides one loop start CO line circuit and two digital telephone circuits The QCDU digital telephone circuits can support digital tele phones PDIU DIs PDIU DI2s ADMs connected to the telephones and PDIU DSs The QCDU does not support aDDSS console or DDCB Amaximum of two QCDU PCBs may be installed in the KSU INSTALLATION DK8 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 204 MARGH 1993 WARNING O60 50505 0 0 9494959 969696969069090 SMDR TTY 3 PAIR MODULAR JACK J6 25 PAIR AMPHENOL JACK FOR TELEPHONE TIP RING AND RELAY CONTACT FEMALE dL PFT RUT J MODLULAR JACK SYSTEM VR701 VOLUME m FRAME CONTROL GROUND BAR 6000 FIGURE 4 7 8 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD INSTALLATION 4 10 SVSTEM FRAME GROUND BAR FIGURE 4 8 QCDU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS 7 02 The QCDU is shown in Figure 4 8 7 10 QCDU Configuration 7 11 The QCDU may have to be configured to control excessive loudness if the system is close to a CO or installed behind a PBX telephone system It does not have to be configured for anything else The decibel db PAD switch SW101 controls the loudness by providing a 3 db sign
235. ause 1 8 Tone T at beginning of digits to convert Clear Cas first digit then CR To Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR B Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered for this program C To exit this program press f f CR REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM BJ PROGRAM 55 2 LCR MODIFIED DIGITS END ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the MODE prompt enter R O G CR P Enter Program Number 55 Press CR Enter Modified Digits Table Number Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required modified digits table number 1 6 Example Enter table number 1 enter 1 Enter Code 2 up to 22 digits The system will display any previously entered digits up to 22 1234 P3 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter new numbers if required Example Enter 12 3 4 P 3 NOTE Pause codes may also be entered To enter pauses press P plus the pause number 1 8 Special Code Input Pause 1 8 Tone atbeginning of digits to convert Clear Cas first digit then CR To Exit Program Store Data P55 12 up to 22 digits A To store data press CR 1234 P3 B Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered P55 for this program P C To exit this program press CR
236. by the station user Default access codes are e 1 35 K2 zone 36 K3 zone 37 4 38 zones 39 Multi zone page output rating is 30W maxi mum at 300 ohms 5 14 Anallzone page code 39 15 also available as an option see Program 10 2 When the all page code is dialed all four relays are activated to permit simultaneous paging to all speaker zones and all digital and electronic telephone speakers Install this option in accordance with the following steps refer to Figure 7 16 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 DK8 KSU OR DK16 BASE KEV SERVICE UNIT e PAGE 600 OHM RCA JACK JACKETED TWISTED 24AWG DK8 KSU OR DK16 BASE UNIT NOTE BGM over external page option must be turned off Dial Intercom 490 from Station 10 EXTERNAL PAGING AMP SPEAKER 66 BLOCK PIN NUMBERS 33 25 PAIR AMPHENOL 34 FIGURE 7 15 DK8 AND DK16 AND SEPARATE BGM USING SAME AMPLIFIER 1 Connect the input from the paging amplifier an RJ11 jack to the J7 600 ohm RCA Jack on the Base Unit Or direct connect J7 to Amp using a standard audio cable with RCA plugs Connect the BGM music source to the music amplifier input Connect the paging amplifier s output to each PGIN of the PIOU K1 K4 relays and the amplifier s output to each ofthe zone A s zo
237. call page button Fig ure 6 20 for the STRATA One ADM can be installed on any or all 2000 series telephone 16 max on DK16 or 8 max on DK8 INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SEGTION 100 816 206 MARGH 1993 4 SCREWS ADM CONNECTION PLATE PROVIDED WITH ADM T 2 REMOVE HANDSET ADM CABLE HANGER SEE SUPPLIED WITH ADM 2 42 STEP 2 __ TELEPHONE NOT USED ON DK16 P2 _ 2000 SERIES 1 VIEW OF DIGITAL TELEPHONE FIGURE 6 18 ADD ON MODULE INSTALLATION Night Transfer Note The button assignments for DSS 10 19 Note This DSS button Speed Dial 5010 17 All Call Page and assignment is fixed and Night Transfer button assignments are fixed cannot be changed and cannot be changed FIGURE 6 19 FIGURE 6 20 DK16 ADD ON MODULE DSS BUTTON DK8 ADD ON MODULE DSS BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS ASSIGNMENTS 6 18 TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS SECTION 100 816 207 MARCH 1993 Strata INSTALLATION GHAPTER SEVEN PERIPHERAL INSTALLATION PARAGRAPH 1 2 2 10 2 20 3 3 00 3 10 3 20 3 30 4 4 10 4 20 5 5 00 5 10 6 6 10 6 20 7 7 00 7 10 FIGURE 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 TABLE OF 5 SUBJECT PAGE G
238. can be added to the KSU to provide one CO line circuit and two digital telephone circuits A maximum of two QCDUs may be added to provide a total of four additional digital telephone circuits and two additional CO line circuits Another op tional printed circuit board called the QSTU can be added to the DK8 KSU to provide two standard telephone circuits 2 12 Peripherals The DK8 Key Service Unit can support a number of peripherals which are not considered as stations and do not affect the maxi mum station and CO line capacities A customer supplied Music on hold source optional reserve power battery and charger a customer supplied emergency standard telephone for system power failure occurrences and an amplifier with speaker for paging and night ringing can all be connected to the Key Service Unit Table 3 C Arelay contact is also provided to control one of the following 3 1 INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 MARCH 1993 peripherals Music on hold source night bell or page amplifier mute control 2 20 The DK16 Base Key Service Unit 2 21 Station and CO Lines The DK16 Base Key Service Unit comes standard with eight digital telephone circuits ports and four CO line circuits Table 3 D An optional printed circuit board called the KSTU can be added to the unit to provide four standard telephone circuits ports 2 22 Peripherals The DK16 Base Key Service Unit can support a number of peripherals which are
239. connected to the system Each DDCB requires a digital telephone circuit The MDFB may also be connected to the HESB amplifier speaker to provide page talkback NOTE Worksheet 4 System Power Check is not required for DK8 The DK8 power supply will support any DK8 maximum configuration 3 14 INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 DK16 WORKSHEET 1 STATION AND CO LINE TOTALS 1 DIGITAL PORTS CIRCUITS Device Quantity DDSS Consoles 2 max DDCBs 2 max PDIU DSs 16 max Digital Telephones with or without PDIU DIs or ADMs 16 max 2 ELECTRONIC PORTS CIRCUITS Device Quantity HDSS Console 1 max Alternate BGM Source 1 max Conference Amplifier 1 max Electronic Telephones 8 max 3 STANDARD PORTS CIRCUITS Device Quantity Maximum of 12 items total including Standard Telephones Standard Telephones Other Devices Voice Mail Auto Attendant Fax Modem Alternate Background Music BGM Source 4 CO LINES Number of CO lines required 8 maximum x Ports Per Total Digital Ports 16 max X 2 X 1 X 2 X 1 Total Electronic Ports 8 max X Ports Per X 1 X 1 X 1 X 1 X 1 X 1 Total Standard Ports 12 maximum 3 15 Ports Used Ports Used Ports Used MARCH 1993 INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 MARCH 1993 DK16 WORKSHEET 2 KEY SERVICE UNIT AND PCBs 1 From Worksheet 1 ent
240. ct a closed condition solder W3 to the normal open position e To detect an open condition solder W3 to the normal closed position 8 03 Alarm Sensor Wiring Refer to Figure 7 23 and connect the facility alarm system relay con tacts to the PIOU PIOUS PCB 9 DK16 NIGHT RINGING OVER EXTERNAL ZONE PAGE 9 00 In systems shared by two tenants each tenant s CO lines can be assigned to night ring separate PIOU external page zones Figure 7 16 This feature can also be used in one tenant svstems 9 01 With shared svstems for example tenant 1 s night ringing CO lines could be programmed to ring PIOU external page zones 1 and 2 while tenant 2 s PIOU PIN NUMBERS 25 PAIR CABLE ALMT 36 PIOU PCB 25 PAIR CABLE NORMAL CLOSE FIGURE 7 23 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 lines could be programmed to ring zones 3 and 4 In non shared svstems night ringing CO lines can be assigned to ring all of the zones or just selected zones 9 02 The following programs must be used to assign CO lines to ring selected PIOU page zones e Program 78 1 Assigns CO lines tenant 1 and tenant 2 that will night ring over PIOU external page zones e Program 15 5 Assigns CO lines to tenant 1 or tenant 2 Lines are initialized as tenant 1 e Program 77 1 LEDs 10 13 Assigns tenant 1 and tenant 2 CO lines to night ring specific PIOU external page zones LED 06 mustalso be ON in Program 77 1 e Program 39
241. ctions 5 11 The DDSS console which can operate with a digital or electronic telephone preferably an LCD model can connect only to Circuit 8 of the Base Unit digital telephone circuit set or Circuit 8 of the PDKU Standard twisted single pair or two pair jacketed telephone cable maximum 1000 feet 303 meters is used for the connection To accom modate the DDSS console connection the instru ment end of the cable should be terminated in a modular station connector block RJ 11 Refer to Wiring Diagrams Section 100 816 208 for wiring interconnecting details including cable length limi tations see Table 8 D 1 0099 console cable runs must have the following e Cable splits single or double e Cable bridges of any length e High resistance or faulty cable splices See Section 100 816 208 for secondary protection information CAUTION When installing the DDSS cable do not run parallel to and within 3 feet of an AC power line AC power lines should be crossed at right 90 angles only In par ticular avoid running station wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures 5 12 DDSS Console Configuration The follow ing considerations should be made when installing DDSS consoles e DDSS consoles can connect only to Circuit 8 of the Base Unit digital telephone circuit set or Circuit 8 of the PDKU A maximum of two DDSS consoles can be installed
242. d To retry press DELETE CR the same time Clear LCD message memory using the procedure on the next page REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM G PROGRAM 92 continued LCD CHARACTER MESSAGE MEM ORY INITIALIZATION ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode PROG At the MODE prompt enter P R CR Enter Program Number 92 Press CR Enter 3 Enter button LED number O 2 Change LED 02 to ON by entering Y Press SPACE Change LED 03 to ON by entering Y Press CR Initialization complete NOTE If program data is not entered correctly CR will not respond To retry press DELETE CR at the same time Clear the timed reminders using the procedure on the next page REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM H PROGRAM 92 continued TIMED REMINDERS INITIALIZATION ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter P R O CR Enter Program Number 92 Press CR Enter 4 Enter button LED number O 2 Change LED 02 to ON by entering Y Press SPACE two times Change key 04 to ON by entering Y Press CR Initialization complete NOTE If program data is not entered correctly CR will not respond To retrv press DELETE CR at the same time To exit this program press f f CR REMOTE
243. d the following warn ing and caution notes 6 1 INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SEGTION 100 816 206 MARGH 1993 WARNINGI 1 Never install the telephone wiring dur ing a lightning storm 2 Never install the telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is spe cifically designed for wet locations 3 Never touch uninsulated telephone wires orterminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the net work interface 4 Usecaution when installing or modify ing telephone lines 5 DSS console Door phone control box or Door phone wiring ex its the building external secondary protection is required See Section 100 816 208 CAUTION When installing the station cable do not run parallel to and within three feet of an AC power line AC power lines should be crossed at right 90 angles only In par ticular avoid running station wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures 2 10 Connecting Digital Telephones to the System 2 11 The following provides information on how to connect digital telephones to the DK8 or DK16 system NOTE Before proceeding see warning and caution notes in Paragraph 2 01 2 12 Digital telephones connect to the digital tele phone ports via the main distribution frame MDF with standard twisted pair jacketed telephone cable Single pair wiring is sufficient in most cases for digital telephones t
244. dard Electronic Telephone Interface Unit PESU via the main distribution frame with standard twisted pair jacketed telephone cable Two pair wiring as a minimum is required for telephone connection However three pair wiring is recommended to permit future up grades such as Off hook Call Announce To accommodate the electronic telephone line cord the cable should be terminated in a modular station connector block RJ 1 1 atthe station loca tion The standard two pair modular electronic telephone cord length is seven feet the maximum allowed length is 25 feet See Wiring diagrams Section 100 816 208 for more details NOTE See Section 100 816 208 for secondary pro tector information 6 2 The overall length of the station cable run from the DK16 key service unit KSU to the telephone must not exceed 1 000 feet 305 meters if using 24 AWG cable 2 30 Connecting Standard Telephones to the System 2 31 The following provides information on how to connect standard telephones to the DK8 or DK16 system NOTE Before proceeding see warning and caution notes in Paragraph 2 01 2 32 Standard telephones connect to standard telephone circuits in the DK8 Standard Telephone Interface Unit QSTU telephone circuits on the DK16 Base Unit Standard Telephone Interface Unit KSTU the DK16 Standard Telephone Inter face Unit PSTU and the DK16 Standard Elec tronic Telephone Interface Unit PESU via the main dist
245. de At the MODE prompt enter R E P T CR gt MODE REPT Enter the station port number for which the speed dial number will be programmed Press 90 19 NOTE If programming system speed dial enter port number 0 O Station Port Number Enter Speed Dial Memorv Location to be Programmed A Press LILI current memorv will displav 10 49 Station 60 99 System B Press SPACE to review each memory location or go to Step 4 ROU N Memory Nothing in location memory 1 To enter speed dial number 20 digits max 20 digit number Press 2 To enter chain dial number 17 digit number Wa e Press A Svstem speed dial location 90 99 Refer to Digital or Electronic Telephone User Guide for information regarding chain dialing Special Entries F Flash P 1 5 or 3 sec Pause Prog 12 L 10 sec Pause N Clear Memorv Special code entrv Intercom Hold New speed dial number To store data press CR NOTE If program entry is not correct CR will not respond To try again press DELETE CR at the same time To Exit the Speed Dial Mode Press Q U I T CR REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600
246. digital circuits are inte grated into the motherboard and the CO line cir cuits are on the KCOU which is attached to the P6 and P7 connectors on the motherboard The com mon control unit like the digital telephone circuits is built into the motherboard 5 10 DK16 Base Unit PCBs 5 11 The Base Unit can support an optional KSTU printed circuit board PCB which provides four standard telephone circuits ports In addition a PCB can be installed to receive DTMF tones and detect busy tone for Automatic Busy Redial ABR operation 5 20 DK16 Expansion Unit PCBs 5 21 The Expansion Unit can support a number of PCBs it can support a PCOU which provides four 9 13 INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU amp PCB SECTION 100 816 205 MARCH 1993 CO line circuits one or two KCDUs which provide two CO line circuits and four digital telephone circuits ports a PDKU which provides eight digital telephone circuits ports a PEKU which provides eight electronic telephone circuits ports a PESU which provides two standard and four electronic telephone circuits ports a PSTU which provides eight standard telephone circuits ports and a PIOU or PIOUS which both provide a port for a Station Message Detail Recording SMDR device an interface for remote maintenance and relay control options 5 22 The DK16 Expansion Unit does not come from the factory with any PCBs installed Any of the PCBs listed above can fit into any of the unit s
247. e DIU receives once it is in the command state if manual dialing or receiving calls in the auto answer default mode the transmission speed is transpar ent IMPORTANT NOTEI To use the PDIU DI or PDIU DS with AT commands communications software or a PC program that performs terminal emu lation must used AT commands cannot be issued from the computer s operating svstem 10 10 Common DIU Connections 10 11 The block diagram in Figure 7 24 illustrates common DIU connections In this example PDIU are connected to personal computers PC1 PC2 and PDIU DSs are connected to a serial printer and modems The personal computer users can transfer files internally print files on the same printer and access the modem pool to send re ceive data to from an external personal computer or dial up data service 10 12 To access these devices a data call connec tion must be established between the DIUs This is accomplished by dialing the destination DIU from a digital telephone dialpad or from a PC keyboard using standard AT dial commands PDIU DIs share the same intercom numbers ports with the digital telephone to which they are connected while PDIU DSs have their own The Intercom and Data Call LEDs on the digital telephone tell the system whether a voice or data call is being made the Intercom LED voice calls and the Data Call LED initiates data calls When dialing from a keyboard with AT commands A T
248. e entered in capital let ters 2 Atthe MODE prompt enter the desired mode name Table RM C TABLE RM C PROGRAMMING PROMPTS Mode Function Mode PROG DUMP Prompt Return Program Data Dump Test LCD Messages Speed Dial No 3 Press the CR key 4 Verify the correct prompt return Table RM C 8 PROGRAM MODE 8 00 General 8 01 Data governing overall system operation and feature execution for the systems are stored in read only memory ROM and cannot be altered in the field However the data controlling operation of the various options both system and station are stored in random access memory RAM and can easily be changed according to individual installa tion requirements 8 02 All options are controlled by selections made in the System Record Sheet An initialization proc ess is provided for verifying predetermined system assignments The installer can then proceed with any necessary changes 8 03 Internal battery power is provided to prevent loss of system data memory in the event of a power failure REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 8 10 System Record Sheets 8 11 Before system data can be programmed the System Record Sheets which contain the customer data base must be available see Programming Section 200 816 302 8 20 Program Types 8 21 There are three types of programs Type 1 All Type 1 programs use the same proce dure however e
249. e fixed They are assigned even if a QSTU is not installed 9 DTMF RECEIVER ABR TONE DETECTOR UNIT QRCU 9 00 General 9 01 The QRCU must be installed to recognize 4 13 INSTALLATION DK8 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 204 MARGH 1993 FIGURE 4 10 QSTU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF tones gener ated by a standard telephone or any other device connected to a standard telephone circuit QSTU and it is required for Direct Inward System Access DISA calls The QRCU circuits are also used to detect busy tone for the Automatic Busy Redial ABR feature and must be installed to allow ABR to operate 4 14 QSTS FACTORY INSTALLED 9 02 The QRCU is shown in Figure 4 11 9 10 QRCU Configuration 9 11 The QRCU does not have to be configured for operation 9 20 QRCU Installation Procedure 9 21 Install the QRCU in accordance with the INSTALLATION DK8 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 204 1993 DK8RCU1AL Lond FIGURE 4 11 QRCU INTERFACE CONNECTORS following steps Figure 4 7 1 Remove the PCB from its protective packag ing 2 Make sure that the power supply switch is OFF 3 Align and insert QRCU connectors J1 and J2 into motherboard connectors J15 and J16 respectively note the component side place ment in Figure 4 7 and apply firm even pressure to ensure proper mating of connec tors Push down until connector
250. e idi Toshiba VP osa Considerations Some features of STRATA DK8 o 22 Hubs id EST programming intended Jor 31 and setting LED 15to ON LEDs 16 and Toshiba VP and are not necessarily available for customer s lied voice mail messaging systems 17 ON TO alow A anid i i ging sy tones and by accessing Program 15 0 and PESU installation instructions These programming features are and 15 3 and enabling CO lineswithARVM e Answer A Tone The STRATA DK8 and DK16 and AROH calls stations will send an answer tone to Toshiba VP 3 The AR signal of some Central Offices is when the station answers a Toshiba VP call not reliable and may occur at times during Disconnect D Tone The STRATA and a CO line voice connection causing the DK16 stations will send a disconnect tone to callto disconnect during a conversation If Toshiba VP when the station hangs up while this occurs disable AROH and ARVM connected to Toshiba VP D Tone is also sentto calls on all CO lines Program 15 0 and 15 3 1 29 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 NOTE DK8 QRCU The KARCU or QRCU allows VM DTMF dialing OR DK16 KARCU VOICE MAIL OR AUTO ATTENDANT MACHINE QSTU CKT 1 amp 2 or PSTU CKT 1 8 or DK16 PESU 1 amp 2 or DK16 KSTU CKT 1 4 QSTU KSTU PSTU PESU CIRCUIT TIP amp RING 25 PIN CABLE 1 PAIR PER PORT 8 CIRCUITS PER PSTU
251. e is assigned Example DSS console number 1 is assigned to telephone number 1 Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required Example Assign DSS console 1 to electronic telephone 2 Enter 2 To Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR B Continue returning to Step 3 until all data has been entered for this program C To exit this program press CR NOTE P28 1 1 2 This program applies to digital and electronic DSS consoles and digital and electronic telephones 30 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM Y PROGRAM 29 DSS CONSOLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt prompt enter CR Enter Program Number P 29 Press 2 9 CR P29 Enter Console Number and Buttonstrip Group Number Press U U Button Group Number 1 3 Console Number 1 2 Enter 2 digit Button Number to be Programmed 01 20 P29 current feature code displays after button entry Key code Enter New 2 or 3 digit Feature Code P29 Press or Button Old Console No code Button group 3 digit code 2 digit code Press SPACE to go to next button P29 or Press CR to st
252. ed configurations Available as a spare unitfor field replacements KARCU STRATA DK16 Optional unit that can be installed in the Base Kev Service Unit to provide a 4 circuit Dual tone Multi frequency receiver for CO lines and standard telephones It also provides busy tone detection for Auto Busy Redial KSTU Standard Telephone Interface Unit STRATA DK16 only Optional printed circuit board that can be installed in the Base Key Service Unit to provide four standard telephone circuits LCD Liquid Crystal Displav Displav used for messaging identification and status that ap pears on some digital and electronictelephones 1 3 INSTALLATION INTRODUCTION SECTION 100 816 201 MARCH 1993 LED Light Emitting Diode Status indicators lo cated on printed circuit boards digital telephones and electronic telephones LSI Large Scale Integration Related to circuit design technology STRATA DK8 and STRATA DK16 printed circuit boards use LSI circuit de sign MDF Main Distribution Frame The wiring frame usuallv located in a phone closet MDFB Door Phone Box A peripheral two wav speaker box option Each MDFB connects to a DDCB A can support as many as three MDFBs OCA Off hook Call Announce PBX Private Branch Exchange Industry stan dard term which refers to a telephone switch usually on premises which serves an individual company and is connected to a public tele phone exchange thro
253. een configured for the appropriate hardware options refer to Para graph 8 10 3 Insertthe into the appropriate slot refer to Paragraph 5 22 and apply firm even pres sure to ensure proper mating of connectors 4 After installing the PEKU gently pull the PCB outward Ifthe connectors are properly mated a slight resistance will be felt 8 30 PEKU Wiring 8 31 Refer to PEKU Wiring Diagrams Section 100 816 208 for wiring interconnecting details 8 40 PEKU Programming Overview 8 41 The following parameters may be specified through programming for the PEKU Program 03 e Specify code 21 to indicate a station line PEKU e Specify code 22 to indicate a PEKU configured for OCA e Specify code 23 to indicate a PEKU configured for an HDSS console e Specify code 24 to indicate a PEKU configured for OCA and an HDSS console Program 10 2 e Used for BGM connection Program 10 3 e Used for external amplifier connection Program 19 e Also used for BGM connection Programs 28 and 29 e Used for HDSS assignments 9 STANDARD TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT PSTU 9 00 General 9 01 The Standard Telephone Interface Unit PSTU provides an interface between standard telephones or two wire devices and the system and it must be installed in the Expansion Unit The PSTU PCB adds eight standard telephone lines to the system The PSTU can also support a Back ground Music BGM source NOTE For the system t
254. ell Headset Jack Interface Upgrade A small subassembly for use inside a digital telephone or a 6500 series electronic telephone that allows a speaker HESB and or a headset to be installed with the station HVSU2 Off hook Call Announce Upgrade A subassembly that enables an electronic tele phone to receive Off hook Call Announce IMDU Remote Maintenance Modem Interface Unit STRATA DK16 subassembly installed on a PIOU or PIOUS PCB in the tional DK16 Expansion Key Service Unit that allowsthe system to be connected with a remote maintenance administration terminal KCDU CO Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit STRATA DK16 only Optional printed circuit board providing two loop start CO line circuits and four digital telephone circuits that can be installed in the Expansion Unit The digital tele phone circuits support the same devices as the PDKU except for the DDSS console KCOU CO Line Interface Unit STRATA DK16 only Factory installed printed circuit board that comes standard with the Base Kev Service Unit to provide four loop start CO line circuits Avail able as a spare unit for field replacements KFCU STRATA DK16 oniv Option feature car tridge that plugs into the Base Unit to provide feature upgrades to DK16 KPSU16 STRATA DK 16 only Power supply that comes factorv installed inthe Base Kev Service Unit This power supplv provides power to the entire svstem in its standard and expand
255. ellow ground wire plug FG2 to TB1 ofthe Base Unit Make sure the plug locks on TB1 See Figure 5 3 and 5 4 Making sure that the Expansion Key Service Unit is flush against the mounting surface markthe location ofthe Expansion Unit mount ing screw hole Figure 5 6 Swing the Expansion Key Service Unit away from the mounting surface and drill a hole at the mark made in Step 7 Install applicable printed circuit boards PCBs see Chapter 5 Section Il after PCBs are installed slide the slot lockto the lock position Figure 5 7 10 Swing the Expansion Key Service Unit back to the mounting surface and secure it to the surface with a screw 11 Connect applicable wiring modular CO line cords 25 pair amphenol connector etc to the PCBs Figure 5 8 12 Fasten the wiring with tie wraps supplied to the bottom of the Expansion and Base Key Service Units Figure 5 8 POWER CORD MODULAR SELF ADHESIVE RUBBER PAD AMPHENOL FIGURE 5 4 gt AMPHENOL CLAMP RCA JACK INSTALLATION DK16 KSU amp PCB SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 NOTES 1 SUPPLIED IN PLASTIC BAG WITH BASE UNIT 2 DO NOT ROUTE POWER CORD WITH OTHER CORDS TIE WRAP MODULAR CORD X5 BASE UNIT AMPHENOL CORD X1 PIN JACK CORD X2 DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT WIRING CONNECTIONS 8 5 INSTALLATION DK16 KSU a
256. er show the minimum clearance requirements for the standard DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT CLEARANCE FRONT VIEW 2 4 12 25 2 4 2 16 BASE KSU 18 gt TOP VIEW 1 5 ma 3 5 3 FEET FIGURE 2 2 DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS INSTALLATION SITE REQUIREMENTS SEGTION 100 816 202 MARGH 1993 DK16 BASE AND EXPANSION UNIT CLEARANCE FRONT VIEW 2 208 18 LI 3 5 lt FIGURE 2 3 DK16 COMBINED BASE AND EXPANSION KEY SERVICE UNIT MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS and optioned STRATA DK16 system Refer to Chapter 4 for DK16 key service unit wall mounting instructions 3 02 The following conditions must be considered when selecting a location for the key service unit s The location MUST BE e Dry and clean e Well ventilated e Well illuminated e Easily accessible The location MUST NOT BE e Subject to extreme heat or cold e Subject to corrosive fumes dust or other air borne contaminants e Subject to excessive vibration e Next to television radio office automation or high frequency equipment 2 2 3 03 If reserve power is to be installed for the STRATA DK16 the batteries will require a well ventilated location close within nine feet to the DKSUB16 the optional Toshiba supplied battery cable is 9 feet in length The STRATA DK8 reserve battery HPFB should be m
257. er 1 Enter 2 3 or 4 SPACE JL 2 80r4 2 To add area codes to table Plan 3 To delete area codes from table 4 SPACE to display area codes in table continue to press SPACE to display more codes Press CR to exit display 51 Enter codes UUL or press SPACE after each code entrv Exit Program Store Data To store data press CR Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered for this program To exit this program press CR REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM BE PROGRAM 52 LCR OFFICE CODE EXCEPTIONS FOR SPECIFIED AREA CODE ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter P R CR gt MODE PROG P Enter Program Number 52 Press CR Define Route Plan Number Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the exception table number 1 8 Example Table 1 enter 1 Enter Action code O The system will print out the currently defined route plan number Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter new plan number if required Example Change to 3 Define Area Code Number Press CR Enter exception table number 1 8 defined in step 3 Enter Action code 1 The system will print ou
258. er provides instructions how to connecttelephonesto the STRATA DK8 andDK16 svstems and how to configure and upgrade them for optional features Procedures for installing di rect station selection consoles and door phones also appear in this chapter 1 10 Tvpes of Telephones 1 11 The STRATA and 16 svstems can support the following telephones e Digital Telephones Installation instructions for digital telephones in this chapter and elsewhere in this manual applv oniv to the Toshiba 2000 and 1000 series Digital Telephones The 2000 series Digital Telephones consist of four mod els the DKT2010 H the DKT2010 SD the DKT2020 S and the DKT2020 SD There are two 1000 series Digital Telephone models the DKT1020 H and the DKT1020 SD e Electronic Telephones DK16oniv The elec tronic telephone instructions here applv to the Toshiba 6500 series Electronic Telephones although there are other electronic telephones the 2000 3000 6000 and 6500 that are compatible with the STRATA DK16 The 6500 series electronic telephones consist of four models the EKT6510 H the EKT6510 S the EKT6520 H and the EKT6520 SD e Standard Telephones 500 and 2500 tvpe standard telephones applv whenever standard telephones are mentioned in this manual 2 TELEPHONE INSTALLATION 2 00 General 2 01 This section describes the wiring required to connect telephones to the svstem Before install ing anv telephone wiring rea
259. er the number of required ports circuits and lines Digital Ports Electronic Ports Standard Ports CO Lines NOTE The maximum number of combined digital electronic and standard ports is 20 The maximum number of CO lines is eight 2 Cross off the printed circuit boards PCBs in addition to the standard Base Key Service Unit lines and ports needed to support the ports and lines entered in Step 1 of this worksheet Base Unit Interfaces PCBs Base Unit 4 CO lines 8 digital ports X built in KSTU 4 standard ports one max Expansion Unit Station and line PCBs KCDU 2 CO lines and 4 digital ports two max KCDU cannot be installed with any other type of Or station PCB or PCOU PCB PDKU 8 digital ports one max 8 electronic ports PSTU 8 standard ports PESU 2 standard ports and 4 electronic ports one max PCOU 4 CO lines one max PCOU can be installed with PDKU PEKU PESU or PSTU but not with KCDU NOTES 1 The Base Unit can support up to 12 stations 8 digital and 4 standard and four CO lines 2 The Expansion Unit can support up to eight stations and four CO lines 3 If installing two DDCBs PDKU or a KCDU is required to support the second DDCB no matter what the total number of digital ports 4 If installing two DDSS Consoles a PDKU is required to support the second DDSS Console no matter the
260. er to the System Record Sheet and enter the route plan number 1 8 Example Route 1 enter 1 P53 1 Define Schedule Number Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required schedule number 1 3 Example Schedule 1 enter 1 Enter Code Number 0 The system will display the previously selected time for the route plan number step 3 and the schedule number step 4 Refer to the System Record Sheet and change the time if required Example Change to 0800 Enter 8 0 Press CR and repeat steps 3 4 and 5 for all plans schedules NOTE Enter time using 24 hour format H H M M 110 0000 0800 Priority Class Assignment Enter the route plan number as defined in step 3 Enter the schedule number as defined in step 4 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required station group number 1 4 Example Group 1 enter 1 The system will display the previously entered route definition numbers reference Program 54 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter required route definition numbers 1 4 and press CR Example Enter 1 and 2 CR Continue to repeat steps 3 4 and 6 until all plans schedules are entered 111 NNNN 12 To Exit Program Store Data A Data was stored when pressing CR in step 6 B Continue returning to step 3 until all data is entered for this program C To exit this program Press 55 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PRO
261. f you wish to change another parameter within this program enter its associated item code To exit this program go to step 4 Enter DISA ID Code Enter Item code 6 System will display last entered ID code number Default Blank Refer to the System Record Sheets and enter a new code if desired and then press CR If you wish to change another parameter within this program enter its associated item code To exit this program go to step 4 Credit Card Call Digit Length Enter Item code 7 The system will display the current digit length Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the desired length 01 30 digits and then CR Example 13 digits enter 1 3 CR If you wish to change another parameter within this program enter its associated item code To exit this program go to step 4 To Exit Program Store Data Press CR REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM AI PROGRAM 69 VERIFIABLE ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt prompt enter P R O G CR Enter Program Number 69 69 Press CR 69 Refer to Svstem Record Sheet and enter the required code P69 001 NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN number 000 299 Example code number 001 Enter O O 1 The system will display the present account code number assigned to 001 Note The number of digits will be as defined in Program 60 4
262. fer feature to intercom number 619 Automatic connection and DISA allow remote programming to be accom plished after business hours without on site assis tance Remote Administration calls with the DK8 or the DK16 via an external modem connected di rectly to a CO line instead of an IMDU connect to the external modem automatically without any spe cial station or CO line ringing assignments When the external modem is connected to a standard telephone port the call transfer feature DISA and ringing assignments can be utilized to access the Remote Administration 2 03 Remote Administration and Maintenance al lows the following functions to be accomplished remotely Program Mode Provides for complete program ming of all STRATA DK8 or DK16 programs Test Mode Provides for testing of STRATA or DK16 CO lines and stations Data Dump Mode Provides a complete printout of all or individual STRATA or DK16 customer data base programs including Speed Dial num bers and LCD messages Message Mode Provides for sending adding or changing digital and electronic telephone LCD messages Speed Dial Mode Allows Station and System Speed Dial numbers to be programmed remotely NOTE All the functions in the preceding paragraphs are also available via an on site terminal con nected directly to an optional PlOU S PCB with DK16 or the optional QSMU PCB with These functions are also available to a terminal w
263. fied Speaker Installation Installthe HESB MDFB Talkback Am plified Speaker option in accordance with the fol lowing steps refer to Figure 7 13 1 Connect a jumper between terminals 1 and 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block 2 Connect a jumper between terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB2 terminal block 1 16 3 Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 6 of the HESB TB2 terminal block NOTE HESB connections made in steps 4 7 may be accomplished using the HESB VOICE and DOOR PHONE modular jack instead of the TB1 terminal block 4 Connect terminal 7 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to pin L1 of the MDFB 5 Connect terminal 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to pin L2 of the MDFB 6 Connect terminal 9 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to pin 1 of the MDFB 7 Connect terminal 10 of the HESB TB1 termi nal block to pin 2 of the MDFB 8 Connect the 600 ohm PAGE RCA jack output from DK8 KSU or DK16 base unit to terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block 9 Connect the HACU 120 Power Supply s 12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block and connect the OV lead to terminal 2 10 Plug the provided power cord into the power supply andtoa 117 6OHz power source 4 26 Talkback Amplified Speaker Test Test the Talkback Amplified Speaker installation in accor dance with the following steps 1 Make an external page e Page will be heard over the HESB 2 Verify that someone speaking into the doo
264. four universal slots however it is recommended that PCBs that support electronic or digital telephones be installed into Slots 04 and 05 because Slots 06 and 07 cannot support Off hook Call Announce or Data Interface Units 0105 Recommended PCB slot assignments KCDU Slot 04 and 05 2 maximum PDKU PEKU PESU PSTU Slot 04 1 maxi mum cannot be installed with KCDU PCOU Slot 05 1 maximum cannot be in stalled with KCDU PIOU PIOUS Slot 06 1 maximum 5 30 PCB Option Considerations 5 31 PCBs may be configured for a variety of hardware and software options Hardware options are defined as either internal generally related to optional PCB subassemblies or external related to connection of peripheral equipment such as background music voice mail etc Hardware and software options for each PCB are identified in the individual PCB installation procedures in this chap ter 5 32 PCB Hardware Options Each PCB must be configured for the applicable hardware options prior to installation of the PCB Configuration in structions for internal hardware options are pro vided in the individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter Configuration instructions for exter nal hardware options are provided in Peripheral Installation Section 100 816 207 INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 5 33 PCB Software Options PCBs are config ured for software options through programm
265. front refer to Figure 5 20 panel to 300 or 1200 as appropriate after the NOTE PIOU PIOUS has been installed in the Expan PIOU or PIOUS connectors 1 P2 and P3 sion Unit in 300 bps out 1200 bps are positioned to allow installation ofthe IMDU in the proper position 3 Set SW3 to MODEM position for IMDU opera 6 Apply firm even pressure to IMDU to ensure tion proper mating of connectors 4 Set the P13 jumper plug on the PIOU to the NOTE 2 l BELL position or cut the W4 jumper on the The IMDU default station intercom number is PIOUS for BELL op 619 and IMDU communication parameters are 7 bits even parity 1 stop bit 5 Mate IMDU connectors J1 J2 and J3 with 7 Refer to Programming Procedures Section PIOU or PIOUS connectors P1 P2 and P3 100 816 300 Program 77 1 and set LED 14 to ON to enable IMDU operation 5 29 INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 W4 NOT FACTORY INSTALLED FOR BELL MODEM SPECIFICATION W4 NORMAL OPEN W3 NORMAL CLOSED gt STRIP FIGURE 5 19 005 PCB SWITCH JUMPER OPTION LOCATION NOTE Hefer to Remote Maintenance Procedures Section 100 816 600 for information regard ing the IMDU 12 20 PIOU and PIOUS Installation Procedure 12 21 Install the PIOU or PIOUS in acco
266. g the HVSU to the HVSI to prevent damage to the connector pins also verify that the HVSU is aligned with the silk screened image on the HVSI INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SEGTION 100 816 206 MARGH 1993 R UP 6510 H 6510 S 6520 5 ROOM NOISE TO HHEU NN STRAP R UP 6520 SD ibis CN TOHVSU WIRE CONNECTOR P2 CARBON STRAPS W201 W202 HHEU STRAP W203 FIGURE 6 13 ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE PCB CONNECTIONS 3 Position the HVSU HVSI subassembly on the standoffs inside the base and secure with the two screws provided Figure 6 14 4 Connect the HVSU HVSI subassembly wire plug to the P2 connector on the electronic telephone PCB Figure 6 13 5 Reinstall the electronic telephone base and secure it with its four captive screws 4 20 Loud Ringing Bell Headset Upgrade HHEU 4 24 The Loud Ringing Bell Headset upgrade HHEU enables an external speaker HESB and or a headset to be connected to the electronic telephone The HESB serves as a Loud Ringing Bell when connected to a telephone NOTES 1 There are two types of HHEU the HHEU1 which has four versions V 1 V 4 and the HHEU2 6 12 2 HVSU INSIDE TELEPHONE FIGURE 6 14 HVSI HVSU INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES 2 Only electronic telephones equipped with an HHEU2 can be wall mounted The HHEL2 is identical to the V 4 HHEUT except that the HH
267. going and incoming calls to be printed e tem4 Selects digit length of account code 4 to 15 digits e Item 5 Allows only long distance call records to be printed Program 97 e Allows system program data to be printed via the SMDR port refer to Figure 7 21 for an example printout NOTES 1 An SMDR printer must be connected to the SMDR port to use the printout option selected by Program 97 2 Callrecord data is lost when program data is printed out using Program 97 6 20 SMDR Printer Call Accounting Device In stallation 6 21 Install the SMDR printer call accounting de vice option in accordance with the following steps refer to Figures 7 20 8 26 and 8 24 1 Connect the interface cable and the PPTC adaptor from the DK8 QSMU or DK16 PIOU or PIOUS SMDR port to the SMDR printer or call accounting device DB25 connector Set the DK16 PIOU or PIOUS SWI switch to the appropriate baud rate 300 or 1200 bps as determined by the baud rate of the printer or call accounting device For DK8 QSMU is always 1200 bps 3 The DK8 QSMU Program 10 3 LED 04 must be OFF for SMDR operation 4 Set the printer or call accounting device to 8 bits no parity one stop bit 5 Program Program 60 the system for the required SMDR printer call accounting device options refer to Paragraph 6 13 and the Pro gramming Procedures Section 100 816 300 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 BASIC CONNECTI
268. gs into the DDCB to provide a door phone Each DDCB can support up to three MDFBs a maximum of two DDCBs can be connected to the system Each DDCB requires a Digital Telephone circuit The MDFB may also be connected to the HESB amplifier speaker to provide page talkback 3 18 INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 MARCH 1993 DK16 WORKSHEET 4 SYSTEM POWER CHECK Total Power Used Equipment Power Used Equipment Type Quantity Factor Ports Used 2000 and 1000 series digital telephone 2000 series electronic telephone 3000 series electronic telephone 6000 series electronic telephone N N N N 6005 series electronic telephone 6500 series electronic telephone DDSS HDSS console PDIU DI2 and PDIU DI PDIU DS O O Standard telephone X X X X X X X X X X X Z Z 00 S S 2S SS X o Add on Module Total Power Used All series Power Criteria Power Supplied Total Power Used Must be greater than zero Configuration Power Check 24 8 Power Supplied NN Total Power Used Must be Greater than Zero TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES INSTALLATION DK8 KSU amp PCB DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS SECTION 100 816 204 MARCH 1993 Strata is INSTALLATION CHAPTER FOUR DK8 KSU AND PCB INSTALLATION PARAGRAPH 2 00 2 10 2 20 2 30 3 10 3 20 4 10 4 20 6 10 6
269. h PIOU only not PIOUS 5 Night ringing will be sent to all zones selected zones are not possible FIGURE 7 18 DK16 NIGHT RINGING OVER ALL EXTERNAL PAGE ZONES 1 24 calling through the svstem CO to CO NOTE MSS will print only on DISA calls that are answered 10 or 1 second see Pro gram 60 2 after the DK dial tone is sentto the calling partv If set for 10 seconas and the call is answered before 10 seconds the call will register as a normal incoming call and the MSS transfer portion of the call will not print out 6 02 Figure 7 19 shows a sample SMDR printout and describes the contents of each column of the printout The following examples show several call record samples and describe the sequence of events which occurred to generate the call records NOTE SMDR printout time of dav and dav month year DD MM YY is the same as the system clock time date SMDR DD MM YY will print out each time 50 call records are generated SMDR PRINTOUT EXAMPLES Direct Inward Svstem Access DISA CO Lines NOTE DISA station calls print out as MSS EXAMPLE 1 Ring No Answer DISA Call Call Sequence A e Outside caller rings CO line 03 CO line 03 is programmed as a DISA line Line 03 returns intercom dial tone to caller after two ring cycles 5 6 seconds Caller does nothing After 32 seconds call is disconnected Printout A prints after disconnect at 4 59 PRINTOUT A 03 MSS 04 59 00 00 32 00 06
270. he Loud Ringing Ringing Bell option is required Figure 6 11 2 ifa headsetis also installed on the Refer to Section 100 816 207 for HESB in i stallation procedures 6 Position the HHEU subassembly on the stand offs inside the base Figure 6 15 and secure 5A For the V 3 or earlier HHEU1 If only the with the two provided screws headset is connected to the HHEU cut both sides of the R607 resistor on the HHEU 7 Connectthe HHEU subassembly wire plug to Figure 6 15 and then remove the resistor to the P1 connector on the electronic telephone eliminate electrical contact PCB Figure 6 13 either one to P601 of the HHEU if the Loud 8 Cut the HHEU strap on the telephone PCB Figure 6 13 NOTE The HHEU strap must be replaced if the HHEU PCB is removed from the telephone COMPONENT SIDE OF HHEU R607 HHEU1 V 1 V 3 TO P1 HHEU 5 601 CONNECTOR gu eo V 1 V 3 OF TELEPHONE y 9 Reinstall the telephone base and secure it LA HHEU1 with its four captive screws PCB Oe V 4 HHEU2 p 10 To adjust the volume of the HESB Loud Ringing Bell Call the telephone connected to the HESB and adjust the volume control on the back of the HESB and the ring volume control on the telephone 4 30 Carbon Headset Handset Straps 4 31 carbon tvpe handset or headset is nected to the handset jack on the side of the 6500 series electronic telephone two straps inside the telephone must be c
271. he PIOU PGOUT1 PGOUT4 to zone zone D speakers 5 Cross connect the amplifier output A to pin 9 NHR of the PIOU 6 Cross connect a jumper from pin 34 NHT to pin 23 PG COMMON from the PIOU PCB 7 In Program 77 1 set LED 05 to OFF and 06 to ON Set LED 08 to ON if door phones are to ring over external page when the system is in NIGHT mode 1 23 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SECTION 100 816 207 MARCH 1993 8 In Program 78 enable the CO lines that are to ring via external page when the system is set in the NIGHT mode In Program 39 assign the Might Transfer 1 Night Transfer 2 buttons to digital electronic telephones per the System Record Sheets see Note 2 10 Press the Might Transfer 1 or Night Transfer 2 button on an electronic or digital telephone to set the system into the NIGHT mode Test by calling into the system on a CO line assigned Program 78 to night ring over external page e When ringing sounds see Note 2 over the page press Intercom 5 3 5 to answer NOTES 1 All zones will ring with this option night ringing to selected zones is not possible see paragraph 9 for night ring over se lected page zones The Night Transfer Night Trans fer 2 buttons put CO lines in NIGHT ring mode per Program 15 NT1 TENANT 1 NT2 TENANT 2 CO line assignment 6 DK8 AND DK16 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SMDR PRINTER CALL ACCOUNTING DEVICE OPTIONS 6 00 An SMDR printer or call
272. he PIOU or PIOUS for the MOH relay function in accordance with the following steps refer to Figures 7 6 and 7 7 1 Access Program 77 1 Set LED 05 to ON to configure the Night MOH relay for the relay function 2A Set the P11 jumper plug on the PIOU to the MAKE or BREAK position as required e MAKE Shorts the normally open con tacts pins 9 and 34 when any CO line is on hold BREAK Opens the normally closed contacts pins 9 and 34 when any CO line is on hold 2B Solder the W2 jumper on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK position as required MAKE Shorts the normally open con tacts NHT and NHR when any CO line is on hold e BREAK Opens the normally closed contacts NHT and NHR when any CO line is in on hold 3 Refer to Figures 7 6 and 7 7 for wiring inter connecting details Connect the PIOU or PIOUS to the MDF as required for the MOH relay function 4 EXTERNAL SPEAKER UNIT HESB OPTIONS 4 00 STRATA DK8 and DK16 systems provide three options utilizing an HESB 4 01 DK8 and DK16 Loud Ringing Bell Option The Loud Ringing Bell option allows the voice first or ringing signal tone to be amplified without the use of other manufacturers equipment The voice first and ringing signal tones can be amplified on all 6500 series electronic telephones and 2000 and 1000 series digital telephones equipped with HHEU PCBs refer to Section 100 816 206 The HESB automatically turns off once the ringing
273. he SPACE bar to release the Data Call button remain on hook and use the DKT s speakerphone to talk when the called partv answers LCD model oniv do not press the SPACE bar when using the speaker phone 6 To terminate the call anytime a If off hook press the SPACE bar and place the DKT handset on hook b Iftalking viathe speakerphone press the SPACE bar 11 DK16 TWO CO LINE EXTERNAL AMPLIFIED CONFERENCE 11 00 General 11 01 A customer supplied two way amplifier can be installed to amplify two CO line tandem DISA and conference calls The amplifier will only sup port one call at a time Any conference two CO line tandem or DISA calls originated while the amplifier is being used for another call will be unamplified The amplifieris connectedto two designated PEKU or PESU station ports and will automatically be switched into atwo CO line connection established between any CO lines in the system INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 SLOT 04 EXPANSION R TEC EDGE 5050 BASE UNIT UNIT CONNECTOR AMPLIFIER see NOTES OUTSIDE 1 OUTSIDE PARTV 2 NOT USED ANV CO LINE USED FOR CONFERENCE SEE PROGRAMMING NOTES FOR TANDEM AND OR DISA CO LINES SVSTEM TELEPHONE THAT SETS UP 2 CO LINE R TEC PS16 CALL POWER ADAPTER NOTES PROGRAMMING NOTES Program 10 3 circuit assignments PROGRAM 10 3 PESU PEKU POR
274. he base Figure 6 1 2 Locate the ROOM NOISE switch on the printed circuit board PCB inside the tele phone and push it carefully to the HI high position Figure 6 13 3 Reinstall the telephone base and secure in place using the four captive screws 4 60 Handset Receiver Volume up Strap Version 2 6500 series Telephones Only 4 61 For Version 2 V 2 6500 series electronic telephones only the handset receiver volume can be increased six decibels db by cutting a strap inside of the telephone Cut the strap in accor dance with the following steps 1 Remove the four captive screws securing the telephone base to the telephone and remove the base Figure 6 1 2 Locate the R UP strap on the printed circuit board PCB inside the telephone and cut it Figure 6 13 3 Reinstall the telephone base and secure in place using the four captive screws 5 DIRECT STATION SELECTION CONSOLE SYSTEM CONNECTION DK16 Only 5 01 STRATA DK16 systems configured with just a Base Unit can support one Direct Station Selec tion Console and systems with the optional Ex pansion Unit can support two consoles There are two types of consoles the DDSS console and the HDSS console The DDSS console can be con nected to designated digital telephone circuits and the HDSS console can only be connected to designated PEKU circuits This section provides instructions on how to install both types of con soles 5 10 DDSS Console Conne
275. hen press CR C Continue returning to Step 2 until all Tvpe 2 programs are completed To Exit the Program Mode Press CR To Enter Another Mode Press data dump test 5 LCD messages no prompt speed Y button LED s N button LED s OFF U button LED s ON some ports and OFF other ports 27 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM S PROGRAM 12 SYSTEM ASSIGNMENTS BASIC TIMING ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt MODE prompt enter R O CR P Enter Program Number 12 P 12 Press CR P12 Check the record sheet and enter the program code that is P12 31 required As an example feature 3 enter 3 The present selection will be displayed Refer to the record sheet and change if required As an example change it to 2 Enter 2 To Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR B Continue returning to Step 3 until all Program 12 data is entered C To exit this program press CR TABLE RM T PROGRAM 13 DEFINING THE MESSAGE CENTER ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt MODE prompt enter P R O CR P Enter Program Number 13 13 Press CR P13 Enter the number 1 The present port number will be displayed P13
276. her vertical surface It is recommended to use the method shown in Figure 4 1 see Note See Figure 4 2 for DK8 KSU physical dimensions NOTE Install screws first to the hard board and then PLASTER BOARD FIGURE 4 1 DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT WALL MOUNT METHOD INSTALLATION DK8 KSU amp PCB SECTION 100 816 204 MARCH 1993 secure the hard board to the wall making certain that screws are aligned with studs 2 10 Mounting Preparation 1 Loosen the screws on the front cover of the Key Service Unit and removethe cover Figure 4 2 2 Move the SW1 RAM Storage Battery jumper plug strap on the motherboard to the ON position Figure 4 5 3 Ifthe DK8is less than one mile from the central office or PBX set the CO line PAD switches SW101 SW201 to the PAD position to provide a 3db level loss to avoid excessive loudness 4 Install all optional PCBs per Paragraph 5 STUD HARD BOARD 1 4 INCH PLYWOOD DK8 KSU INSTALLATION DK8 KSU PCB SEGTION 100 816 204 MARGH 1993 Strata TOSHIBA Q4 FRONT COVER SCREW WALL MOUNT WALL MOUNT CH 1 SCREW FIGURE 4 2 DK8 DIMENSIONS AND SCREW LOCATIONS 4 2 HOLDER AC POWER CORD AND PLUG 4 7 STATION TIP RING AMPHENOL 25 PAIR JACK FEMALE TIE WRAP SUPPLIED WITH DK8 TO HOLD AMPHENOL CONNECTOR LEFT SIDE VIEW FIGURE 4 3 DK8 SIDE VIEW DIMENSION AND PLUG JACK LOCATIONS INSTALLATION DK
277. hnical support group FAULT FINDING SEGTION 100 816 500 MARGH 1993 GHARTNO 4 CO LINE DIAL TONE FAULTS START 1 CO line wiring per section 100 816 008 2 Test central office line using a standard telephone or butt set at the TELCO block Repair as necessary Is the fault cleared Replaceable CO Line PCBs DK8 QCDU DK16 Base KCOU DK16 Expansion Change the PCB and retest KCDU PCOU Are all 47 faulty CO lines on areplaceable PCB not including KSU Main an RCB Is the NO fault NO cleared 4 7 YES 4 5 Replace the defective unit and return it to the repair center Are the faulty CO lines Change the expansion only in the DK16 unit and retest expansion unit Change the or Is the YES DK16 Base KSU and fault initialize the svstem cleared Prog 90 92 03 NOTE Retest Program 03 is not used on Is the fault Call vour technical cleared support group YES FAULT FINDING SEGTION 100 816 500 MARGH 1993 GHART NO 5 055 CONSOLE FAULTS DK16 ONLY START DSS console type Enter correct PCB slot Is the correct code using Program 03 PCB slot code entered then turn power OFF in Program 03 for 5 seconds and then ON On PEKU connected to HDSS set SW1 to the DSS position Refer to section 100 816 008 and verify wiring Is the For DDSS ci
278. ht fixtures 5 22 HDSS Console Configuration Thefollow ing considerations should be made when installing an HDSS console e A PEKU PCB is required in the expansion unit for an HDSS console The DSS switch on the PEKU must be set to DSS Two PEKU ports are required for the HDSS console always Circuits 7 and 8 The PESU does not support the HDSS console A system must be configured with the Expan sion Unitto support an HDSS console Only one HDSS console can be installed in a system 5 23 HDSS Programming Overview Program 03 e Codes 23 and 24 identify the slot that supports a PEKU that interfaces with the HDSS console Program 28 e Assigns HDSS console to a telephone Program 29 e Assigns individual button functions for the HDSS console 6 DOOR PHONE LOCK CONTROL UNIT AND DOOR PHONE INSTALLATION 6 01 This section provides installation instructions forthe digital door phone lock control units DDCB Italso includes installation instructions for the door phone MDFB Each DDCB can support as many asthree door phones MDFBs ortwo MDFBs and one door lock INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SEGTION 100 816 206 MARGH 1993 NOTE and DK16 do not support the 6 02 and DK 16 systems can be equipped with up to six MDFBs 6 03 For DK8 DDCBs only connect to Circuit 3 Port 02 and Circuit 4 Port 03 6 04 For DK16 DDCBs can only connect to Ports 04 and 12 DDCBs can only connect to
279. ice Sometimes the DTE DCE device may use RTS CTS for Ready Busy type flow control in these cases dip switch SW1 4 should be OFF see Figure 7 32 for DIP switch informa tion Data Set Ready DSR Pin 6 When connected to the communication channel and prepared to exchange control characters to initiate data trans mission the DCE device sends the DSR signal circuit CC to the DTE device If the PDIU DIP switch SW1 2 is set ON DSR will be ON continuously if the switch is set OFF DSR follows DTR if DSR is ON DTR is ON etc SWI1 2 should be OFF in most cases see Figure 7 32 for DIP switch information Data Carrier Detect DCD Pin 8 The DCE device sends the DCD signal DCD Pin 8 when receiving the carrier signal on the line side Before transmitting or receiving data most DTE devices require that the DCD be ON If the carrier signal is removed by the remote end or lost due to a fault condition on the line the DCE notifies the DTE device by an OFF condition with the DCD signal PDIU DIP switch SW1 2 is set ON to setthe DCD ON continuously if set OFF the DCD signal will only be ON when connection between two DIUs is established and OFF when a connection is not established SW1 2 is set OFF when the DTE DCE uses the DTR DSR signals for Ready Busy flow control see Figure 7 32 for DIP switch information INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 e Data Terminal Ready Pin 20 The DTE dev
280. ice sends the DTR signal EIA circuit CD to the DCE device prompting the DCE device to open the communication line The line is closed and the call disconnected when the DTE device quits sending the DTR signal DTR may be sent any time to indicate that the DTE is ready to transmit or receive data DIP switch SW1 2 should be set OFF in most cases see Figure 7 32 for DIP switch information e Ring Indicator RI Pin 22 The signal circuit CE is sent by the DCE device to the DTE device Whenever the DCE device receives a ringing signal on the line side it turns the signal ON If DIU DIP switch SW1 3 is set ON the RI signal will be on continuously if ringing if the switch is set OFF the RI signal will be one second ON three seconds OFF when the DIU detects ringing signal 10 30 DIP Switch Options 10 31 The PDIU DI and the PDIU DS each have a four control DIP switch which can be configured for signaling options The switch is located on the bottom of the PDIU DI and on the back panel of the PDIU DS see Figure 7 32 SW1 1 Normally this switch is set ON to discon nect devices from DIUs automatically The con nection is maintained if data is exchanged be tween the device and the DIU within eight to nine second intervals If SW1 1 is OFF on the called and calling DIU data calls will remain connected until released manually SWI 2 This switch is placed in the ON position when the PDIU DI or PDIU DS config
281. ich provides either SMDR or Remote Maintenance Terminal TTY or external modem interface QSMU configuration is selectable in system programming QSTU Standard Telephone Interface Unit 1 5 INSTALLATION INTRODUCTION SECTION 100 816 201 MARCH 1993 STRATA only Optional printed circuit board that can be installed in the KSU to provide two standard telephone circuits RAM Random Access Memory Refers to the type of system memory that holds individual system configuration and feature programming RAM is read write memory and can be easily revised in programming ROM Read Only Memorv Refers to the type of system memory that holds static software that comprises the mechanics of the features func tions ROM only revised by Toshiba software engineers 4 10 Use of Notes Important Notes Cautions and Warnings 4 11 Notescallattention to specific items to elabo rate or to refer the reader to other information 4 12 Important Notes are used when the informa tion is considered to be very important 4 13 Cautions call attention to the possibility of equipment being damaged if the instructions are not followed closely 4 14 Warnings are used when the given tasks involved could cause the possibility of personal injury or death to the technician TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES INSTALLATION SITE REQUIREMENTS 5 DIGITAL TELEPHONE SVSTEMS EGTION 100 816 202 MARGH 1993 Strata KS eKis INSTALLATION
282. igital circuits support DIUs Expansion Unit slots 04 and 05 only can support DIUs For KCDU only ckt number 1 thru 4 apply Make copies as necessary PDKU KCDU Circuit 1 can support DDCB Base Unit Circuit 5 can support DDCB circuit and or circuit 4 can support N A FIGURE 8 12 DK8 OR DK16 PDKU KCDU DK8 KSU OR DK16 BASE KSU DIGITAL STATION MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD 8 16 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 TO PEKU W FEMALE CONNECTOR BRIDGING SIATION CABUING JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS VOICE T1 VT VOICE R1 VR DATA T1 DT DATA R1 DR VT __ VR DT CIRCUIT 2 DR VT VR CIRCUIT 3 po WR DR VT VR DT CIRCUIT 4 DR VT VR DT CIRCUIT 5 DR VT VR DT CIRCUIT 6 23 24 DR 25 VT 26 I CIRCUIT 7 27 DT 28 DR 29 VT 30 ELECTRONIC Mr CIRCUIT 8 TELEPHONE DR OCA 1 OT ONLY IF ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE CIC RECEIVES OFF HOOK CALLS 34 35 OT CIRCUIT 2 37 el CIRCUIT 3 1 Toreceive OCA the 6500 series electronic telephone 38 OR must have HVSU2 subassembly or combined 39 HVSU HVSI subassemblies installed 35 OR CIRCUIT 4 Program 31 03 must be on for OT electronic telephone to receive OCA 41 DH T CIRCUIT 5 An HHEU must be installed inside 6500 series 42
283. igure 6 8 DKT2010 SD DKT2020 S DKT2020 SD and connect the wire plug of the HHEU PCB to the HHEU connector on the printed circuit board PCB on the telephone 7B For 1000 series digital telephones refer to Figure 6 9 and connect the wire plug of the HHEU to the HHEU connector on the PCB of the telephone 8A For 2000 series digital telephones refer to Figure 6 7 DKT2010 H or Figure 6 8 DKT2010 SD DKT2020 S DKT2020 SD and locate the EX SP strap on the PCB in the telephone Cut the strap if an HESB will be connected to the HHEU 8B For 1000 series digital telephones refer to Figure 6 9 and locate the EX SP strap on the upper PCB in the telephone and cut it if an HHEU will be connected to an HESB for the Loud Ringing Bell option 9A For 2000 series digital telephones refer to Figure 6 7 DKT2010 H or Figure 6 8 DKT2010 SD DKT2020 S DKT2020 SD and locate the HHEU strap on the PCB in the telephone Cut the strap if a headset will be connected to the HHEU 9B For 1000 series digital telephones refer to Figure 6 9 and locate the HHEU strap on the upper PCB in the telephone Cut the strap if an HHEU will be connected to a headset NOTE If the HHEU is removed from the tele phone the HHEU strap must be replaced for proper telephone operation 10 Reinstall the telephone base and secure it with its four captive screws 6 9 INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SECTION 100 816 206 MARCH 1993 11
284. in the KSU set the SW1 ring generator to 130 or 190V P P Figure 4 10 Most standard telephones and two wire devices require 190 however some devices may experi ence ring trip at 190 and should be set at 130 INSTALLATION DK8 KSU amp PCB SECTION 100 816 204 MARCH 1993 8 20 QSTU Installation Procedure 8 21 Install the QSTU in accordance with the fol lowing steps Figure 4 7 1 Remove the PCB from its protective packag ing 2 Setthe ring voltage jumper plug SW1 to select the appropriate ring generator voltage level either 130V P P or 190V P P 3 Make sure that the power supply switch is OFF A Align and insert QSTU connectors J1 J2 J3 and J4 motherboard connectors J11 J12 J13 and J14 respectivelv and applv firm even pressure to ensure proper mating of the connectors 8 30 QSTU Wiring 8 31 Refer to MDF to KSU Amphenol Wiring Section 100 816 208 for QSTU wiring 8 32 The QSTU must be connected to OL13A or equivalent type lines for off premises stations 300 ohms loop resistance max including the telephone or other devices DC off hook resistance 8 40 QSTU Programming Overview 8 41 The following parameters may be specified for the QSTU Program 31 e Used to configure all QSTU ports connected to voice mail see Chapter 7 for voice mail installa tion Program 10 2 Used to set standard telephone ringing option and separate BGM assignment NOTE QSTU Ports ar
285. ing after installation of the PCBs in the KSU A pro gramming overview for each POB is provided in the individual PCB installation procedures in this chap ter Refer to the Programming Procedures Section 100 816 300 for detailed programming instruc tions 5 40 PCB Installation Power Supply Consider ations 5 41 Whenever removing or installing PCBs it is recommended that the power supply be OFF 6 BASE UNIT STANDARD TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT KSTU 6 00 General 6 01 The optional KSTU provides four standard telephone circuits and it can only be installed in the Base Unit The KSTU supports the two wire de vices such as standard telephones Auto Attendant devices voice mail machines and facsimile ma chines The KSTU can also support an alternate Background Music BGM source on circuit 4 MOUNTING SCREW 321 SW540 130 190 FIGURE 5 11 KSTU OPTIONS AND CONNECTORS NOTE For the system to recognize the Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF tones generated by standard telephones or any other device con nected to a KSTU port a KARCU must be installed in the Base Unit 6 02 The KSTU is shown in Figure 5 11 and its connectors and controls are described in Table 5 A 6 10 KSTU Configuration 6 11 The KSTU only has to be configured for the ring generator voltage level nothing else Before installing the KSTU in the Base Unit set the SW540 ring generator to 130V P P or 190V P P Most standard telephones a
286. installed on Figures 2 and 3 orifan IMDU is notinstalled on DK16 e With the DK16 the IMDU modem 300 or 1200 PIOU or PIOUS The IMDU has a built in baud full duplex can be connected to the DK16 maintenance channel for remote PIOU or PIOUS to allow system programming connection however an external modem and testing to be accomplished from a remote requires a CO line or standard telephone location Figure 4 port Figures 2 3 e Instead of a modem or terminal Stand alone 2 The DK16 PIOU or PIOUS can only be Data Interface Unit PDIU DS can be con nected to the TTY port on the QSMU DK8 or REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 4 10 Maintenance Terminal External Modem Option System Hardware Requirements 4 11 The STRATA DK8 must be equipped with a QSMU PCB and the DK16 with a PIOU or PIOUS PCB to support the maintenance terminal external modem options Connecting the maintenance ter minalor external maintenance modemto the QSMU PIOU or PIOUS PCB is accomplished with a standard three pair modular cord and a PPTC adaptor connected to the PCB TTY jack 4 20 DK8 and DK16 Local Maintenance Terminal Installation 4 21 Install the ASCII terminal in accordance with the following steps Figure 5 1 Connectthe three pair modular cable 24 AWG twisted pairs and the PPTC adaptor from the DK8 QSMU or DK16 PIOU or PIOUS TTY port to the remote maintenance
287. interconnecting details 5 Refer to Station Apparatus Installation Sec tion 100 816 206 for procedures to upgrade electronic telephones for OCA 8 13 HDSS Console Configuration Configure the PEKU to support an HDSS console in accor dance with the following steps 1 Remove the from its protective packag ing 2 Set the SW1 DSS EKT switch to DSS 3 Refer to Station Apparatus Installation Sec tion 100 816 206 for installation procedures for the HDSS console The HDSS console requires dedicated use of Circuits 7 and 8 of the PEKU PCB INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 TABLE 5 B CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS CONTROL INDICATOR CONNECTOR Figure 5 13 TYPE OF COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Off hook Call 10 pin connector Interface connector for optional Off hook Announce P10 Call Announce subassembly connector used in conjunction with P20 P40 P50 and P60 Off hook Call 10 pin connector Interface connector for optional Off hook Announce P20 Call Announce subassembly connector used in conjunction with P10 P40 P50 and P60 Off hook Call 10 pin connector Interface connector for optional Off hook Announce P40 Call Announce subassembly connector used in conjunction with P10 P20 P50 and P60 Off hook Call 10 pin connector Interface connector for optional Off hook Announce P50 Call Announce subassembly connector used in conjunction with P10 P20 P40 and P60
288. ipped with a PDIU DI Asynchro nous devices such as personal computers PC and terminals can be connected to the standard RS 232 connector of the PDIU DI 2 Station us ers are able to transmit and receive RS 232 data overthe single wire pair ofthe PDIU DI 2 equipped telephone 3 12 Data calls can be manually dialed with a Data Call button and disconnected with a Data Release button on the telephone or data and voice calls can be dialed from the keyboard of the terminal or PC using standard AT commands Digital telephones may also be assigned a dem button to reserve a modem or monitor mo dem availability and status Assign feature buttons to telephones with Program 39 NOTES 1 1000 and 2000 series Digital Telephones equipped with a PDIU DI 2 cannot be wall mounted or equipped with an Add On Module ADM or DVSU for OCA A 2000 series digital telephone equipped 6 4 with a PDIU DI2 can support an HHEU at the same time but cannot support a DVSU A 1000 series Digital Telephone equipped with a PDIU DI cannot support an HHEU ADM or a DVSU for OCA 2 PDKU1 circuits 1 7 only can support PDIU DI 2 s butall PDKU2 and base unit digital circuits can support PDIU DI 2 s 3 13 PDIU DI 2 Installation Install the integrated data interface unit PDIU DI for 1000 series and PDIU DI2 for 2000 series in accordance with the following steps 1 Loosen the four captive screws securing the digital telephone base and
289. iring CO Lines to PCOU e Figure 8 27 DK16 MDF Wiring Amplified Two CO Line Conference e Figure 8 28 DK16 External Power for Digital Telephone Connection 2 20 COLine Wiring Diagrams e Figure 8 5 DK8 QSTU DK16 KSTU Sta tion MDF Cross Connect Record e Figure 8 19 DK16 PESU Circuit Card Wir ing Diagram e Figure 8 20 DK16 PESU Station MDF Cross Connect Record 2 30 PIOU and PIOUS Wiring Diagrams e Figure 8 22 DK16 MDF Wiring CO Lines and Digital Telephones to KCDU Figure 8 23 DK16 MDF Wiring PIOU Pe ripherals 25 Pair Figure 8 24 DK16 PIOUS TTV and SMDR Wiring Figure 8 25 DK16 PIOUS Page Relav Alarm Connections Figure 8 26 DK16 PIOU SMDR TTV Options and Wiring TABLE 8 A REGISTRATION NUMBERS STRATA AND DK16 Manufacture Countrv Kev Svstem Hvbrid Svstem DK16 Made in Singapore DK8 Made in Malavsia CJ6 SNG 73672 KF E CJ6 MLA 74479 KF E 8 1 CJ6 SNG 73673 MF E CJ6 MLA 74478 MF E INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 TABLE 8 B STATION LOOP REQUIREMENTS D D ti Max Loop Resistance Max Distance from Number of evice Description Including Device KSU to Device Wire Pairs Electronic Electronic telephone 40 ms 1000 ft 303 m 2 pair EKTs which receive OCA calls HDSS console 500 ft 152 m need 3 pair Approx 3000 ft 909 m with 150 ohm device See manufacturer s product specifications for exact resis
290. ith a modem connected to a stan dard telephone port Paragraph 5 and Figure 5 2 04 There two levels of Remote Administra tion and Maintenance Level 1 Allows access to all programs Level 2 Allows access to Programs 30 39 and 77 89 which pertain oniv to individual station options such as button assignments class of service etc 2 05 Each Remote Administration and Mainte nance level has a different programmable pass word for customer data base protection This al lows a customer to make certain station moves adds and changes in Level 2 while protecting the critical system assignments in Level 1 refer to Program 00 3 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS 3 01 For Remote Administration and Maintenance operation the STRATA DK16 system must be configured with either an IMDU equipped PIOU S PCB in the optional Expansion Unit or an external modem connected to a PIOUS S and a dedicated CO line or standard telephone circuit See Figures 2 3 and 4 The STRATA DK8 must be configured with a QSMU and an external modem nected to a dedicated CO line or standard tele phone circuit See Figures 2 and 3 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 PPTC ADAPTOR MODIFIED FOR EXTERNAL MODEM CONNECTION AS SHOWN IN TABLE RM A OF THIS SECTION REMOTE PERSONAL COMPUTER OR ASCII TERMINAL co INE DEDICATED CO LINE QSMU DK8 TELEPHONE EXTERNAL PIOU
291. l of the equipment that will work only the equipment that has been proven compat ible in the field or lab Terminals e Texas Instruments Silent 700 e Panasonic KXD 4920 e Personal Computers with the PROCOMM com munications software package Modems Hayes compatible REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM D PROGRAM 90 INITIALIZING PROGRAMS 00 97 ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt MODE prompt enter P R O G CR Enter Program Number 90 P 90 Press CR 90 To Initialize Programs Enter 0 0 97 90 00 97 Single programs be initialized entering a single program number plus Group numbers are separated Enter button LED number 0 1 Change 01 button LED to ON entering W Press SPACE Change LED 02 to ON by entering Y Press CR Initialization complete N N N N N N N N NOTE If program data is not entered correctly then CR will not respond To retry press DELETE CR Exit Program 90 Press CR For DK16 Enter Program 77 Press 7 7 CR Press 114 then Y CR To Exit this Program Press CR IMPORTANT NOTE For DK16 only If all programs are initialized the IMDU enabled has also been turned off in Program 77 1 LED 14 If using the IMDU for remote programming go into Program 77 1 and turn button LE
292. laved P33 03 NN Refer to the record sheet and enter the port number that will be the hunt point Example Port 00 enter 0 0 P33 03 NN 00 To Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR B Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 33 data is entered To exit this program press f CR P33 03 NN 00 P33 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM AB PROGRAM 34 HOLD RECALL TIMING ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter P R O CR gt MODE PROG P Enter Program Number 34 Press CR P 34 P34 Refer to the record sheet and enter the required port number Example Port 05 enter O 5 P34 Press The present data will be displayed 054 032 Example 160 seconds enter 1 6 O Refer to the record sheet and enter the required timing 054 032 160 To Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR B Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 34 data has been entered C To exit this program press CR 054 032 160 Program 35 use 2 procedure TABLE RM AC PROGRAM 36 FIXED CALL FORWARD ACTION DISPLAV PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter O G CR gt MODE PROG P Enter Program Number 36 Press CR P 36 P36 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the
293. lephone refer to Figure 6 7 DKT2010 H or Figure 6 8 DKT2010 SD DKT2020 S DKT2020 SD and then connect the DVSU wire plugs to the DVSU connectors on the printed circuit board PCB inside the telephone 4B If installing the DVSU into a 1000 series digi tal telephone refer to Figure 6 9 and connect the DVSU wire plugs to the DVSU connectors on the PCBs inside the telephone Reinstall the telephone base and secure it with its four captive screws 6 6 RED WIRE EE LS e S FIGURE 6 6 DVSU INSTALLATION FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONES 3 30 Loud Ringing Bell Headset Upgrade HHEU 3 31 The loud ringing bell headset upgrade HHEU enables an external speaker HESB for the Loud Ringing Bell feature and or a headset to be con nected to both series of digital telephones NOTES 1 There are two types of HHEU the HHEU1 which has four versions V 1 V 4 and the HHEU2 2 Both 2000 and 1000 series Digital Tele phones require either an HHEU2 or a V 3 or V 4 HHEU1 for HESB operation ear lier HHEU1 versions are only sufficient for headset operation only 3 Only digital telephones equipped with an 2 can be wall mounted The HHEU2 is identical to the V 4 HHEU1 except that the HHEU2 has longer wires to accom modate wall mounting 4 A Toshiba HESC 65A cable is required to connect the HHEU in a digital telephone to the HESB 5 1000 series digital telephones cannot be equipped with the HHE
294. line 01 rings QSTU KSTU port 08 Internal modem set to auto answer 50 1 Default settings for PDIU DI and DS S Registers 2 Make sure 1 and 2 are on line with a communications software package and that the communication parameters of each PC and communication software package are set to the same values data transmission rate paritv data bits stop bits flow control etc From 2 s keyboard type A T D T 583 3 O O and press ENTER The external modem originates the call to STRATA DK16 CO line 01 CO line 01 rings incoming to the internal modem QSTU or KSTU port 08 The internal modem rings and auto an swers the modems handshake and es tablish communications If the modems send result codes the PC s screens display CONNECT XXXX where XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communications soft ware At this time PC 2 is connected to PDIU DS 14 as shown by the thick lines above PDIU DS 14 is in the command mode PC 2 can now issue AT com mands to PDIU DS 14 If Digital PDIU DS port 04 is the only PDIU port connected to a modem Pro gram 20 LED 03 ON then the Modem LEDs on all DKTs will light 4 From PC 25 keyboard type A T D D 10 press ENTER AT commands must be capi tal letters this prompts PDIU DS 14 to dial and connect to PDIU DI 10 7 55 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 e The LED on the PDIU DS 14
295. line indicator will not light unless PCOU is connected to a CO J1 Connector Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 1 and 2 J2 Connector Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 3 and 4 PAD Switch SW101 Two position slide Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line circuit 1 PAD Switch SW201 Two position slide Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line circuit 2 PAD Switch SW301 Two position slide Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line circuit 3 PAD Switch 5 401 Two position slide Enables signal level drop for CO line circuit 4 Program 41 Program 78 e Assigns stations access to CO lines outgoing e Assigns special ringing of CO lines Night Ring only Over Page DISA IMDU Program 42 0 1 8 Programs 81 89 e Assigns behind PBX CENTREX operation to e Assigns CO lines to ring selected stations each CO line e Assigns Delayed Ringing to any CO line Programs 45 48 Program 93 e Defines Toll Restrictions for any CO line e Assigns names to CO lines Programs 50 56 e Defines Least Cost Routing using CO lines 9 21 INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 12 OPTION INTERFACE UNIT PIOU AND PIOUS 12 00 General 12 01 The Option Interface Unit PIOU or PIOUS provides a circuit interface with peripheral options A maximum of one PIOU or PIOUS can be installed in the svstem The PIOU and PIOUS support the same options except the PI
296. m set up 1 Observe the following e When the CO line rings in it will connect to the IMDU or the external modem and the IMDU or external modem will respond by returning modem answer tone to the remote modem e The remote modem will return modem tone to the IMDU or external modem and communication will be established e When communication is established the terminal will display CONNECTED or COMMUNICATIONS see Note in Para graph 6 22 2 To continue Press CR and enter the security code per Paragraph 6 30 6 22 Manual connection via call transfer 1 Usingatelephone atthe remote location that can switch to the terminal modem dial the number of a system CO line 2 When the call is answered request that it be transferred to station 619 if an IMDU is being used For applications where an external mo dem is connected to a dedicated standard telephone port ask to be transferred to the intercom number assigned to the modem 3 After the call is transferred and you hear modem tone from the IMDU or external mo dem switch the call from the telephone to the terminal modem 4 Observe the following e When the CO line is transferred it will connect to the IMDU or external modem e The IMDU orthe external modem and the remote modem will respond to each other with modem tone and communication is established REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 e When communication
297. main seized until the DISA disconnect timer releases the call approximately five minutes PRINTOUT C Auto Release Signal 03 DISA 12 22 00 02 01 01 DISA 12 22 00 02 01 outgoing incoming INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 07 06 90 DD MM YY EVERY FIFTY CALL RECORDS AND AT MIDNIGHT gt 01 01 03 03 01 03 03 15 08 14 00 00 22 123456987 456789 MODM 08 15 00 00 18 00 00 DISA CALL TO IMDU 10 08 16 00 00 28 00 08 12 DISA 08 16 00 00 15 OUTGOING DISA ACCESS BY INCOMING DISA 01 DISA 08 17 00 00 25 INCOMING DISA AND ACCESS CO 03 OUTGOING MSS 08 18 00 00 12 00 06 15 lt 05 ANSWERS DISA CALL 12 SECONDS AFTER DK DIAL TONE gt 15 08 19 00 00 22 03 6 12 08 19 00 00 16 First Digit varies Last alwavs this column 04 02 01 Field Column 1 2 3 10 08 20 00 00 34 12345678912345678965412365 10 08 00 00 22 7145833700 First Digit varies Last 15 08 23 00 00 40 7145833700 123456789456321 FC 15 22 FC 24 28 FC 30 33 FC 35 60 FC 62 76 Account Code 4715 digits Outgoing Telephone Number 1 26 digits Station to which the CO Line was transferred 1 4 digits CO Line Incoming Ring Duration Before Answer MM SS Call Duration HH MM SS see Note 1 Time of Day hour and minute the call was released Station Number 1 4 digits see Note 2 CO Line Number 01 36 NOTES 1 2 Call Duration incoming outgoing or
298. me weather via CO line C Enter T KX X K Y Y CR X X CO line C s button number and telephone number of station C Answer station C or verify time weather connection and go to next step TKXX KYY Press the Cnf Trn button on STXX to establish a conference between all parties T TKXX C T If you wish to tie the two CO lines together and hang up Enter T K X X C CR Enter T K X X S CR T TKXX C TTKXX S T Continue returning to step 2 until all CO lines are tested To Exit the Test Mode At the T prompt enter Q U I T CR REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM BV SYSTEM DATE DAY TIME SETTING PROCEDURE ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Test Mode gt MODE TEST At the MODE prompt enter T E S T CR T To Set Date T 00 1 651YYMMDD Enter TK O0O0K01651YYM M DD ZCR T To Set Time Of Day 00 K01 652 55 Enter TKO0K01652HHMM 55 To Set Day Of The Week TTKOO 65304 EnterT K0 0 K0 16 53 D T D day of week with Sunday 1 Saturday 7 To Exit the Test Mode At T prompt enter Q U I T CR REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES TABLE RM BW SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 SPEED DIAL MODE CHANGE REVIEW ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Speed Dial Mo
299. memory locations 10 49 12 02 Chain Speed Dial numbers can also be programmed using the Speed Dial Mode See the Digital or Electronic Telephone User Guide for more information regarding chain Speed Dialing 12 03 To program Speed Dial numbers enter the REPT mode per Paragraph 7 of this section Then use the Speed Dial Mode Procedure at the end of this section 13 MODE EXIT 13 01 Exit the current mode per Paragraph 13 02 and select the desired mode via Paragraph 7 13 02 To exit the Program PROG Data Dump DUMP Test TEST or Speed Dial REPT mode 14 e Atthe P D T or R prompt enter QUIT CR and observe gt MODE 13 03 To exit the LCD Message MESG mode e Atanvtime while in the message mode enter 0 q and observe gt MODE NOTE To exit the Message Mode the terminal key board must be in lower case 14 DISCONTINUE OPERATION 14 00 Local Terminal 14 01 Exit current operating mode via Paragraph 13 and observe that the MODE promptis displayed on the terminal 14 10 Remote Terminal 14 11 Exit current operating mode via Paragraph 13 and observe that the MODE promptis displayed on the terminal 14 12 To discontinue remote operation 1 Take the terminal off line 2 Verify that the modem drops the line 15 EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY 15 01 Equipment that is known to be compatible with STRATA DK8 and DK16 Remote Administra tion and Maintenance is listed as follows This list does not show al
300. mp SEGTION 100 816 205 1993 16 BASE UNIT TB1 FG2 GREEN VELLOW BACK OF DK16 FG2 WIRE AND PLUG EXPANSION UNIT FROM EXPANSION UNIT PLUGS INTO TB1 OF BASE UNIT LOCK SAFETV LOCK SUPPLIED WITH EXPANSION UNIT RIBBON CABLE FROM EXPANSION UNIT PLUGS INTO EXPANSION P3 OF BASE UNIT FIGURE 5 5 CONNECTING THE DK16 EXPANSION UNIT TO THE DK16 BASE UNIT 9 6 INSTALLATION DK16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 EXPANSION EXPANSION SAFETV LOCK FG SCREW BASE UNIT ac POWER TIT rR FG WIRE FG2 WIRE RIBBON CABLE A TO EXPANSION UNIT E x X EXPANSION UNIT LATCH MOUNTING HOLE AND SCREW AC CORD TIE WRAP HOLDER FIGURE 5 6 MOUNTING THE DK16 EXPANSION UNIT 9 7 INSTALLATION DK16 KSU amp PCB SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 EXPANSION UNIT SLOT LOCK SIDE COVER FIGURE 5 7 DK16 EXPANSION UNIT INTERIOR 5 8 INSTALLATION DK16 KSU amp PCB SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 TIFI in n c DC POWER omm AMPHENOL 9 FT TIE WRAP AC POWER
301. munication circuits Model PM 2305 Intended for use with Listed Siemon 66M1 Block Models PG 04 25 50 or PK 04 ground kit and Listed 1 enclosure For use on the protected side of a Listed Primarv Telecommunications Protector for indoor use oniv 5 Simplex Time Recorder Co Gardner Massachusetts 01440 e Isolated loop circuit protectors Models 2081 9027 and 2081 9028 Intended for use between data communication equipment or signal lines of building system equipment Install and test the secondary protectors per the installation instructions of the applicable manufacturer 8 6 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 TO BASE UNIT P5 W FEMALE CONNECTOR BRIDGING w BL 26 S T1 VOICE DATA 1 R1 VOICE DATA kwo 27 PTI ADD POWER Low 2 1 ADD POWER K 28 K GN W 3 K W BR 29 BR W 4 K 5 30 K Sw 5 31 K BL R 6 K R O 32 K O R 7 Kk R GN 33 K GN R 8 K R BR 34 BR R 9 K R S 35 K S R 10 K BK BL 36 K BL BK 11 K BK O 37 K O BK 12 _BK GN 38 K GN BK 13 K BK BR 39 K BR BK 14 BK S 40 K S BK 15 K Y BL 41 K BL Y 16 K Y O 42 K O Y 17 K Y GN 43 K GN V 18 K 44 BR Y 19 5 45 K S V 20 K V BL 46 K BL V 21 K V O 47 Kk O V 22 K V GN 48 K GN V 23 Kk V BR 49 K BR V 24 K V S 50 V SV 25 STATION CABLING JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS 24AWG 1 OR 2 PAIR SEE NOTE 2
302. music will be sent to all electronic digital telephone speakers and to the external page system via the 600 ohm PAGE RCA jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit This BGM source is separated from the MOH source connected to the MOH RCA jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit Connect the BGM source to the QSTU PSTU KSTU PEKU or PESU in accordance with the following steps Figure 7 4 NOTE If connecting the BGM source to the KSTU PSTU or QSTU PCB a telephone adaptor matching isolation transformer should be in stalled between the source and the PCB to protect the source from potentially ruinous voltages generated by the PCB see Figure 7 2 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 UNIVERSITY SOUND MODEL TM 2 TELEPHONE ADAPTOR OR EQUIVALENT KSTU OR PSTU CIRCUIT 4 OR QSTU CIRCUIT 2 PORT 19 PHONE LINE JACK BGM MUSIC OR OUTPUT SEE PROGRAM 19 FOR SLOT KSTU OR PSTU ASSIGNMENT SEE PROGRAM 10 2 LED 10 FOR QSTU PORT 19 ASSIGNMENT NOTE 1 UNIVERSITV SOUND 1327 Ralston Avenue Sylmar Ca 91342 7607 Phone 818 362 9516 FIGURE 7 2 BGM SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS INPUT IMPEDANCE 6000 INPUT VOLTAGE RECOMMENDED LEVELS MIN 0 14 VRMS 15 dBm MAX 0 77 VRMS 0 dBm DK16 BGM SOURCE STANDARD TELEPHONE CIRCUIT PRECAUTION DIAGRAM 1 For DK16 enter the programming mode and identify the BGM slot number in Program 19 of the printed circuit board KSTU PSTU
303. n 9 13 Unlike the PEKU or PESU the PSTU does not PSTUT V 4 became available in November have to be configured for BGM There is no jumper 1989 PSTU1 V 3 was discontinued wire to cut etc 9 12 Setthe PSTU1 V 4 or PSTU2 ring generator 9 20 PSTU Installation Procedure level as required 9 21 Install the PSTU in accordance with the fol e W1 set to H 190V P P lowing steps 1 Remove the PCB from its protective packag NISSEL E ing The protective shield on the back of the e Two ringers maximum per port H or L PSTU is designed to protect the installer from 5 21 INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 potentially hazardous ring voltage Do not remove this shield 2 Ensure that the PSTU subunit SSTU is se curely attachedto the PSTU referto Figure 5 15 NOTE 1 the ring generator level option should be set in the H position factory for initial instal lation 3 Insertthe PSTU intothe appropriate slot refer to Paragraph 5 22 and apply firm even pres sure to ensure proper mating of connectors 9 30 PSTU Wiring 9 31 Referto PSTU Wiring Diagram Section 100 816 208 for wiring interconnecting details 9 32 The PSTU is registered for use with OL13A type lines for off premises stations 9 40 PSTU Programming Overview 9 41 The following parameters may be specified through programming for the PSTU Program 03 e Specify code 31 for all slots that have PSTUs
304. n changed To Exit this Program Press CR NOTE Programs 10 1 10 2 and 10 3 use Type 1 procedure 25 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM Q TYPE 1 PROGRAM PROCEDURE EXAMPLE PROGRAMS 10 1 10 2 10 3 15 16 42 0 77 1 77 2 ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the MODE prompt enter P R O CR P Enter Program Number P 10 Refer to the record sheet and enter the desired program number 10 Example Program 10 1 enter 10 press CR Enter Program Code or Digit s Per Record Sheet P10 1 1 or other digit required NOTE Most programs do not require a second digit Enter Button LED Number P10 1 O1 N see note Enter the desired button LED number Example Button LED 01 enter 0 1 To Change Button LED Status 10 101 Refer to the System Record Sheet and change the status if required V or N Example Enter Y To Advance to Next Button LED P10 101 Y Press SPACE Repeat step 5 if necessary 02 N To Review Button LED Status Change P10 1 01 Y Button LED ON Enter CR L Button LED Number Re enter Steps 3 and 4 2 Program Code NOTE This step is optional and not required to save data Program Number To Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR B To exit this program press then press CR C Continue returning to step 2 until all Type 1 p
305. n is ringing a Using asuitable voltmeter measure volt age across terminals 1 and 2 of the HESB TBI terminal block e Voltage indication should be 4 5 5 0 VDC NOTE Ringing stops once the call is manually an swered There should be NO voltage potential across terminals 1 and 2 b If voltage is not as specified during ring ing check that the telephone wiring con nections to the HESB have been made properly wires to terminals 1 and 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block may have been reversed INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 HESB REAR VIEW VOLUME CONTROL KO INTERNAL WIRING TBI JUMPER WIRES 4 6 CLEC XS Xe Kex 3456 TB1 TB2 12 78 910 2 1 2 10 4 5 3 3 4 4 654321 1654321 USEDI USED JUMPERS 24 JACKETED MODULAR VOICE DOOR PHONE sez 117 VAC TO CONNECTORS 12V OV 12 VDC MAY BE USED 200000 TB2 FROM DIGITAL 123 A TELEPHONE HESB 66 BLOCK STATION CABLING TIP RING PT PR y 25 PAIR JACKETED CABLE TWISTED PAIR 24 AWG BASE UNIT PDKU OR KCDU 654321 654321 123456 123456 HESC 65A CABLE MODULAR CORD 2 STATION OCA STRAP DONOT CUT m A NOTE See Section 100 816 206 fo
306. n operational Check system hardware per paragraph 6 01 for DK8 or 7 01 for DK16 of this section Was the fault Tag the defective isolated bv completing unit s and return the svstem hardware for repair check2 Re initialize the svstem Programs 90 92 and 03 and re check fault using default program NOTE data do not enter Program 03 is not used for customer data base Reprogram customer data base one program at a time and check to see if fault re occurs Was the fault cleared after re initializing the system Does the fault re occur after entering customer data base Call your technical support group FAULT FINDING SEGTION 100 816 500 MARGH 1993 GHART NO 3 STATION DIAL TONE FAULTS Check station wiring per paragraph 8 START of this section Repair if necessary Is the fault cleared Replaceable Station PCBs Is DK8 QCDU and the QSTU faulty station on a DK16 Base KSTU DK16 Expansion KCDU PDKU PEKU PESU replaceable station PCB Replace the PCB and retest Is the fault cleared Are the B Replace the defective faulty station s only Change the expansion unit and return it to the in the DK16 expansion unit and retest repair center unit Replace the DK8 or Is the DK16 Base KSU and fault initialize the system cleared Prog 90 92 03 Retest Is the fault Call vour tec
307. nal modem to track status of carrier detect signal 1 BL NOTE 2 Wire colors may vary with other types of modular adaptors PES 6 PIN MODULAR JACK O N B lt If connected to an external Haves compatible modem interchange pin 2 and pin 3 and pin 20 LE d and 8 Send AT amp C1 ATSO 1 ENTER TO PDIU DS ASCII TERMINAL EXTERNAL MODEM SMDR PRINTER OR ACCOUNTING DEVICE 15 g 9 2 O 6 WIRE MODULAR CORD 4 li r QSMU TTY SMDR 6 PIN MODULAR JACK QSMU PPTC PIN OUT PIOU MODULAR PIN OUT LEAD NAME TD JUMPER DB25 PINS MODULAR PINS COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS WIRE COLOR NOTE QSMU TTY SMDR PROGRAM OPTION PROGRAM 10 3 LEDO4 ON LEDO4 OFF TTY SMDR SPEED 1200 BPS FIGURE 8 7 DK8 QSMU TTY SMDR WIRING 8 11 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 BASE UNIT 5 W FEMALE CONNECTOR BRIDGING WA 56 LIPS T1 VOICE DATA 1 1 VOICE DATA 27 PTI ADD POWER ow 2 PR1 ADD POWER W GN 28 GN W 3 W BR 29 BR W 4 W S 30 S W 5 R BL 31 BL R 6 R O 32 O R 7 R GN 33 GN R 8 R BR 34 BR R 9 R S 35 S R BK BL 36 BL BK 11 BK O 37 O BK 12 BK GN 38 GN BK 13 BK BR 39 BR BK 14 BK S 40 S BK 15
308. nd two wire devices require 190 however some devices may experience ring trip at 190 and should be set at 130 6 20 KSTU Installation Procedure 6 21 Install the KSTU in accordance with the follow ing steps 1 Make sure that the power supply switch is PLASTIC STAND OFF MOUNTING SCREW INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 TABLE 5 KSTU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS CONTROL INDICATOR CONNECTOR Figure 5 11 Ring Voltage Jumper Plug SW540 Connector P508 Female Connector TYPE OF COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Three terminal jumper Sets ring generator voltage level for all circuits 190V L 130V to male connector P8 on the motherboard Connector Cable P504 Cable Connects to P4 connector on the motherboard OFF 2 KSTU cable into the P4 connector on the motherboard in the Base Unit The red wire on the cable should match up with pin 1 on the lower side of the connector 3 Plug the KSTU P508 female connector into the 8 male connector on the motherboard 4 Secure the KSTU to the standoffs with the two provided screws 6 30 KSTU Wiring 6 31 Refer to Base Unit Wiring in Section 100 816 208 for KSTU wiring 6 32 The must be connected to a OL13A or equivalent type lines for off premises stations 800 ohms loop resistance max including the telephone or other devices DC off hook resistance
309. ne D speakers C Connectthe BGM music amplifier outputto terminal 23 PG COMMON of the PIOU and the to the output of the page amplifier 1 20 EXTERNAL BGM MUSIC SOURCE 5 Connect the PIOU PGOUT pins to the zone A zone D speakers 5 15 DK16 Zone Page with BGM multiple am plifiers This configuration also provides multiple zone paging capability as in Paragraph 5 13 How ever separate amplifiers are used for each zone Install this option in accordance with the following steps refer to Figure 7 17 1 Connect the inputs from the paging amplifiers via an RJ11 jack to the J7 600 ohm RCA Jack on the Base unit Or direct connect J7 to Amp using a standard audio cable with RCA plugs INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 66 BLOCK PIN NUMBERS JACKETED TWISTED PAIR 24 AWG PAGING BASE SERVICE UNIT 79 JACK MUSIC OPTIONAL PIOU PIN NUMBERS BGM 25 PAIR CABLE MUSIC SOURCE TO EXTERNAL SPEAKER NIGHT RINGING PROGRAM ASSIGNMENTS SEE PARAGRAPH 9 OF SECTION 100 816 207 Program 77 1 LED ON Button LED Relav Assignment FIGURE 7 16 DK16 PIOU ZONE PAGE BGM NIGHT RING SEPARATE AMPLIFIERS 7 21 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 66 BLOCK PIN NUMBERS JACKETED TWISTED PAIR 2 24 AWG PGOUT 1 15
310. new features options etc created by new additions PARTI KSU INSTALLATION 1 GENERAL 1 00 This chapter provides the instructions nec essarv to mountboth the STRATA DK16 Base Kev Service Unit and the Expansion Kev Service Unit Instructions are also provided on how to test remove and replace the power supplv and base unit CO line interface subassembiv 2 KEV SERVICE UNIT MOUNTING 2 00 Mounting Surface Considerations 2 01 The Base Kev Service Unit and the optional Expansion Kev Service Unit are both designed to be mounted on a wall or other vertical surface lt is recommended to use Method 1 or 2 in Figure 5 2 see Note NOTE If mounting the KSU directly to a wall be sure to align screws with studs behind the wall if using a hard board between the KSU and the wall install screws first to the hard board and then secure the hard board to the wall mak ing certain that screws are aligned with studs 2 10 Mounting Preparation 1 Loosenthe screws on the front cover and the side cover of the Base Key Service Unit and remove the covers Figure 5 1 Move the SW1 Memory Battery Backup strap onthe motherboard to the ON position Figure 5 3 If applicable install the K4RCU into the Base Key Service Unit see Paragraph 14 If applicable install the KSTU into the Base Key Service Unit see Paragraph 6 Plug the AC power cable into an outlet Figure 5 3 e The AC LED on the power supply will light green
311. not considered as stations and do not affect the maximum station and CO line capacities A customer supplied Music on hold source cus tomer supplied separate background music source customer supplied reserve power bat teries a customer supplied emergency stan dard telephone for system power failure occur rences and an amplifier with speaker for paging and night ringing can all be connected to the Base Key Service Unit Table 3 D A relay contact is also provided to control one of the following peripherals Music on hold source night bell or Page Amplifier mute control 2 30 The DK16 Expansion Key Service Unit 2 31 Station and CO Lines The optional DK16 Expansion Key Service Unit has four universal slots which can support a maximum of four CO lines and eight stations Printed circuit boards PCBs that support CO lines and can be installed in the Expansion Unit are the PCOU and KCDU Table 3 E PCBs that can support stations and be installed in the Expansion Unit are the PDKU PEKU PSTU PESU and KCDU 2 32 Peripherals The Expansion Unit can sup port either a PIOU or PIOUS PCB which both provide among other features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR an interface for a local programming terminal and connectors for an in ternal modem IMDU for remote maintenance and administration Table 3 F Any device that connects to the PIOU or PIOUS should not be considered a station and does not affect the system s station
312. nt 1 or tenant 2 CO line rings NOTE CO lines must be enabled in Program 78 13 for the NT pulsating relay function 3 Access Programs 87 88 and 89 to set the CO lines that will activate the relay when the system is in the NIGHT mode 4 Access Program 39 to program a Night Transfer button 1 or NT2 on all tele phones that are to transfer the system into the NIGHT mode CONTROL DK16 CKT1 OR DK16 PDKU CKT1 OR DK16 DIGITAL CKT5 OF BASE UNIT OR DK8 KSU CKT 3 AND 4 See Fig 8 4 wiring diagrams DK16 Port 04 12 Port 02 03 L lt DOOR LOCK CONTROL CONTACT DDCB TO DK8 KSU WIRING CHART DDCB KSU JACK PIN 3 4 PIN 5 6 PORT NO NOTES 1 Relay control contact will close when the door phone is in the ringing talk or monitor state 2 See Paragraph 4 25 for Door Lock assignments 3 Relay contact specifications are 24VDC at 1 0 amp max Do not connect relay contacts to 120 AC commercial power FIGURE 7 9 DK8 AND DK16 DOOR LOCK CONTROL OPTION DDCB DK8 AMPHENOL TO DT 30 DR 5 PT 31 PR 6 DT 32 DR 7 PT 33 PR 8 PIN3 4 5 6 5 Access Programs 29 1 29 2 to program a Night Transfer button NT10r NT2 on all DSS consoles that are to transfer the system into the NIGHT mode If tenant operation is required access Pro gram 15to setthe CO lines for tenant 1 MT1 or tenant 2 M T2 operation
313. nto the standoffs on the 7 31 Refer to the DK8 MDF to CO Line Wiring KSU motherboard Diagram in Section 100 816 208 for wiring inter 5 Connectthe Frame Ground FG lead from the connecting details QCDU to the screw nearestthe QCDU located on the system Frame Ground bar 4 12 7 40 QCDU Programming Overview 7 41 The following parameters mav be specified through programming for the QCDU Program 10 1 Allows denies two CO Line Conference and Di rect Inward Svstem Access DISA Program 15 e Auto Release detection DISA and other at tributes to the CO line Program 16 Assigns CO line to groups 81 84 9 group Program 40 Assigns stations access to CO line incoming and outgoing access 8 STANDARD TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT QSTU 8 00 General 8 01 The QSTU provides two standard telephone circuits The QSTU supports two wire devices such as standard telephones Auto Attendant devices separate BGM source connection voice mail ma chines and facsimile machines NOTE For the svstem to recognize the Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF tones generated by standard telephones or any other device con nected to a QSTU port a QRCU must be installed 8 02 The QSTU is shown in Figure 4 10 Note that the QSTS PCB is factory installed on the QSTU 8 10 QSTU Configuration 8 11 The QSTU only has to be configured for the ring generator voltage level nothing else Before installing the QSTU
314. o operate effectivelv at up to 1000 feet from the kev service unit if using 24 AWG cable But digital telephones that are equipped with Integrated Data Interface Units or ADMs should have two pair or external power to function effectivelv at this distance This also ap plies to digital telephones that are supported bv svstems that must operate with batterv reserve power see Wiring Diagrams Section 100 816 208 for loop limits see Table 8 D INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SEGTION 100 816 206 MARGH 1993 To accommodate the digital telephone line cord the cable should be terminated in a modular sta tion connector block RJ 11 atthe station location The standard single pair modular digital telephone cord that is sent with the telephone is 7 feet the maximum allowed is 25 feet NOTES 1 Digital telephone cable runs must not have the following Cable splits single or double Cable bridges of any length High resistance or faulty cable splices See Section 100 816 208 for secondary protector information N eee 2 20 Connecting Electronic Telephones to the System DK16 only 2 21 The following provides information on how to connect electronic telephones to the DK16 sys tem NOTE Before proceeding see warning and caution notes in Paragraph 2 01 2 22 Electronic telephones are connected to elec tronic telephone circuits in the DK16 Expansion Unit on the Electronic Telephone Interface Unit PEKU and the Stan
315. o output data to a printer via a terminal Paragraph 9 To change or review speed dial via a terminal Paragraph 12 To test viaa To set messages terminal via a terminal Paragraph 10 Paragraph 11 Programming via a terminal Paragraph 8 To exit and or change modes Paragraph 13 To terminate Local and Remote Terminal operation Paragraph 14 Paragraph 15 provides an equipment compatibility list FIGURE 1 SECTION FLOWCHART REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2 01 With the STRATA DK8 Remote Adminis tration and Maintenance is accomplished with a remote terminal modem communicating over the public telephone network but only via an exter nal modem connected to a dedicated CO line or standard telephone port See Figures 2 and 3 With STRATA DK16 Remote Administration and Maintenance is accomplished with a remote ter minal modem communicating over the public telephone network via either an external modem connected to a dedicated CO line or a standard telephone port or a modem unit IMDU in stalled on a PIOU or PIOUS PCB in the Expan sion Unit See Figures 2 3 and 4 2 02 Remote Administration and Maintenance calls with the STRATA DK16 may connect to the IMDU automatically via programmable CO line ringing assignments Program 81 89 or Direct Inward System Access DISA CO lines Program 78 or manually via the standard call trans
316. o recognize the Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF tones generated by a standard telephone or any other device connected to a PSTU port a DTMF Receiver Unit KARCU must be installed in the Base Unit 9 02 PSTU controls are shown in Figure 5 15 and described in Table 5 C 9 10 PSTU 1 and 2 Hardware Options 9 11 Thereare two PSTU versions 1 and 2 They are identical except for the ring generator The ring generator on the original version of PSTU1 is fixed at a 190V P P level while the ring generator on PSTU1 V 4 and PSTU2 can be set for 130V P P or 190V P P The W1 jumper plug is used to set the voltage level Most standard telephones and two wire devices require the 190V P P level how ever some devices may experience ring trip with 190V P P and they require the 130V P P level 9 20 INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 50 PIN AMPHENOL CONNECTOR FEMALE W1 Ring Voltage 190V P P L 130V SUBUNIT For PSTU1 V 4 and PSTU2 only BACKPLANE CONNECTOR FIGURE 5 15 PSTU AND SUBUNIT SSTU TABLE 5 C PSTU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS CONTROL INDICATOR CONNECTOR TYPE OF COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Figure 5 15 Ring Voltage W1 Jumper Three terminal jumper Sets ring generator voltage level for all Plug PSTU1 V 4 and circuits PSTU2 only H 190V 130V NOTE
317. o the right they may also be routed to the left depending on the location of the MDF 9 If the Reserve Power Battery and Charger HPFB is going to be installed refer now to Paragraph 2 30 If not proceed to Step 10 10 Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and then turn ON the DC power supply switch 11 Reinstall the front cover onto the Key Service Unit 4 4 2 30 Installing the Reserve Power Battery and Charger HPFB Figure 4 4 Place the HPFU directly above the DK8 KSU Mark the location of the two screw holes then drill holes Screwthetwo screws two thirds into the mount ing surface Hang the HFPU on the screws then tighten the screws into the mounting surface Plug the first HPFU connector into BATT con nector on the right side of the KSU Connect a ground wire from the HPFB FG screw to the QPSU8 screw labeled HPFB6 The ground wire can be fed through the opening by the AC power cord see Figure 4 3 NOTE The DK8 should be plugged into AC power and the DC power switch should be turned on The HFPU will not start to operate if AC power is not available during the initial instal lation The 24V LED on the HPFU should light If it does not light press the battery OFF switch with a pencil point or other small tipped object Dress and tie wrap the HPFU cables per Fig ure 4 4 To mount a second HPFU repeat steps 1 4 then plug the second HPFU connector in the first HPFU and
318. o the third terminal green wire ground Either the same reading or a reading of zero volts should be obtained 4 Ifthe reading is zero volts leave one probe on the ground terminal and move the other probe to the second voltage terminal CAUTION If a reading of zero volts is obtained both voltage terminals white wire to green wire black wire to green wire the outlet is not properly grounded steps 5 and 6 and proceed directly to step 7 INSTALLATION SITE REQUIREMENTS SEGTION 100 816 202 MARGH 1993 5 Ifa reading of zero volts on one terminal and 4 20 Alternate or Additional Ground a reading of 100 120 on the other terminal is obtained remove both probes from 4 21 If the third wire AC ground can not practi the outlet cally be improved or if extreme motor noise or other disturbance causes system malfunction or if 6 Setthemetertothe OHMS Rx1 scale Place local area lightning storms exist a separate direct one probe on the ground terminal and the ground may be warranted other probe on the terminal that produced a reading of zero volts The reading should be less than 1 ohm 4 22 Connecta separate earth ground from a cold water pipe or earth grounding rod directly to the FG screw terminal on the DK8 DK16 power supply CAUTION See Figure 4 5 of Section 100 81 6 204 for STRATA or Figure 5 8 of Section 100 816 If th ding i th hm th e reading is more than one ohm then 205 for STRATA
319. o work on VM transferred calls Program 39 Set the Message Waiting Indi cation Fixed Call Forward Redial and Speed Dial Select buttons on the digital and elec tronic telephones that will be used to commu nicate with the VM AA device NOTE Message Waiting Msg and Redial buttons are fixed buttons on digital telephones and it is not necessary to assign them in Program 39 Speed Dial is initialized as Button 20 on Digital telephones e Programs 81 89 Verify that the ringing assignments to the VM AA devices are set per customer requirements Programs 16 40 41 45 48 and 50 56 Verify that outgoing CO line access is al lowed on VM ports to allow the VM AA beeper notification feature to operate 7 25 Voice Mail System Installation Install the voice mail messaging system in accordance with the following steps See Figure 7 22 1 Ensurethatthe QSTU KSTU PSTU or PESU PCB is installed in the system per Section 100 816 204 DK8 or Section 100 816 205 DK16 2 Connect the voice mail messaging system to the selected QSTU KSTU PSTU or PESU 1 32 standard telephone ports refer to Wiring Dia grams Section 100 816 208 for QSTU PSTU KSTU and PESU wiring interconnecting de tails Program the system for the required voice mail messaging features refer to Paragraphs 7 13 and 7 22 Ensure that the DK8 QRCU or DK16 KARCU is installed and for DK16 verify that the CTU code in Program 03 is for KRCU
320. ock 7 10 Toshiba VP Voice Messaging System 7 11 The STRATA and DK16 is designed to support the full range of features offered by the Toshiba VP provides various call routing message handling and information management features including e Automated Attendant e Call Forward to Voice Mailbox e Message Waiting Indication INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 CO LINE NUMBERS dr CO LINE 111111114 LEDs ON 00000000 LEDs OFF 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 CO LINE 08 CO LINE 01 STATION PORT NUMBERS PROGRAM NUMBER NOTES 1 In this example all lines are programmed to immediately ring the station at port 00 only 2 0 LED off 1 LED on FIGURE 7 21 PIOU PIOUS SMDR PORT PROGRAM 97 DATA DUMP EXAMPLE e Voice Mail Control from digital and electronic release the Toshiba VP auto attendant port H telephone when an outside CO line caller hangs up and the System Monitoring Central Office provides a disconnect signal per Feature Integration Program 15 0 and 15 3 7 12 A block diagram of voice mail connections is NOTE shown in Figure 7 22 See Section 100 816 204 for 1 Notall Central Offices provide discon QSTU and Section 100 816 205 for PSTU KSTU nect signal calling control so this feature will not operate in all areas 2 Both answer and disconnect tones pro 7 13 STRATADK8andDK16 VP Programming Ks mor
321. ode At T prompt enter Q U I T CR REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES TABLE RM BU CO LINE TEST ACTION SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Test Mode At the MODE prompt enter T E S T CR gt MODE TEST To Verify Station CO Line Status Station line status enter S E K T X X XX station port CO line status enter S C O Y Y Y Y CO line number SEKT XX IDLE ON HOOK SCO YY IDLE Call Remote Station from SEKT XX and CO line Enter T K X X K Y Y CR station B s telephone number Answer station B NOTE If the system is equipped with Music on hold go to step 4 If the line must be tested via a CO to CO connection go to step 6 TK XX KYY A Press the Hold button on TK XX station B on hold Enter T K X X H CR B Listen at station B and check that the transmission from the music source is acceptable C Press the Spkr button on TKXX to release the call Enter T K X X S CR Continue returning to step 2 until all CO lines are tested To Set Up A CO to CO Connection Press the Cnf Trn button on T K X X Enter T K X X CCR NOTES 1 Station B is connected via step 3 2 Verify that Program 15 5 allows CO to CO connections 3 The next step must be completed immediately to avoid dial tone timeout Call station C or local ti
322. ok Call Announce OCA Specify code 64 to indicate a PDKU configured INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU amp PCB SECTION 100 816 205 MARCH 1993 for a DDSS console and OCA Programs 20 21 and 22 e Usetoconfigure PDIU DIs PDIU DI2s and PDIU DSs Programs 28 and 29 e Use for DDSS assignments Program 30 e Adjusts initial off hook volume level for digital telephone handsets Program 92 5 e Initializes initial ringing speaker and muted ring volume levels of digital telephones Programs 77 1 77 2 and 79 e Used for DDCB and door phone assignments 8 ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT PEKU 8 00 General 8 01 The Electronic Telephone Interface Unit PEKU provides eight ports for electronic tele phones and it must be installed in the Expansion Unit It is recommended that the current 6500 series be used because this series consumes the least amount of power 8 02 The PEKU can be configured to receive Off hook Call Announce OCA by installing an Off hook Call Announce Unit EOCU It can also be configured to support an HDSS console and an external Background Music BGM source connec tor An external amplifier for two CO line confer ence calls can also be connected to Circuits 6 and 7 of the PEKU The HDSS console the external amplifier and the BGM source are wired directly to the PEKU and require no additional hardware but do require specific ports circuits Electronic tele phones also wire directly to the
323. om the DC OUT con nector see Figure 5 10 Remove FG screw from left side of power 5 11 12 VDC BATTERY 12 VDC BATTERY BLACK JUMPER WITH RING TERMINALS PROVIDED supply to free FG wire terminal and building ground wire Remove the six screws that attach the power supply to the Base Key Service Unit Remove power supply 3 20 Power Supply Replacement 1 Route FG1 wire soldered on both sides of Base Unit motherboard so it will be under the power supply inside of standoffs see Figure 5 10 Set the power supply in its proper place in the Base Key Service Unit see Figure 5 9 Secure the power supply to the Base Key Service Unit with the six screws INSTALLATION DK16 KSU amp SEGTION 100 816 205 1993 MOUNTING SCREWS 6 RESERVE BATTERV 9 KPSU16A MITT POWER SUPPLY i MOUNTING HOLE U MIMLI IN ULL L LLI RN AND SCREW i mop n AC POWER CABLE 24 CIRCUIT TITTI DC CABLE RIGHT SIDE FG GREEN VELLOW WIRE WITH RING TERMINAL THAT IS FASTENED TO FG1 GREEN VELLOW WIRE RUN POWER SUPPLY UNDERNEATH POWER SUPPLY FG SCREW BEHIND STAND OFFS DC OUT P9 CONNECTOR KPSU16 VOLTAGE TEST POINTS GREEN YELLOW WIRE RIGHT HAND SIDE F
324. on er spe xe cive Bi e e 5 20 STANDARD TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT PSTU 5 20 General ae 5 20 PSTU 1 and 2 Hardware 5 20 PSTU Installation Procedure uu u uu 5 21 PSS ONING n ner nen mad 5 22 PSTU Programming Overview 5 22 INSTALLATION DK16 KSU amp PCB SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 TABLE OF 5 continued PARAGRAPH SUBJECT 10 STANDARD ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT PESU 10 00 General M 10 10 PESU Hardware ba psi cau pa pu RUD UE 10 20 PESU Installation Procedure i sin i iSt iecur 10 30 PESU WIrTIifi8 uu u 10 40 PESU Programming uci PD m 11 CO LINE UNIT PCOU 11 00 General 11 10 PCOU Hardware Options 11 20 PGOOUI Installati terrena 11 30 PGOU IOTER UU T e 11 40 Programming OvVverview rani Stm an 12 OPTION INTERFACE UNIT PIOU AND PIOUS 12 00 Gener l LC A 12 10 PIOU and PIOUS Hardware Oplions
325. on of STRATA DK8 system optional printed circuit boards PCBs into the Key Service Unit This includes installation instructions optional configu ration information and wiring and programming considerations for each PCB 5 02 Be sure the ground has been checked See Chapter 2 for grounding 6 PCB INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS 6 01 The STRATA KSU comes standard with four digital telephone circuits ports and two CO line circuits These circuits along with the common control unit are built into the motherboard 6 10 KSU Option PCBs 6 11 The KSU can support up to five optional printed circuit boards PCBs Figure 4 7 it can support a maximum of two QCDUS each of which provides one CO line circuit and two digital tele phone circuits a QSTU which provides two stan dard telephone circuits ports a QRCU which provides three circuits to receive DTMF tones required for DISA and devices connected to QSTUS and three circuits to detect busy tone required for the ABR feature and a QSMU which provides a port for either a Station Message Detail Recording SMDR device or a maintenance termi nal or modem System Program 10 3 LED 04 selects the function of the port SMDR or TTY 6 12 The KSU does not come from the factory with any option PCBs installed Each of the option PCBs listed above must be installed in specific locations as described later in this chapter NOTE is a standard factory installed
326. ones for headset or HESB Loud Ringing Bell option 49 All cable 24 AWG max 40 ohm loop resistance from PESU 25 50 50 1 NOT USED to electronic telephone 1000 ft 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK HDSS connection is not available with PESU NOTES Standard telephone circuits 1 amp 2 1 All cable 24 AWG max loop resistance 300 ohms from PESU to standard telephone VM port 2 Standard telephones may be on or off premises Off premises connection is made via OL13A FIC and RJ21X jack 3 Two ringers max per port 4 Circuit 6 and 7 can provide interface for an external conference amplifier Prog 10 3 FIGURE 8 19 DK16 PESU CIRCUIT CARD WIRING DIAGRAM 8 23 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 MDF BLOCK NO COLOR CKT PORT INTERCOM DEVICE STANDARD TELEPHONE CODE DESIGNATION NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE LOCATION NOT USES NOT USED T R NOT USED NOT USED NOTES 1 HDSS is not allowed 2 Indicate if external amplifier is connected 3 Indicate if BGM or electronic telephone is connected BGM connects to VT and circuit 8 only DT and DR not used 4 OCA wiring not shown see MDF to electronic telephone wiring FIGURE 8 20 DK16 PESU STATI
327. onjunction with P20 P40 P50 and P60 Off hook 10 pin connector Interface connector for optional Off hook Announce P20 Call Announce subassembly connector used in conjunction with P10 P40 P50 and P60 Off hook Call 10 pin connector Interface connector for optional Off hook Announce P40 Call Announce subassembly connector used in conjunction with P10 P20 P50 and P60 Off hook Call 10 pin connector Interface connector for optional Off hook Announce P50 Call Announce subassembly connector used in conjunction with P10 P20 P40 and P60 Off hook 10 pin connector Interface connector for optional Off hook Announce P60 Call Announce subassembly connector used in conjunction with P10 P20 P40 and P50 Ring Voltage Jumper Three terminal jumper Sets ring generator voltage level for Plug P90 circuits 1 and 2 H 190V P P factory setting L 130V P P BGM W7 Jumper Pack White jumper wire When cut configures PESU circuit 8 for BGM source connection 3 Apply firm even pressure to the EOCU to 10 13 Background Music BGM Configura ensure proper mating of connectors tion Configure the PESU to support a BGM source in accordance with the following steps 4 Use 3 pair cable for connecting the PESU and 1 Remove the PCB from its protective packag the OCA electronic telephone refer to Wiring ing Diagrams Section 100 816 208 for wiring 2 Cut the W7 BGM jumper wire on the PESU interconnecting details
328. option PDIU DI2 or ADM can be installed on a 2000 series digital tele phone Digital Direct Station Selection Console DDSS available with STRATA DK16 only Each DDSS Console requires one circuit DDSS Consoles can connect only to Circuit 8 in the Base Key Service Unit and Circuit 8 on a PDKU 3 8 The KCDU cannot support a DDSS console Digital Door Phone Lock Control Box DDCB Each DDCB requires one circuit DDCBs can only connect to Circuits 3 and 4 Ports 02 and 03 in the STRATA DK8 Key Service Unit or Circuit 5 Port 04 inthe STRATA DK16 Base Key Service Unit and Circuit 1 Port 12 on either the PDKU or KCDU STRATA DK16 3 30 Electronic Telephone Circuit Connec tions STRATA DK16 Only 3 31 There are no electronic telephone circuits in the Base Key Service Unit and none can be added to it However either the PEKU PCB which has eight electronic telephone circuits or the PESU which has four electronic telephone cir cuits can be installed in the Expansion Key Ser vice Unit The following devices can be connected to electronic telephone circuits e Electronic Telephones 6500 6000 3000 2000 series An electronic telephone can be connected to any electronic telephone circuit One electronic telephone circuit is required per electronic telephone Electronic Direct Station Selection Console HDSS The system will support only one HDSS console The console must be connected to both Circuits
329. ore data Continue with Step 3 until allProgram 29 data is entered To Exit this Program Press f f CR NOTE Programs 30 and 31 use Tvpe 1 procedure REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM Z PROGRAM 32 AUTOMATIC PREFERENCE ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter P R CR gt MODE PROG P Enter the Program Number 32 Press CR P 32 P32 Refer to the record sheet and enter the required port number Example Port 01 enter 1 P32 01 Enter The present status for this port will be displayed P32 01 100 Refer to the record sheet and enter the required ringing code Example Code 0 enter O P32 01 100 0 Refer to the record sheet and enter the required automatic off hook code Example Code 11 enter 11 P32 01 100 011 To Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR B Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 32 data is entered C To exit this program press f CR TABLE RM AA PROGRAM 33 STATION HUNTING ACTION P32 01 100 011 P32 P DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter P R O G CR gt MODE PROG Enter Program Number 33 Press CR P 33 P33 Refer to the record sheet and enter the required port number Example Port 03 enter 0 3 P33 03 Enter The present data will be disp
330. ort 08 Enter O 8 P21 04 To Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR B Continue returning to Step 3 until all Program 21 data is entered C To exit this program press CR P21 04 P21 P REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM W PROGRAM 22 DATA STATION HUNTING DATA CALL ONLY ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter G CR gt MODE PROG Enter Program Number 22 Press CR P 22 P22 Refer to the record sheet and enter the required port number Example Port 03 enter 0 3 P22 03 Enter The present data will be displaved P22 03 NN Refer to the record sheet and enter the port number that will be the hunt point Example Port 00 enter 0 0 P22 03 NN 00 To Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR B Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 22 data is entered To exit this program press f CR TABLE RM X PROGRAM 28 P22 03 NN 00 P22 iH 055 CONSOLE ATTENDANT TELEPHONE ASSIGNMENTS ACTION DISPLAV PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode At the gt prompt enter G CR gt MODE PROG P Enter Program Number 28 Press CR P 28 P28 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required DSS console number 1 2 The system will display the telephone to which the DSS consol
331. ounted di rectly above the DKSU8 as shown in Figure 2 1 3 10 Electrical Environmental Requirements and Characteristics 3 11 The electrical environmental requirements and characteristics for each system are provided in Table 2 A 4 GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS 4 00 The systems require a solid earth ground for proper operation Failure to provide ground may lead to confusing trouble symptoms and in ex treme cases system failure The AC power cord contains a conductor for the third wire ground provided by the commercial power outlet The third wire ground should be the only ground nec essary for the DK8 DK16 this ground must origi nate at the buildings main power distribution panel and have a solid connection to earth ground Figure 2 4 4 10 Third Wire Ground Test 4 11 Test the third wire ground for continuity by either measuring the resistance between the third prong terminal earth ground and a metal cold water pipe maximum 1 ohm or by using a commercially available earth ground indicator If neither procedure is possible perform the follow ing earth ground test procedure WARNING Hazardous voltages that may cause death or injury are exposed during the following test Use great care when working with AC power line voltage 1 Obtain a suitable voltmeter and set it for a possible reading of up to 250 VAC INSTALLATION SITE REQUIREMENTS SEGTION 100 816 202 MARGH 1993 TABLE 2 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL EN
332. oup ALLOW Press SPACE to enter more codes or Press SPACE to temporarilv store data Press SPACE when P46 completed Continue returning to step 3 until all data input is completed for this program To Exit this Program Press f CR 47 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM AU PROGRAM 46 10 40 TOLL RESTRICTION CLASS PARAMETERS ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt prompt G CR Enter Program Number 46 P 46 Press CR 46 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the Toll Restriction 46 10 class number 1 4 Then enter the number 0 Example Class 1 enter 10 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required TABLE 1N button LED number Example Button number 11 enter 1 1 The system will display the status of the button LED Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required Y or N TABLE1 N Y To access next button number press SPACE TABLE2 N To Exit Program Store Data 1 N Y A To store data press CR TABLE2 N B To exit this program press CR REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM AV PROGRAM 47 TOLL RESTRICTION EXCEPTION OFFICE CODES ASSIGNED BY AREA
333. paragraphs list and identify the wiring diagrams provided in this chapter 2 10 Station Wiring Diagrams e Figure 8 1 Secondary Protector Diagram e Figure 8 2 DK8 MDF Wiring to KSU Amphenol Station and Relav Connections e Figure 8 3 DK8 MDF Wiring to CO Lines KSU and QCDU e Figure 8 4 DK8 DK16 MDF Wiring DDCB and Door Lock Control e Figure 8 6 DK8andDK16 Line Record e Figure 8 7 DK8 QSMU TTV SMDR Wiring e Figure 8 8 DK16 Wiring Base Unit P5 Amphenol Station and Relay Connections e Figure 8 9 DK16 MDF Wiring CO Lines to Base Unit e Figure 8 10 DK16 Wiring for Digital Telephones DKTS and Digital DSS Console DDSS to PDKU e Figure 8 11 DK16 Wiring for Digital Telephones DKTS with PDIU DI PDIU DI2 and PDIU DS to PDKU KCDU or Base Unit e Figure 8 12 or DK16 PDKU KCDU DK8 KSU or DK16 Base KSU Digital Station MDF Cross Connect Record INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SECTION 100 816 208 MARCH 1993 e Figure 8 13 DK16 Wiring Electronic Telephone to PEKU e Figure 8 14 DK16 MDF Wiring HDSS Con sole and Associated Electronic Telephone Wir ing to PEKU e Figure 8 15 DK16 PEKU Background Mu sic Connection e Figure 8 16 DK16PEKU Station MDF Cross Connect Record e Figure 8 17 DK16 MDF Wiring Standard Telephone Voice Mail to PSTU e Figure 8 18 DK16PSTUStation MDF Cross Connect Record e Figure 8 21 DK16 MDF W
334. power supply 3 20 Power Supply Replacement Figure 4 5 1 Set the power supply in its proper place in the Key Service Unit Figure 4 5 2 Secure the power supply to the Key Service Unit with the top two and bottom left corner screws Install the green third wire ground ring terminal with the FG screw Plug the AC cable into the CN1 connector on the power Figure 4 5 4 5 INSTALLATION DK8 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 204 MARGH 1993 Plug the DC cable into the CN3 connector on the power supplv Figure 4 5 Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and turn ON the power supplv switch Test QPSU8 power supply according to the DK8 Hardware Fault Isolation procedure Sec tion 100 816 500 Paragraph 6 Plug HPFB cable into BATT connector of power supply and reconnectthe HPFB ground wire Figure 4 5 Reinstall the cover on the key service unit 4 DK8 POWER FAILURE EMERGENCY TRANSFER OPTION 4 00 Adedicated standard telephone can be con nected to the Power Failure Transfer Interface PF1 on the Key Service Unit to provide power failure backup During normal operation this tele phone cannot be used it does not count as a station so it does not reduce the system s 10 maximum station capacity But if there is a power failure the telephone will automatically be con nected to CO line 1 When power is restored the system will automatically resume with its normal station and CO line assignments and
335. pped with either the HVSU2 assembly or the combined HVSU and HVSIs assemblies to receive Off hook Call Announce See EOCU under Miscellaneous Peripherals PDIU DI2 Total for 2000 series Digital Telephones PDIU D1 Total for 1000 series Digital Telephones Digital telephones must be equipped with a PDIU DI2 or a PDIU DI to transmit and receive voice and data calls If Add on module is installed then PDIU DI2 cannot be installed Miscellaneous Peripherals DPFT Yes or No The DPFT provides a means to connect eight selected CO lines to standard telephones if there is a power failure PSTU must be installed in Expansion Unit EOCU Yes or No An EOCU must be installed on a PEKU or PESU that is connected to electronic telephones which are equipped to receive Off hook Call Announce See HVSU2 and HVSU HVSI in Telephone Upgrades HESB Amplifier Speaker Total 1 One HESB and HHEU is required for each digital and electronic telephone with the Loud Ringing Bell feature 2 One HESB is optional to provide single zone external page connected to the Base Unit s 600 ohm exter nal page output Customer supplied amplifiers speakers may be used in place of the HESB 3 One HESB is optional to provide a talkback amplifier page speaker connected to the Base Unit s 600 ohm external page output Customer supplied amplifiers speakers may be used in place of the HESB Talkback for HESB requires an MDFB MDFB Door Phone Total The MDFB plu
336. quired feature code 2 or 3 digits Example Code 01 enter 0 1 To select the next button number press SPACE Continue returning to step 6 until all port 00 features are programmed Press CR to store data A Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 39 data has been entered B To exit this program and store data press CR NOTES 1 Program 40 41 use 2 proceaure 2 Program 42 0 use Type 1 procedure REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM AG PROGRAM 42 1 8 PBX ACCESS CODE ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the MODE prompt enter O CR P Enter Program Number 42 P 42 Press CR 42 Refer to the Svstem Record Sheet and enter the required P42 1 NN PBX group number 1 8 Svstem will displav present PBX access code Refer to the Svstem Record Sheet and enter the required access code N Space Don t care Example 9 enter 9 N To Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR B Return to step 3 to continue in this program C To exit this program press CR REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM AH PROGRAM 60 SMDR OUTPUT ACCOUNT CODE DIGIT LENGTH STEP ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the MODE prompt enter PROGCR Enter Program Number 60 P 60 Press CR P
337. r mating of connectors 7 After installing the PESU gently pull the PCB outward Ifthe connectors are properly mated a slight resistance will be felt 10 30 PESU Wiring 10 31 Refer to PESU Wiring Diagram Section 100 816 208 for wiring interconnecting details 10 40 PESU Programming Overview 10 41 The following parameters may be specified through programming for the PESU 9 25 INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU amp PCB SECTION 100 816 205 MARCH 1993 Program 03 e Specify code 25 for all slots that have PESUs without EOCU Specify code 26 for all slots that have PESUs equipped with EOCU NOTE A special code is not required to connect BGM to a PESU Program 31 e Configures the PESU Circuits 1 and 2 for con nection to voice mail devices Program 10 2 e Sets the standard telephone ring cadence for normal or distinctive ringing and BGM source connection Program 10 3 Used for external amplifier connection Program 19 e Also used for BGM connection 11 CO LINE UNIT PCOU 11 00 General 11 01 The PCOU PCB adds four CO lines to the system and it can only be installed in the Expansion Unit The PCOU provides Ring Detection Dial Outpulsing and Hold as well as Automatic Busy Redial ABR circuitry Each CO line can be pro grammed for Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF or dial pulse NOTE There are two PCOU versions 1 and 2 They are identical in fit form function and are inter changeable in all DK sy
338. r phone can be heard atthe paging station with this application pressing the door phone but tonis notrequiredto talkback through the door phone 4 27 HESB Wall Mounting Instructions The HESB can be mounted to a wall or other vertical surface Use the following instruction to mount the HESB see Figure 7 14 1 Find a suitable location on the mounting sur face for the HESB INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 C DK8 OR DK16 KSU 600 OHM PAGE RCA JACK NOTE PIOU PIOUS page outputs do not operate JACKETED TWISTED PAIR 24AWG VOLUME CONTROL O 000000006600 JUMPER WIRES 12245678910 TB1 TB2 MAY BE USED NI 12 3 4 6543211654321 a NOT USED INTERNAL WIRING VOICE DOOR PHONE TBI VOICE 3 gt 3 4 FB X 123456 LI L 12V YOV ERE VDC JUMPERS HESB REAR VIEW FIGURE 7 12 DK8 AND DK16 HESB AMPLIFIED SPEAKER WIRING INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 MDFB REAR VIEW 1 2 112 DOOR PHONE TALKBACK MICROPHONE JACKETED DK8 OR DK16 KSU 600 OHM PAGE RCA JACK NOTE PIOU PIOUS page outputs do not operate JACKETED TWISTED PAIR 24AWG JUMPER WIRES TB1 TB2 19 34 5 6 INTERNAL WIRING TBI VOICE 4 4 3 3 DOOR PHONE 7 4
339. r EA1 Code 45 3 NNNNN Refer to the Svstem Record Sheet and enter the required number Example 12345 1 2 3 4 5 CR 45 45 3 12345 Enter code number 4 The svstem will displav present authorization code digit length Refer to the Svstem Record Sheet and enter the required authorization code number digit length Example 12 enter 12 CR 45 45 exit this program press CR NOTE 5 and 6 are entered the same wav as 3 and 4 respectivelv 45 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM AR PROGRAM 45 8 9 TOLL RESTRICTION OVERRIDE CODE ACTION Enter the Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter P R O CR DISPLAY PRINTOUT gt MODE PROG P Enter the Program Number 45 Press CR P 45 P45 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter 8 or 9 for the desired code number The system will display the present override code number P45 8 NNNN Refer to the record sheet and enter a new number if required Example 1234 Enter 12 3 4 P45 8 NNNN 1234 To Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR To exit this program press f CR TABLE RM AS PROGRAM 46 2 4 45 8 NNNN 1234 P45 P TOLL RESTRICTION ALLOWED DENIED AREA CODES ASSIGNED BY CLASS ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter P R O CR gt M
340. r instructions to cut EXSP and HHEU jumpers on the digital telephone main PCB R607 HHEU V 3 4 INSTALL HHEU CIRCUIT or 4 or HHEU2 CARD INTO BASE OF DKT PER HHEU INSTALLATION INFORMATION IN SECTION 100 816 206 2 FIGURE 7 10 DK8 AND DK16 HESB DIGITAL TELEPHONE WITH LOUD RINGING BELL WIRING 7 14 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 HESB REAR VIEW VOLUME CONTROL RED XO GREEN INTERNAL VOICE TIP WIRING VOICE RING TBI VOICE JUMPER WIRES 4 6 000090000900900 Tet Tee 2 1 12345678910 3 3 LI 6 7 4 4 JUMPERS 654321 1654321 P NOT USED 24 AWG JACKETED MODULAR DOOR PHONE XWISTED HACU 120 117 5 12V OV PAIR 12 VDC MAY BE USED 0000000 FROM ELECTRONIC ae TELEPHONE oV TO HESB MDF 66 BLOCK STATION CABLING VOICE TIP VOICE VOICE RING VOICE RING DATA T1 1 25 TWISTED PAIR 24 AWG 654321 123456 5 65 HESC 65A CABLE EE CUT OCA See Section 100 816 206 STRAP OR for instructions on how to J i R607 cut the HHEU strap inside the telephone ELECTRONIC INSTALL HHEU CIRCUIT TELEPHONE C
341. r when operating on reserve power per Table 8 D PT PR mav be used with normal station runs also ADMs and or DIUs can be connected to circuits 1 4 can be connected to Circuit 1 FIGURE 8 22 DK16 MDF WIRING CO LINES AND DIGITAL TELEPHONES KCDU 8 26 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 PIOU PCB PIOU 25PR MDF 66M BLOCK MULTI ZONE PAGE 30W IMPEDANCE COLOR PIN 300 OHMS S Bk 30 Bk S 29 ZONE 35 34 ZONE 36 ZONE 37 ZONE 38 4 ZONE 38 SELECT RELAY FUNCTION WITH PROGRAM 77 1 DOOR LOCK OR AMP CONTROL BREAK onl RO 0 OR MAKE RCA JACK MUTE CONTROL ALSO 6000 DUPLEX AMPLIFIER UNIT PAGE RELAY MULTI ZONE A PIN 42 AND 17 OF P5 AMPHENOL 2 BASE UNIT PROVIDED BY BASE ALARM SENSOR P11 EXTERNAL HO MA CONTROL One GAN BACKGROUND UK 7 1 MUSIC 1 SOURCE MDF SELECT RELAY FUNCTION WITH PROGRAM 77 1 CONNECTIONS NIGHT RELAY OR ALL WIRES SHOULD TO MUSIC ON HOLD MOH CONTROL BE JACKETED 24 AWG INPUT ON P6 CONNECTOR TWISTED PAIRS ON BASE UNIT NOTE This figure shows PIOU relay callouts See Chapter 5 for PIOUS relay callouts FIGURE 8 23 DK16 MDF W
342. rade HVSU2 or HVSU HVSI 4 11 Electronic telephones must be equipped with either the HVSU2 subassembly or the combined HVSU and HVSI subassemblies to receive Off hook Call Announce OCA calls These tele phones also require three pair wiring to receive OCA instead ofthe standard two pair Telephones making OCA calls do not require an upgrade or extra wire pair 4 12 HVSU2 Upgrade Installation Install the HVSUZ in accordance with the following steps 1 Loosen the four captive screws securing the telephone base Figure 6 1 and remove the base 2 Position the HVSU 2 on the standoffs inside the base and secure with the two provided screws Figure 6 12 6 11 INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SECTION 100 816 206 MARCH 1993 TO HVSU CONNECTOR P2 ON MAIN PCB INSIDE TELEPHONE FIGURE 6 12 HVSU2 INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES 3 Connect the HVSU2 wire plug to the P2 connector on the printed circuit board PCB in the telephone Figure 6 13 4 13 HVSU HVSI Upgrade Installation In stall the HVSU HVSI subassemblies in accor dance with the following steps 1 Loosen the four captive screws securing the telephone base Figure 6 1 and remove the base 2 Align the P5 connector on the HVSI subas sembly with the receptacle on the HVSU subassembly Figure 6 14 Apply firm even pressure to the PCBs to ensure that the connectors mate properly they should click NOTE Exercise care when assemblin
343. ration Chapter Four STRATA DK8 KSU Installation Chapter Five STRATADK16KSU and PCB Installation Chapter Six Station Apparatus Installation Chapter Seven Peripherals Installation Chapter Eight System Wiring and Main Dis tribution Frame Arrangements 3 REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION 3 00 The STRATA DK8 and DK16 digital key systems are supported by the following comple ment of reference documentation 3 10 General Description An overview of the STRATA DK8 and DK16 systems and their fea tures 3 20 Programming Detailed step by step in structions on how to enter data in the System Record sheets and how to program the system from the completed System Record Sheets LCD responses are included to provide clear guidance for the programmer 3 30 User Guides Detailed step by step guides on how to operate digital telephones electronic INSTALLATION INTRODUCTION SECTION 100 816 201 MARCH 1993 telephones standard telephones direct station selection consoles add on modules and data in terface units 3 40 Fault Finding Procedures Hardware trou bleshooting and diagnostic information presented in flowchart form 3 50 Remote Maintenance and Administration Programming and maintenance procedures spe cially adapted for remote maintenance and admin istration terminal use Detailed step by step in structions are provided complete with the terminal responses 4 SYSTEM MNEMONICS TERMS 4 00 Mnemonics
344. rcuit 8 of the base fault 5 unit or PDKU KCDU does cleared support DDSS For HDSS circuit 7 and 8 of PEKU PESU does not support HDSS Correct as necessary Is the fault cleared Test DSS cable with cable continuity Check in paragraph 8 of this section Correct as necessary Is the fault cleared Call your technical support group 11 FAULT FINDING SEGTION 100 816 500 MARGH 1993 GHART NO 6 VOICE MAIL EXTERNAL AUTO ATTENDANT VM AA FAULTS START This chart assumes Check that QRCU DK8 the VM AA device K4RCU DK16 is installed has no faults correctly and programmed with Code 92 in Prog 03 Prog 03 is not required for DK8 QRCU Is VM AA integration completelv non operational Is the fault cleared Check that the VM AA ports are connected to the standard Read Voice Mail Options in paragraph 9 of telephone station ports correctly Section 100 816 207 Also read programming Refer to QSTU KSTU PSTU or instructs in Chapter 2 of Section 100 816 PESU wiring diagrams in Section 302 for the following programs 03 Code 92 100 816 208 Slot 00 for KARCU DK16 only 15 0 and 15 3 Auto release and 31 LEDs 04 05 09 15 Correct if necessary 20 This information explains System Hardware and Programming options related to Voice Mail and external auto attendant Correct Hardware and or System Programming as necessary Is the fault
345. rdance with the following steps 1 Remove the PCB from its protective packag ing 2 Ensure the PIOU or PIOUS has been config ured for the appropriate hardware options refer to Paragraph 12 10 and Section 100 816 207 3 Insert the PIOU or PIOUS into slot 06 in the Expansion Unit and apply firm even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors OPTIONAL IMDU PCB REMOTE MAINTENANCE MODEM BACKPLANE CONNECTOR 4 After installing the PIOU or PIOUS gently pull the PCB outward If the connectors are prop erly mated a slight resistance will be felt 12 30 PIOU and PIOUS Wiring 12 31 Refer to Peripheral Equipment Installation Section 100 816 207 and Wiring Diagrams Sec tion 100 816 208 for PIOU PIOUS wiring inter connecting details 12 40 PIOU and PIOUS Programming Overview 12 41 The following parameters may be specified through programming for the PIOU and PIOUS Program 77 1 e Assigns relay control and IMDU options Program 60 e Assigns SMDR options Program 78 e Enables Night Ringing over External Page 9 30 INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 TABLE 5 6 PIOUS CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS CONTROL INDICATOR CONNECTOR TYPE OF COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Figure 5 19 SMDR TTV Interface Interface connector for SMDR printer Connector J3 Dual modular connector call accounting device and maintenance terminal modem
346. re is required Music on hold Background Music Source Interface Yes or No A music source can be connected to this interface Standard on DK8 to provide Music on hold to CO lines and stations on hold and to provide Background Music to station speakers and external page speakers Power Failure Transfer Interface Yes or No A standard telephone can be connected to this interface to provide connection to a CO line if there is a power failure PFT interface is standard on DK8 one customer supplied standard telephone is required 600 ohm page Interface Standard on DK8 Yes or No This interface connects with customer supplied speakers and amplifiers for paging or Toshiba HESB and Background Music applications QSMU Yes or No A customer supplied Station Message Detail Recording SMDR printer or Remote Maintenance Terminal TTY or modem PPTC Yes or No Modular adaptor required for interface to SMDR device or Maintenance Terminal or Modem 2 TELEPHONE UPGRADES All upgrades share the telephone port and do not require separate ports Add on Module ADM Total 2000 series digital telephones can be equipped with an Add on Module to provide 10 Direct Station Selection buttons autodial buttons all call page and night transfer if PDIU DI2 is installed ADM cannot be installed DVSU Total One DVSU is required for each digital telephone that must receive Off hook Call Announce HESC 65A Total One HESC 65A modul
347. remove it Figure 6 1 2 Referto Figure 6 4 for 2000 series telephones or Figure 6 5 for 1000 series telephones and insert the two integrated unit wire plugs into the connectors on the printed circuit board PCB in the telephone observing the red wire for correct positioning 3 Attach the integrated unit to the bottom of the telephone and secure with the four captive screws 4 Remove the telephone number directory tray from the original telephone base and install it on the integrated unit telephone base Bend the tray by squeezing its sides so it bows slightly to remove and re install Figure 6 4 or 6 5 5 Check Table 8 D in Section 100 816 208 install 2 pair house cable or external power and 2 pair modular cord supplied with PDIU DI if required to achieve maximum distance 3 14 Integrated Data Interface Unit Program ming Overview Program 39 e Assigns the Data Call Data Release and Modem buttons Programs 20 and 22 Used for data interface unit assignments INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SEGTION 100 816 206 MARGH 1993 RS 232 FEMALE DIU amp VSU DB 25 CONNECTOR DIU amp ADM TO P1 OF BOTTOM PCB DIGITAL TELEPHONE TO P2 OF TOP ASSEMBLY BOTTOM PCB PDIU DI2 2000 DIGITAL TELEPHONE BASE FIGURE 6 4 PDIU DI2 INSTALLATION INTO 2000 SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE RS 232 FEMALE DB 25 CONNECTOR PERCEPTION STRAP ONLY CUT IF INSTALLED ON PERCEPTION TO P1 OF
348. retest piggy back PCBs include QSTU QCDU QRCU QCNU and QSMU 4 Test power supply as follows refer to Figure 2 a Plug the AC power cable into an outlet e The AC LED on the power supply should light green b Turn the power supply switch to the ON position e The DC LED on the power supply should light green c Using the voltmeter measure the volt ages referenced to frame ground FG at the power supply connector CN3 pins test points and pin 42 of IC5 located on the motherboard Figure 2 The volt ages should fall within the ranges below If the voltages do not fall within the range unplug the DC power pins from power supply connector and mea sure 24V again at the same location if the voltages remain unacceptable re place the power supply see Section 100 816 204 e J19 Green Wires OV J19 Yellow Wires 24 e Range 26 3V 27 8V 1 5 Pin 42 5V e Range 4 5V 5 5V If the 24V tests within range but 5V is not with in specification the KSU must be replaced FAULT FINDING SEGTION 100 816 500 MARGH 1993 RAM STORAGE RAM STORAGE JUMPER PLUG IC5 PIN 42 5V BATTERV J20 CONNECTOR FOR QSMU TEST POINT 44 5 5 5 nT h PCB INSTALLATION QPSU8 POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY MOUNTING SCREW CN4 BATTERY CONNECTOR PLUG POWER SUPPLY 9 9 MOUNTING SCREW hi C BATTERY
349. ribution frame MDF with standard twisted pair jacketed telephone cable Single pair wiring is required Refer to Wiring Diagrams Section 100 816 208 for more details NOTE See Section 100 816 208 for secondary pro tector information The standard telephone cable s overall loop resis tance connected on or off premises is 300 ohms maximum including the telephone resistance This also applies to all devices connected to standard telephone circuits A standard telephone connected off premises via the telephone network should interface with OL13A lines or equivalent and connect to an RJ21X FIC jack or equivalent 2 40 Telephone Wall Mounting 2 41 This section provides instructions on how to mountdigital telephones and electronic telephones DK16 only to a wall or other vertical surface Instructions on mounting standard telephones are not provided here refer to the manufacturer s documentation for those instructions INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SEGTION 100 816 206 MARGH 1993 PLASTIC 2 42 Mount digital and electronic telephones in HANDSET accordance with the following steps HANGER NOTES 1 Digital telephones equipped with Inte grated Data Interface Units PDIU DIs or PDIU DI2s cannot be wall mounted 2 Electronic and older digital telephones equipped with HHEUT can be wall mounted 2000 series Digital Telephones with headsets can only be wall mounted with an HHEU2 1 Loosen the captive scre
350. ripheral are lo cated in this chapter 2 MUSIC ON HOLD BACKGROUND MUSIC OPTIONS 2 00 STRATA and 16 svstems provides a Music on Hold option for CO lines and digital elec tronic DK16 oniv and standard telephones con nected to the svstem A varietv of Background Music options are also provided refer to Figure 7 1 2 10 DK8 and DK16 Music on Hold MOH Option 2 11 An external music source such as a tape plaver or tuner can be connected to the RCA jack labeled MOH on the STRATA DK8 or DK16 The MOH source can be controlled on off bv a relav option set in Program 77 1 The DK8 KSU and DK16 Base Unit relav can control the MOH source or the DK16 night bell The MOH source and MOH relav contact specifications are e MOH Source Specifications e Input Impedance 600 ohms e Input Voltage recommended levels Minimum 0 14 VRMS 15 dBm Maximum 0 77 VRMS 0 dBm 1 1 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SECTION 100 816 207 MARCH 1993 e Relay Contact Specifications e Voltage 24VDC maximum Current 1 ampere maximum IMPORTANT NOTICE MUSIC ON HOLD In accordance with U S Copyright Law a license may be required from the Ameri can Society of Composers Authors and Publishers or other similar or ganization if copyrighted music is trans mitted through the Music on Hold feature of this telecommunications system Toshiba America Information Systems Inc hereby disclaims any liability arising out of
351. rograms are completed To Exit the Program Mode Press CR To Enter Another Mode Press DUMP CR data dump D TESTCR test T MESGCR LCD messages no prompt speed dial R NOTE Y button LED ON N button LED OFF REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM R TYPE 2 PROGRAM PROCEDURE EXAMPLE PROGRAMS 20 30 31 35 40 41 43 79 81 89 ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the MODE prompt enter O G CR P Enter Program Number P 30 Refer to the record sheet and enter the desired program number Example Program 30 enter 3 0 press CR Enter Port Number or Port Range Refer to the Svstem Record Sheet enter the desired port number s Example 0 4 Press button Enter the Desired Button LED Number Example Button LED 01 enter 0 1 To Change Button LED Status Refer to the System Record Sheet and change the button LED status if required or N Example Enter To Advance to Next Button LED Press SPACE repeat Step 6 if necessarv To Review Button LED Status Change P30 044 01 Y Press CR Button LED Number Re enter Steps 3 4 and 5 Port Number To Exit Program Store Data A To store data press CR To exit this program press t
352. ronic digital telephone speakers and to the external page system via the 600 ohm RCA jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit 7 3 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SECTION 100 816 207 MARCH 1993 3 Configuration C DK16 only three music sources This configuration allows the MOH source to be connected to the MOH jack on the Base Unit as in Configuration A The digital or electronic telephone BGM source is connected to a designated circuit onthe PEKU PESU PSTU or KSTU as in Configuration B and a separate BGM source is sent to the external page speakers via the PIOU Zone relav contacts see Figure 7 5 When a sepa rate BGM source is connected to the PIOU two customer supplied amplifiers are required to drive the external speakers One amplifier 1 drives the speakers for BGM when page is idle and the other amplifier 2 drives the speakers during page 2 22 MOH Source as Background Music Instal lation DK8 and DK16 Install the MOH Back ground Music option in accordance with the follow ing steps refer to Figure 7 1 1 Ensure that the Music on Hold option is in stalled in accordance with Paragraph 2 12 2 Theoutputofthe MOH RCA jack is applied to the 600 ohm PAGE RCA jack output 3 When using an HESB or external amplifier for paging BGM adjust volume using the HESB or amplifier volume control 2 23 Alternate BGM Source Installation A BGM source can be connected to either a QSTU PSTU KSTU PEKU or PESU This
353. ruc tions 1 Use only the following type and size batteries 12 volt gelcell Do notdispose ofthe batteries in a fire The cells may explode Check with local codes for possible special dis posal instructions Do not open or mutilate the batteries Released electrolyte is corrosive and may cause damage to the eyes or skin It may be toxic if swallowed 2 5 10 4 Exercise care in handling batteries order not to short the batterv with con duction materials suchas rings brace lets and kevs The batterv or conduc tor mav overheat and cause burns Charge the batteries provided with or identified for use with this product in accordance with the instruc tions and limitations specified in this manual Observe proper polaritv orientation between the batteries and batterv charger 2 44 Reserve Power Installation Install the Re serve Poweroption in accordance with the follow ing steps refer to Figure 5 9 1 Connect the PBTC 3M black jumper wire from the positive terminal of one 12VDC batterv to the negative terminal of the second 12VDC batterv Ensure that a serviceable 10 ampere fuse is installed inthe in line fuse holderofthe PBTC 3M batterv cable Connect the white lead of the PBTC 3M bat terv cable to the open positive terminal of the 12VDC battery Connect the black lead to the open negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery IMPORTANT NOTE The KSU must be connected to the live
354. s INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 MARCH 1993 e 3 CO line circuits for the three CO lines e 7 digital telephone circuits one for each of the five digital telephones the PDIU DIs do not require dedicated cir cuits onefora digital door phone lock control unit to support a door phone e one for the PDIU DS connected to the mo dem e 2 standard telephone circuits one for the modem one for the facsimilie machine e A music source for Music on hold and Back ground music can be connected to the Key Service Unit MOH RCA jacks 5 23 Conclusion Several optional PCBs in addi tion to the Key Service unit would be needed for the application Two CO line circuits and four digital telephone circuits would be provided by the KSU The third CO line circuit as well as two digital telephone circuits would be provided by an op tional QCDU A second QCDU would be neces sary to provide the seventh digital telephone cir cuit An optional QSTU would provide the two standard telephone circuits An optional QRCU would be needed for the Dual tone Multi frequency DTMF tones generated by the devices modem and facsimilie machine connected to the standard telephone lines 5 30 The following provides an examples of how to configure a STRATA DK16 5 40 Strata DK16 Example 1 Bank 5 41 Customer Requirements A bank needs two CO lines and six digital telephones three of which must be equipped with a PDIU DI It also
355. s DET and DER when a station s door lock button is pressed BREAK Opens the normally closed contacts DET and DER when astation s door lock button is pressed 4 Refer to Figure 7 8 for wiring interconnecting details Connect the PIOU or PIOUS to the MDF as required for the door lock control function 3 24 DK8 and DK16 DDCB Door Lock Control In addition to the door lock control provided by the PIOU or PIOUS DK16 only each door phone lock control box DDCB installed provides one door lock control Only two DDCBs can be installed in a system On DK8 a DDCB can be connected to Circuit 3 Port 02 and or Circuit 4 Port 03 on DK16 a DDCB can be connected to the circuit 5 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 PIOU PCB PIOU 25 PR CONNECTIONS PIN NO COLOR SELECT RELAY FUNCTION WITH PROGRAM 77 1 MDF 66M BLOCK PAGE AMPLIFIER PIN NO s DOOR LOCK OR EXTERNAL PAGE CONTROL SELECT RELAY FUNCTION MDF WITH PROGRAM 77 1 NIGHT RELAY OR MOH CONTROL CONNECTIONS ALL WIRES SHOULD BE JACKETED 24 AWG TWISTED PAIRS NOTE Dotted lines and solid lines differentiate optional connections where applicable do not connect both options simultaneously FIGURE 7 6 I 1 MUTE 32 13 i X X P DOOR LOCK CONTROL TAPE PLAYER CONTROL TO MUSIC ON HOLD INPUT DK16 PIOU RELAY GONTROL FUNGTIONAL WIRING DIAGRAM Logic
356. s allows PDIU DI equipped digital telephones that are connected to personal comput ers terminals and other devices to share access to a modem or modem pool Modems must be smart modems that respond to AT commands and return re sult codes Modems are customer sup plied 10 62 A modem s can be accessed internally for outgoing data calls or externally for incoming data calls Modems operate as DCE devices so PDIU 055 that are connected to them must be configured to operate like a DTE device In the example installation in Figure 7 24 the line side of the two modems are connectedto KSTU PSTU PESU ports to establish a modem pool however the line side of modems could be connected directly to a dedi cated CO line If modems are connected directly to telephone network CO lines automatic transfer of CO line voice calls to system modems data call will not function as described in the Data Interface User Guide For best operation and utilization of CO lines and modems it is recommended to con INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SECTION 100 816 207 MARCH 1993 IMPORTANT NOTE All ten PDIU DS EIA leads signals should be connected to the modem Consult the modem s documentation for correct RS 232 pin requirements the requirements may vary with each manufacturer 4 Connect the line side of the modem to a QSTU PSTU KSTU or PESU standard tele phone circuit or a dedicated CO line consult the modem s
357. s in Program 39 with Code 71 K1 P10 24VDC 1 0 MAX FIGURE 7 8 DK16 DOOR LOCK CONTROL OPTION PIOU PIOUS programmed to activate continuously when the Night Transfer 1 button only is set to NIGHT mode for indirect answering machine control or to pulsate at 1 second ON 3 seconds OFF for a night bell when incoming CO lines night ring over external page Program 78 13 MT1 tenant 1 CO lines 2 tenant 2 CO lines per Program 15 3 33 When configured for the Music on Hold func tion with Program 77 1 the relay activates any time a CO line is on hold In this configuration the relay is normally used to control the Music on Hold source 3 34 DK16 Night Transfer Relay Control Con figure the PIOU or PIOUS for the Night Transfer Relay function in accordance with the following steps refer to Figures 7 6 and 7 7 1 Access Program 77 1 Set LED 05 to OFF to configure the Night Hold Relay for the Night Relay function 1 10 25 PAIR AMPHENOL MDF SEE FIGURE 8 23 FOR WIRING DET PIN 34 R BR TO DOOR LOCK SEE PROGRAM 77 1 LED 07 20 FOR RELAY OPTIONS TO DOOR LOCK TERMINAL ON FRONT EDGE OF PCB 2 Access Program 77 1 Set LED 06 to provide continuous or pulsating relay activation as follows OFF Programs the relay for continuous activation when NT1 button only is set e ON Programs the relay for pulsating activation when the 1 or NT2 button is set to NIGHT mode and a tena
358. s locktogether 9 30 QRCU Wiring 9 31 The QRCU does not require any wiring 9 40 QRCU Programming Overview 9 41 The following parameters may be specified Program 12 e Set QRCU release time Program 15 e Sets QRCU operation after CO line flash 10 CONFERENCE CIRCUITS QCNU 10 00 General 10 01 The QCNU provides two conference circuits which allow two simultaneous conferences one 4 15 four party and one three party The stan dard and is installed atthe factory If itis necessary to remove and replace the QCNU turn the system off remove the QCNU and install another QCNU per paragraph 10 20 10 02 The QCNU is shown in Figure 4 7 10 10 QCNU Configuration 10 11 The QCNU does not have to be configured for operation 10 20 QCNU Installation Procedure 10 21 Install the QCNU in accordance with the following steps Figure 4 7 1 Remove the PCB from its protective packag ing 2 Make sure that the power supply switch is OFF 3 Align and insert QCNU connectors J1 and J2 into motherboard connectors J17 and J18 respectively and apply firm even pres sure to ensure proper mating of connectors Note the side with gt RIGHT silkscreened on it should be positioned as shown in Fig ure 4 7 10 30 QCNU Wiring 10 31 The QCNU does not require any wiring INSTALLATION DK8 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 204 1993 IN FIGURE 4 12
359. serial interface parameters 4 To connect the PC to the printer press the DKT s Data Call button and dial 1 3 e The CONNECT on the PDIU DS will be lit e The connection between the PC and the printer is completed as shown by the thick lines above PDIU DS 13 is in the communication mode e f busy tone is sent to the DKT the connection is not complete press Data Release and try step 4 again 5 Operate the PC to print data as required 6 To terminate the call press the DKT s Data Release button STRATA DK8 OR DK16 DIGITAL PORT 01 DIGITAL PORT 03 DK8 AND DK16 PC TO PRINTER TEST CALL USING MANUAL DIALING 10 84 Internal PC to External Test Call Using AT Commands see Figure 7 36 1 DIU Programming e Program 20 Port 00 LEDs 01 02 and 17 ON other LEDs OFF e Program 20 Port 04 LEDs 01 02 03 04 06 and 17 ON all other LEDs OFF e Program 21 Digital port 04 assigned with KSTU port 08 e Program 39 Port 00 Data Call 56 Data Release 54 and Modem 55 buttons should be provided e Default settings for PDIU DI and PDIU DS S Registers 2 Make sure 1 and 2 are on line with a communications software package and that the communication parameters of each PC and communication software package are set to the same values data transmission rate paritv data bits stop bits flow control etc INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 3 From
360. st be OFF Install the QSMU PCB in accordance with Section 100 816 204 and wire the SMDR device to the QSMU PPTC mocular cord in accor dance with Section 100 816 208 The DK16 sys tem must be equipped with a PIOU or PIOUS PCB in the Expansion Unit to support the SMDR printer call accounting device option Connection of the printer or call accounting device to the PIOU or PIOUS PCB is accomplished with a 3 pair modular cord 7 feet maximum and a PPTC connector adaptor referto Figure 7 20 for details Call record data is ASCII formatted 8 bits no parity 1 stop bit 6 12 The DK8 KSU and DK16 PIOU or PIOUS contains a call record buffer which stores call record data for 20 calls on DK8 or 50 calls on DK16 when the printed or call accounting device is turned off or when no device is connected to the SMDR port No further call records are stored after the buffer is filled When the printer or call account ing device is made operational an ERROR BUFFER OVERFLOW message is printed to indi cate that the buffer was full and that some call information may have been lost 6 13 SMDR Programming Considerations 6 14 Selectable programming options forthe SMDR printer or call accounting device are Program 60 e 2 Determines the length of time a call must be active before it will be registered by SMDR 1 21 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SECTION 100 816 207 MARCH 1993 e tem 3 Selects the records of outgoing calls or out
361. stem models 11 02 PCOU controls indicators and interface connectors are shown in Figure 5 17 and described in Table 5 E 11 10 PCOU Hardware Options 11 11 There are no hardware options supported by the PCOU 11 20 PCOU Installation Procedure 11 21 Install the PCOU in accordance with the following steps INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 1 Remove the from its protective 11 30 PCOU Wiring ing NOTE The aB PAD switches SW101 through SW401 control excessive loudness resulting from close proximitv to the CO or PBX telephone office bv providing a 3 decibel dB signal level drop to or from the PBX or CO when set to the 3 position Switches are factorv set to the 0 O dB signal level drop position 11 31 Refer to PCOU Wiring Diagram Section 100 816 208 for wiring interconnecting details 11 40 PCOU Programming Overview 11 41 The following parameters may be specified through programming for the PCOU Program 03 e Specify code 11 for the slot in which the PCOU is installed Program 10 1 e Allows denies two CO Line Conference and Di rect Inward System Access DISA Program 15 Assigns DTMF Dial Pulse DP Dialing Tenant Service DISA and other attributes to each 3 Insert the PCOU into the appropriate slot line refer to Paragraph 2 22 and apply firm Program 16 even pressure to ensure proper mating of e Assigns CO lines to groups
362. t the currently defined area code number Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the new area code number if required Example Change to 212 enter 2 1 2 Press CR Display Office Codes Enter exception table number defined in step 3 Enter Action code 4 Press SPACE to display previously selected office codes Continually press SPACE until all previously selected codes have been displayed then press CR P 52 52 L LCR Plan No Action Code Exception Table No 11000 212 Area Code Action Code Exception Table No Office Codes To Add 2 or Delete 3 Office Codes Press CR Enter exception table number defined in step 3 Refer to the System Record Sheets and enter 2 to add office codes or 3 to delete office codes Example Add office codes 300 325 Enter 2 or 3 32 5 CR 12 300 325 To Exit Program Store Data Data was stored when CR was pressed in step 6 Continue returning to step 3 until all data is entered for this program To exit this program Press CR 54 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES TABLE RM BF PROGRAM 53 LCR SCHEDULE ASSIGNM ENT ACTION SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode At the MODE prompt enter O CR gt MODE PROG P Enter Program Number 53 Press CR P 53 P53 Define Route Plan Number Ref
363. talled correctly per Section 100 816205 On DK16 check that the baud rate switch SW2 push button switch on PIOU PIOUS is set to the correct position 300 bps LED ON 1200 bps LED OFF to match the remote terminal baud rate QSMU TTY Port is 1200 bps only Correct as necessary External modem connected to QSMU PIOU PIOUS TTY port IMDU modem installed on PIOU or PIOUS DK16 only Is Remote Maintenance connection via external modem on port or IMDU modem On check that Prog 10 3 LED 04 is on Check that the communication parameters of a the remote terminal are set to match the for QSMU TTY operation Check that the I gt communication parameters of the remote IMDU 7 data bits even parity 1 stop bit terminal are set to match the TTY port 7 data Check that the PIOU PIOUS SW3 bits even parity 1 stop bit DK16 check that PIOU PIOUS SW3 switch is in the TTY position Correct as necessary Is the fault cleared Check that the modem or terminal connected to the TTY port is wired correctly per the Remote Maintenance Section 200 816 600 and QSMU PIOU PIOUS MDF wiring in Section 100 816 208 Correct above if necessary or replace QSMU PIOU or PIOUS On 16 the TTY port is the top modular jack SMDR is bottom of the PIOU PIOUS 8 16 the modular cord connecting the TTY port to the terminal or external modem must be switch is in
364. tance of device Digital 40 ohms 1000 ft 303 PDIU DI Shares digital Shares digital NOTES 1 Use 24 AWG twisted pairs 2 PESU circuits 3 and 4 are not used 3 DDCB can connect only to Circuit 5 of the DK16 Base Unit or Circuit 1 of the PDKU or KCDU 4 Two pair larger wire or local telephone power supply is required to achieve maximum range see Table 8 D Standard telephones voice mail 300 ohms auto attendant etc INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 TABLE 8 NETWORK REQUIREMENTS TOSHIBA Facilitv Network Ringer Printed Board or Interface Interface Code Jack Equivalence QCDU KCDU PCOU PCOU2 02LS2 RJ14C 0 2B Loop Start Line DK8 KSU DK16 Base KSU 02152 RJ11C 0 2B Loop Slant Line QSTU KSTU PESU PSTU OL13A RJ21X N A PSTU2 Off premises Station Circuits 1 and 2 8 3 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 TABLE 8 D DIGITAL TELEPHONE DIU DDSS CONSOLE ADM LOOP LIMITS QPSU KPSU Maximum line length 24 AWG or 1 Pair plus Battery Backup 1 Pair 2 Pair external power DKT Ringing QPSU KPSU 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m Volume Max Battery Backup 675 ft 204 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m DKT with QPSU KPSU 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m DVSU OCA Battery Backup 495 ft 150 m 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m DKT with HHEU QPSU KPSU 1000 ft 303 m 1000 ft 303 m 1000
365. ted board that can be in stalled in the optional Expansion Key Service Unit to provide the system with eight digital telephone circuits In addition to digital tele phones the PDKU can support data interface units Stand alone and Integrated a digital DSS console DDSS and a digital door phone lock control unit DDCB PDKU2 Digital Telephone Interface Unit STRATA DK16 only Provides same function as the PDKU1 except that the PDKU1 can only sup port data interface units on Circuits 1 7 while the PDKU2 can support data interface units on Circuits 1 8 PEKU Electronic Telephone Interface Unit STRATA DK16 only An optional PCB that provides the system with eight electronic tele phone circuits which can support electronic telephones a Background Music source an electronic DSS console HDSS and an ampli fier for two CO line conference calls PESU Standard Electronic Interface Unit STRATA DK16 only A printed circuit board with two standard telephone circuits and four electronic telephone circuits that can be installed in the optional Expansion Key Service Unit The elec tronic telephone circuits can support the same devices as the PEKU except for the HDSS console The standard telephone circuits can 1 4 supportthe same single line devices as the KSTU and the PSTU PFT Power Failure Transfer Interface Dedicated standard telephone interface located on the motherboard in the DKSUB16 STRATA DK16 or
366. ter PCB code entry 2 Even though PCB codes display as being changed they are not entered into working memory until the system DC power is cycled OFF and ON 3 If PCB codes are not entered into working memory by cycling DC power PCB options will not function 4 Only Program 03 requires the system power to be turned OFF and ON to store data into working memory 22 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM L PROGRAM 00 SOFTWARE CHECK REM OTE M AINTENANCE SECURITY CODE ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt MODE prompt enter R O G CR Enter Program Number 00 P 00 Press CR POO To Check Software Version POO 0 Version Enter Action Code 0 Svstem will displav the svstem s software POO version Press CR Version or Software version For DK16 PSSA For To Change Level 1 Securitv Code 1 0000 Enter Action Code 1 The svstem will displav the present level 1 four digit code Refer to the Svstem Record Sheet and change if required Press CR To Change Level 2 Securitv Code Enter Action Code 2 The svstem will displav the present level 2 four digit code Refer to the Svstem Record Sheet and change if required Press CR To Exit This Program Press CR REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM M PROG
367. terminal and activating various buttons on digital and elec tronic telephones to make telephone calls set function buttons change the system time and date etc see Figure 8 and Tables RM BS BV IMPORTANT Any digital or electronic telephone button can be activated from the remote terminal at any time while in the Test Mode even while the end user is using the telephone Therefore caution must be used to prevent service interruption or interference The Test Mode provides status tests to check whether or nota station or CO line is in use The status checks should always be made before performing other tests see Table RM BS 10 10 CO Line Testing 10 11 To test CO line transmission two or three CO lines must be available at the remote site see Figure 8 and Table RM BU 10 12 CO line testing is accomplished by using all of the following two methods 1 Establish a talk path between the two remote stations B amp C via a CO to CO connection through STRATA DK8 or DK16 gt MODE DUMP D MSG SYS SYS M60 OUT TO LUNCH SYS M61 IN A MEETING SYS M62 CALL SYS M63 BACK AT SYS M64 RETURN ON SYS M65 SYS M66 SYS M67 SYS M68 SYS M69 D FIGURE 7 SAMPLE PRINTOUT OF SYSTEM MESSAGES REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 PUBLIC TELEPHONE REMOTE SITE PC OR TERMINAL DK16 300 or 1200 BPS DK8 1200 BPS REMOTE STATION B REMOTE STATION C NE
368. ters of the PC and application software are set to the same values in this test example Sidekick SKINSTAL program INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 LAPTOP PC 2 STANDARD TELEPHONE DIALED LINE STRATA DK8 OR DK16 DKT PDIU DI 11 FIGURE 7 38 DK8 AND DK16 PC AUTO DIAL VOICE CALL TEST 3 Make sure thata dialing directory consisting of names and telephone numbers you wish to auto dial is installed within the application software include the appropriate STRATA CO line access code prefixing each telephone number 4 To auto dial using Sidekick from the PC key board a Pressthe ALT and CTRL keys simulta neously e The PC screen displays the Sidekick menu window b Press F5 twice Sidekick prompts search for INITials to display on the PC s screen Type the initials or name of the person or organization you wish to auto dial d Press ENTER e Sidekick finds and highlights the de sired name number Press ENTER again e DKT PDIU DI 11 seizes the appro priate CO line and auto dials the selected telephone number The LEDs of the DKT s Data Call and CO line 01 buttons will be lit if assigned in Program 39 Dial tone DTMF tones and ringback or busy tones are audible from the DKT s speaker 1 56 DIGITAL 01 PUBLIC TELEPHONE NETWORK 5 Take the DKT s handset off hook at anv time after the telephone number is dialed press t
369. ters represent a program group or a particular program i e ALL 03 04 10 39 etc For a printout example see Figure 6 NOTE Programs are output only in the groups indi cated To print out or review a program not included above use Program Mode proce dures 9 04 Speed Dialing Dump While in the dump mode see Paragraph 7 enter REP and two or three characters and press CR The characters represent the speed dialing codes for either an individual station A L L all stations and system data S Y S system data only 9 05 LCD Messages Dump While in the dump mode see Paragraph 7 enter MSG and two or three characters and press CR The characters represent stored messages for either an individual station A L L all stations and system data or S Y S system data only For a printout example see Figure 7 9 06 Tables provide a quick reference to the step by step procedures to output the appropriate data 10 TEST MODE 10 00 General 10 01 The remote test mode see paragraph 7 can be used to test STRATA or DK16 stations CO LINE NUMBERS 1 SELECT LED ON 8 1 111111114 0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 CO LINE 08 _ CO LINE 01 L STATION PORT NUMBER L PROGRAM NUMBER FIGURE 6 DATA DUMP PRINTOUT EXAMPLE and CO line circuits from an off site location 10 02 This testing function is accomplished by accessing stations from the remote
370. that message waiting set cancel signals appear to originate from the lowest port in the VM group All VM ports connected to a particular VM machine should be set in the same VM group Program 31 LEDs 05 08 e Message Waiting Set Cancel lf the VM ma chine has the ability to dial a code plus the appropriate station numbers to set or cancel the message waiting LEDs on electronic telephones 1 30 program the VM machine to dial the following sequences In Program 10 2 turn LED 04 ON 1 set a MW LED the VM machine must dial 6 3 station number 2 To cancel a MW LED the VM machine must dial 6 4 station number NOTE Only dial codes 63 and 64 are set in the VM device configuration the VM device will dial the station number automatically to set cancel the Message Waiting indication LED No Conference VM Prevents undesired CO line three party connections during VM calltrans fers All VM ports should be for no conference Program 31 LED 09 Privacy Override Denv Prevents stations from overriding breaking in in progress VM calls Program 31 LED 18 End to End Signaling Allows VM port DTMF operation All VM ports should be set for end to end signaling Program 31 LED 17 NOTE The QRCU or DK16 K4RCU must be installed to allow End to End Signaling VM to VM Call Blocking Prevents VM auto attendant calls from forwarding back to VM auto attendant during supervised transfers Program
371. the CO line and then e The PC screen displays dials the external modem s telephone b Type A T H from the PC keyboard used number 674 4700 in step 5a e The external modem rings and auto an e PC 1 and 2 screens both display swers the modems handshake and es NO CARRIER tablish communications e f modems send result codes the m Data Call LED on DKT 10 will be screen on PC 1 displays CONNECT unlit XXXX where XXXX is the data transmis l sion speed set bv the communication 10 85 External PC to Internal PC Test Call Using software AT Commands see Figure 7 37 e At this time PC 1 and PC 2 are con nected as shown by the thick lines above 1 DIU Programming to exchange data file transfers type e Program 20 Port 00 LEDs 01 02 and messages etc 17 ON all other LEDs OFF STRATA OR DK16 583 3700 MDF QSTU OR PUBLIC KSTU TELEPHONE INTERNAL PORT 08 NETWORK MODEM 18 TELEPHONE DIGITAL LINE PORT 04 674 4700 EXTERNAL MODEM DKT PDIU DI 10 DIGITAL B PORT 00 FIGURE 7 37 DK8 AND DK16 EXTERNAL PC TO INTERNAL PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS 1 94 Program 20 Port 04 LEDs 01 02 03 04 06 and 17 other LEDs OFF Program 21 Digital port 04 assigned with PSTU port 08 Program 39 Port 00 Data Call 56 Data Release 54 and Modem 55 buttons should be provided Program 81 Port 08 LED 01 ON
372. the Dual tone Multi frequency DTMF tones generated by the devices connected to the standard telephone circuits A PCOU would be needed for the fifth CO line 5 53 Conclusion An Expansion Key Service Unit in addition to the Base Key Service Unit would be needed for this application The three standard telephone circuits could be contained on the op tional KSTU PCB in the Base Unit However a PDKU installed in the Expansion Unit would be required for six of the 14 digital telephone circuits The Expansion Unit would also be needed for the PCOU The optional KARCU along with the music source and the page amplifier as noted earlier could be connected to the Base Unit 6 CONFIGURATION WORKSHEETS 6 00 Worksheets are provided in this chapter to help configure the system INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SECTION 100 816 203 MARCH 1993 DK8 WORKSHEET 1 STATION AND CO LINE TOTALS 1 DIGITAL PORTS CIRCUITS Device Quantity x Ports Per Ports Used DDCBs 2 max X 1 PDIU DSs 8 max X 1 Digital Telephones with or X 1 without PDIU DIs or ADMs 8 max Total Digital Ports lt 8 2 STANDARD PORTS CIRCUITS Device Quantitv x Ports Per Ports Used Maximum 2 items total including Standard Telephones Standard Telephones X 1 Other Devices Voice Mail Auto Attendant BGM Source Fax X 1 Total Standard Ports 2 maximum 3 CO LINES Number of CO lines required
373. the MODEM position Enable the IMDU by turning LED 14 ON in Program 77 1 If required assign CO lines for DISA or to ring IMDU in system Program 78 Code 51 53 When calling IMDU DISA or ring transfer 619 Correct above if necessarv or replace IMDU or PIOU S Is the fault cleared Call your technical support group TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 Strata us eiumig REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES REMOTE ADMINISTRATION amp MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE LIST PARAGRAPH SUBJECT PAGE 1 USING REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND 1 2 GENERAL DESCRIP TION tue ibo cet a rire pa Peine er een Fase 2 3 HARDWARE REQUIREMENUIS iiie const rare uet lee titer 2 4 TERMINAL MODEM 5 4 10 Maintenance Terminal External Option Svstem Hardware Requirements 6 4 20 and DK16 Local Maintenance Terminal Installation 6 4 30 Remote Maintenance Option 6 4 40 PFOQFA MINING pe 7 4 50 DK16 IMDU On Site i edna neler 7 5 LOCAL
374. tion Off hook Call Announce EOCU NOTE Hefer to Section 100 816 206 and Section 100 816 207 for installation of external op lions 10 12 Off hook Call Announce EOCU Installa tion Install the Off hook Call Announce in accor dance with the following steps 1 Remove the PCB from its protective packag ing NOTE PESU connectors P10 P20 P40 P50 and P60 are positioned to allow installation of the EOCU only in the proper position refer to Figure 5 16 2 Mate the EOCU connectors J10 J20 J40 J50 and J60 with the PESU connectors P10 P20 40 P50 and P60 refer to Figure 5 16 9 22 INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU amp SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 CUT W7 ONLY IF BGM IS CONNECTED CIRCUIT 8 OPTIONAL EOCU EQUIP FOR OCA FEATURE AMPHENOL CONNECTOR FEMALE BACKPLANE CONNECTOR RING VOLTAGE OPTION CIRCUITS 1 amp 2 ESTS STANDARD TELEPHONE L LOW LEVEL 130V P P INTERFACE ALWAYS EQUIPPED HIGH LEVEL 190V FROM FACTORY NOTE Connect two ringers maximum per port H or L FIGURE 5 16 PESU PCB OPTION LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION 9 23 INSTALLATION DK 16 KSU 8 SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 TABLE 5 0 PESU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS CONTROL INDICATOR CONNECTOR Figure 5 16 OF COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Off hook Call 10 pin connector Interface connector for optional Off hook Announce P10 Call Announce subassembly connector used in c
375. to a wall be sure to align screws with studs behind the wall if using a hard board between the KSU and the wall install screws first to the hard board and then secure the hard board to the wall mak ing certain that screws are aligned with studs 2 3 INSTALLATION DK16 KSU amp PCB SEGTION 100 816 205 1993 COVER SCREWS 6 SIDE COVER Six cover screws to be removed before mounting KSU FIGURE 5 1 DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT EXTERIOR METHOD 1 PLASTERBOARD N EXPANSION BASE UNIT FIGURE 5 2 Strata px Je b BASE COVER KFCU DOOR SCREW Do not remove to mount KSU PLASTER EXPANSION UNIT DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT WALL MOUNTING METHODS 9 2 STUD METHOD 2 HARD BOARD 1 2 INCH PLYWOOD BASE UNIT POWER SUPPLV MOUNTING HOLE AND SCREW e AC POWER CABLE FG SCREW LEFT SIDE FG WIRE GREEN VELLOW DC OUT CONNECTOR P9 KPSU16 VOLTAGE TEST POINTS TB1 FG2 CONNECTOR FOR EXPANSION GROUND WIRE RIBBON CONNECTOR P3 SW1 MEMORY BATTERY BACKUP STRAP ON BATTERY OPTIONAL KSTU SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLV KPSU16 inim mimm S Ac 9 DO POWER LIT INSTALLATION DK16 KSU 8 PCB SEGTION 100 816 205 MARGH 1993 RESERVE POWER BATTERV 8l o AND SCREW DC POWER S
376. to start over in this procedure Enter X X X XXX station number for which the message will be set and stored Enter p p page command and 2 digit message memory location 10 19 personal messages and 60 99 system messages NOTE To store system message change permanently DKT or EKT XXX must be station assigned to port 00 To Add a Message Set the terminal keyboard to upper case and enter message alphanumeric 32 characters max New message displays as it is entered To Set the Message on the DKT EKT LCD Set the terminal keyboard to lower case and enter p m O To Exit the Message Mode At any time enter m O q lower case NOTES 1 cancel a message set via Mode 95 use Mode 97 with any message number in step 4 and skip step 5 2 M represents the message entered 3 digital telephone electronic telephone REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM BQ MODE 94 REMOTE CALLED STATION MESSAGING ADD REVIEW CHANGE ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Message Mode gt MODE MESG At the MODE prompt enter M E 5 G CR To Add Or Review a Called Station Message m 94 Set the terminal keyboard to the lower case cap lock off and enter m 9 4 Enter X X X XXX Destination station number or destination m94 XXX group number
377. tor and measure again at the same location if the ranges remain unac ceptable replace the Power Supply e FG Yellow Green Wire OV e Yellow Wire 24V e Range 26 3V 27 8 Red Wire 5V e Range 4 5V 5 5V Blue Wire 5V Range 4 5V 5 5V Check system third wire ground per Section 100 816 202 If the 24V circuit breaker DC power and third wire ground are within required limits remove all hardware assemblies one at a time and test to see if the fault is cleared remove KSTU KCOU KARCU and sion Unit PCBs and remove Expansion Unit per Section 100 816 205 If the above hardware check did not clear the fault call your Technical Support Group 8 STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK 8 01 8 02 Voltmeter Test The continuity of the cable run between the DK16 KSU and the digital or electronic telephone is checked with a voltmeter as follows NOTE Perform the following at the locations indi cated 1 2 3 Modular block Check all stations cables Check cable from KSU to These tests also apply for troubleshooting cable problems with DDCB and PDIU DS devices Refer to Section 100 816 208 for appropriate MDF wiring diagrams 1 Disconnectthe digitalor electronic telephone 2 Using a DC voltmeter measure between the wires of the two pairs to verifv the readings shown in Table B for electronic telephone ports PEKU or PESU Refer to Table D for digital
378. transfer be 1 0 10 seconds minimum to generate call record printout see Program 60 2 MSS designates a Direct Inward Svstem Access DISA CO call to a station that is not answered or answered after 1 0 or 10 seconds depending on Program 60 2 DISA calls alwavs register 05 06 seconds ring before answer duration time MODM designates a call to the IMDU Remote Maintenance Modem DISA designates a DISA call thru the system via CO to CO connection Field column information is provided for SMDR output formatting purposes The call record data is ASCII formatted 8 bits no parity 1 stop bit Special dial printout Tone T Long pause L Flash F Pause P The indicates that the call was disconnected by the Central Office Calling Party Control CPC or Automatic Release AR signal CO lines must have Programs 15 0 and 15 3 enabled to be dropped by the CPC signal FIGURE 7 19 DK8 AND DK16 SMDR PRINTOUT EXAMPLES 1 26 Disconnect Timer 01 DISA 12 24 03 DISA 12 24 00 04 00 04 5 7 57 incoming outgoing 6 03 System Program Data Printout If a printer is connected to the SMDR port on the QSMU PIOU or PIOUS customer program information stored in the system RAM may be printed out for reference by using Program 97 see Paragraph 6 14 6 10 SMDR Hardware Requirements 6 11 The DK8 system must be equipped with a QSMU option PCB QSMU Program 10 3 LED 04 mu
379. u uu uu D 4 9 POB Installation Power Supply Considerations 4 9 CO LINE DIGITAL TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT QCDU 4 9 General 4 9 seus 4 11 QCDU Installation Procedure rr 4 11 4 12 QCDU Programming e 4 13 STANDARD TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT QSTU 4 13 General eR t E s 4 13 OSTU OPM NOM PT TED S 4 13 QSTU Installation 4 bibita 4 13 ee 4 13 QSTU Programming Overview Pap es 4 13 RECEIVER ABR DETECTOR UNIT QRCU 4 13 trc 4 13 i e EPI P LE 4 14 QRCU Installation Procedure nre enn tanto nbn ke ki nct 4 14 Oi PR I a eco 4 15 QRCU Programming OVOPVIBW vbi ps ua 4 15 CONFERENCE CIRCUITS GGNU 4 15 tI 4 15 QUIND Configuratio aa i p sat
380. ugh the CO PCB Printed Circuit Board PCM Pulse Code Modulation A widely used form of digital telephone switching CO Line Interface Unit STRATA DK16 only A printed circuit board that can be in stalled in the optional Expansion Key Service Unit to provide the system with four loop start CO lines circuits PCOU2 STRATA DK16 only The PCOU2 is a direct replacement for the PCOU1 Their fit form function is identical however for manu facturing reasons the PCOU1 was phased out in favor of the PCOU2 PDIU DI PDIU DI2 Integrated Data Interface Unit Replaces the normal digital telephone base to enable the telephone to transmit and receive data between a terminal personal com puter connected to the telephone and data devices connected to other PDIU Dls or to modems printers and computers connected to INSTALLATION INTRODUGTION SEGTION 100 816 201 MARGH 1993 Stand alone Data Interface Units PDIU DSs The PDIU DI is also used to provide personal computer access to outside dial up data ser vices and or bulletin boards NOTE The PDIU DI and the PDIU DI2 are identical except that the PDIU DI attaches to 1000 series Digital Telephones while the PDIU DI2 attaches to 2000 series Digital Tele phones PDIU DS Stand alone Data Interface Unit Used for modem pooling printer sharing and access to a host mainframe computer PDKUT1 Digital Telephone Interface Unit STRATA DK16 only A prin
381. uire one optional QCDU circuit and circuit 7 8 require a second QCDU to be installed NOT USED ji 50 50 66 150 SPLIT BLOCK FIGURE 8 2 DK8 MDF WIRING TO KSU AMPHENOL STATION AND RELAY CONNECTIONS 8 7 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS SEGTION 100 816 208 MARGH 1993 TO NETWORK RJ11 MODULAR JACKS MODULAR Ti CORDS R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 654321 1 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 1 6 PFT 39 NOTES BOTTOM 40 1 PFT CO1 CO2 modular 41 jacks are equipped on the main circuit card of the 43 requires one optional 24 QCDU 4 requires a 25 second QCDU to be installed 46 47 POWER FAILURE 48 STANDARD TELEPHONE 49 49 50 50 NETWORK JACK RJ11 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK FIC 02152 654321 1 6
382. umber 80 P 80 Press CR P80 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required P80 O1 port number Example Port 01 enter O 1 Press key P80 01 1 The system will display 1 or 2 corresponding to tone 1 or tone 2 Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required P80 01 12 Example Tone 2 enter 2 To Exit Program Store Data P80 014 1 2 A To store data press CR P80 B Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered P for this program C To exit this program press CR NOTE Programs 81 89 use 2 proceaure 42 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 TABLE RM AM PROGRAM 93 CO LINE IDENTIFICATION ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter Program Mode gt MODE PROG At the gt MODE prompt enter P R G CR Enter Program Number 93 P 93 Press CR P93 Enter Action Code 1 P93 1 02 LILI up to 16 Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the appropriate L Current 1 0 CO line number Example CO line 2 enter 0 2 The svstem will displav previousiv entered identification characters up to 16 characters Refer to the Svstem Record Sheet and change identification P93 1 02 up to 16 if required 16 characters maximum OVERSEAS Example OVERSEAS To Exit Program Store Data P93 1 02 16 A store data
383. upplied NOTES 1 The printer receives data on Pin 3 RD and transmits data on Pin 2 TD 2 The PDIU DS should be in the connect to DTE mode P1 P9 strapped A B so that it transmits data on Pin 3 RD and receives data on Pin 2 TD 2 lt lt T FIGURE 7 27 DK8 AND DK16 PDIU DS TOSHIBA PRINTER RS 232 CONNECTOR CABLE CONNECTIONS 1 44 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993 HAVES TVPE SMART MODEM PDIU DS FUNCTIONS LIKE A DCE CONFIGURED IN THE CONNECT TO MODEM MODE P1 P9 B C SOIT FUNCTIONS LIKE A DTE MODEM PDIU DS PIN 7 PIN 7 mrs pes en cb pre ERS DSC Rear view of modem DB25 connector Rear view of PDIU DS DB25 connector DB25 FEMALE DB25 FEMALE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR 87654321 87654321 a r 90090900000000 22 20 ETA MALE ETA MALE ETA ETA RS 232 CABLE 50 ft max 24 AWG customer supplied NOTES 1 Modem receives data on pin 2 TD and transmits data on pin 3 RD 2 The PDIU DS must be in the connect to modem mode P1 P9 strapped B C so that it transmits data on pin 2 TD and receives data on pin 3 RD FIGURE 7 28 DK8 AND DK16 PDIU DS TO HAYES TYPE SMART MODEM 5 232 CONNECTOR CABLE CONNECTIONS 1 45 INSTALLATION PERIPHERALS SEGTION 100 816 207 MARGH 1993
384. ured like a DCE must hold DCD and DSR ON continu ously If SW1 2 is OFF DSR follows DTR and DCD will be ON only when the DIU is connected on a data call to another DIU SW1 2 should be OFF on a DIU when itis connected to a personal computer that uses a communications software program to establish data calls with AT com mands and whenever PDIU DS is connected to a modem e SW1 3 The PDIU DI or PDIU DS configured as a DCE sends the Ring Indicate RI signal to the computer to tell the computer DTE that the PDIU is receiving an incoming call SW1 3 should be ON for the DIU to send RI steady and OFF to send at one second ON three seconds OFF intervals e SWI 4 This switch is placed in the ON position if the computer does not output the RTS signal or when connected to a modem that tracks the DCD signal modem set with AT amp C1 Some times the DTE device may use RTS CTS for Ready Busy flow control in these cases SW1 4 should be OFF In this case the DCD signal of the calling DTE is used as the RTS lead of the called DTE andthe DCD signal ofthe called DTE is used as the RTS signal of the other DTE In this case a signal which stops the DTE from transmitting data usually the CTS lead should be cross connected to the DIU s DCD signal Consult the DTE device or application software documentation to determine which type of flow control is required If the DIU DS is connected to a modem that tracks carrier detect AT amp C1 SW1
385. us Enter S E K T X X X X port number Possible status Idle on hook idle off hook busy on hook busy off hook IMPORTANT To prevent service interference station line status must be idle on hook before initiating a test from that station T SEKT XX IDLE ON HOOK T To Check CO Line Status Enter S CO Y Y Y Y CO line number Possible status Idle busy T SCOYY BUSY T To Exit the Test Mode At the T prompt enter Q U I T CR TABLE RM BT GENERAL STATION ACCESS AND BUTTON ACTIVATION ACTION DISPLAY PRINTOUT Enter the Test Mode At the MODE prompt enter T E S T CR gt MODE TEST T To Activate A Button Enter T K X X K Y Y CR XX Port number and button number NOTE Button numbers begin at 01 T TKXX KYY T To Activate A Function Button Enter T K X X F CR F function button designator SPKR S HOLD H CONF C MIC M F 5 H C M TTKXX F T To Access A CO Line via CO Access Code and Dial Out Enter TK X XKO1AAA CR AAA 1 2 or 3 digit CO line access code and telephone number TTKXX K01 AAA T To Access A CO Line via CO Line Button and Dial Out Enter T K X X KV Y CR CO line number Telephone Number TTKXX KYY T To Exit the Test M
386. ut Cut the straps in accor dance with the following steps FIGURE 6 15 NOTE HHEU INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC It is not necessary to cut these straps if the TELEPHONES headset is connected to the HHEU 6 13 INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SEGTION 100 816 206 MARGH 1993 1 Loosen the four captive screws securing the telephone base Figure 6 1 and remove the base 2 Refer to Figure 6 13 and locate the CAR BON straps W201 and W202 Cut both straps 3 Reinstall the telephone base and secure it with its four captive screws 4 40 Beep Strap 4 41 A beep sounds whenever a dialpad button or feature button is pressed on an electronic telephone This beep can be eliminated with the following procedure 1 Remove the four captive screws securing the telephone basetothe telephone Figure 6 1 and remove the base 2 Locate and cut the BEEP strap on the tele phone printed circuit board PCB Figure 6 13 3 Reinstall the electronic telephone base and secure in place using the four captive screws 4 50 Microphone Speaker Threshold Speak erphones only 4 51 High ambient noise levels may cause the speaker on the electronic telephone speakerphone models the EKT6510 S the EKT6520 S and the EKT6520 SD to cut off frequently To make these telephones less sensitive to noise and to prevent the cut off follow the steps below 1 Remove the four captive screws securing the base to the telephone and remove t
387. utton LED is ON for at least one but not all ports in that group 8 40 Programming Procedures 1 Refer to a completed System Record Sheet 2 Place the terminal into the program mode per Paragraph 7 3 Program procedures are categorized and pre sented in the following order Use these pro cedures to store System Record Sheet data in working memory a Initialization procedures These procedures must be completed whenever a system is first installed see Type 3 programs b Type 1 programs 10 1 10 2 10 3 15 16 42 0 77 1 77 2 Type 2 programs Station Class of Service 20 30 31 35 40 41 43 79 81 89 d Type 3 programs e Initialization 90 92 e General 00 01 02 03 04 05 12 13 21 22 19 28 29 32 33 34 36 37 38 39 42 1 8 44 60 69 70 78 80 93 Toll Restriction 45 48 Least Cost Routing 50 56 9 DATA DUMP MODE 9 00 General 9 01 This mode allows three types of data to be displayed or output to a printer Programs Cus tomer Data Base Speed Dialing Numbers Sta tion System and LCD Messages Station Sys tem 9 02 The three procedures for the Data Dump mode are called Program Dump Speed Dialing Dump and LCD Messages Dump 9 03 Program Dump While in the dump mode see Paragraph 7 enter PRG and up to three characters and press CR The alphanumeric char REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SECTION 100 816 600 MARCH 1993 ac
388. will be lit the Data Call and Modem LEDs on DKT 10 will also be lit The screens on PC 1 and PC 2 displav CONNECT XXXX where XXXX is the data transmission speed set bv the com munication software At this time PC 1 and PC 2 are con nected as shown by the thick lines to exchange data file transfers typed mes sages etc 5 To terminate the call Press the telephone Data Release button and Type from PC2 keyboard e The PC screen displays OK b Type A T H from the PC keyboard used in step 5a e 1 s and PC 2 s screens both dis play NO CARRIER e The DATA and MODEM LEDs on DKT 10 will turn off 10 86 PC Auto Dial Voice Call Test see Figure 7 38 There are many off the shelf IBM MS DOS com patible desktop organizer software packages that provide an auto dialer function One of these is the terminal resident SideKick It is used in this section for test explanation purposes only If you choose another auto dialer software package the detailed response may be different than that shown here 1 DIU Programming Program 20 Port 01 LEDs 01 02 and 17 ON all other LEDs OFF Program 39 Port 01 Data Call 56 and Data Release 54 buttons are optional if the PDIU DI is only used for the PC auto dial application the Data Call and Data Release buttons are unnecessary 2 Make sure that the auto dial application soft ware is installed on the PC root directory and that the communication parame
389. ws and remove the telephone base Figure 6 1 2 Using a suitable cutter remove the handset hanger from the base Figure 6 1 Insert the handset hanger in the slot provided on the frontofthetelephone Figure 6 2 The hanger FIGURE 6 1 fits in the notch on the handset cradle REMOVING THE TELEPHONE BASE 3 Rotate the telephone base 180 degrees and secure it to the telephone with its four captive screws Figure 6 3 HANDSET HANGER FIGURE 6 2 FIGURE 6 3 HANDSET HANGER WALL MOUNTING BASE ROTATION 6 3 INSTALLATION STATION APPARATUS SEGTION 100 816 206 MARGH 1993 4 the telephone to the wall modular connector with a cord approximatelv four inches long available at most telephone sup companies Route the cord into the hol low portion of the base 5 Mount the telephone on the wall mounting modular connector plate 3 DIGITAL TELEPHONE UPGRADES 3 00 This section describes how to upgrade and configure 2000 and 1000 series Digital Tele phones for features and options 3 10 Simultaneous Voice and Data Upgrade PDIU DI2 and PDIU DI 3 11 Both the 2000 and 1000 series Digital Tele phones can be upgraded with an integrated data interface unitto transmit and receive simultaneous voice and data calls There are two versions of the integrated unit the PDIU DI and the PDIU DI2 The 2000 series telephones can only be equipped with a PDIU DI2 and the 1000 series telephones can only be equ

Mark Levinson N 332 Stereo Amplifier User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents